3R5012003CT
Inglés 3R5012003CT (05.13) (GT9)
EXEO
Owner’s manual
EXEO Inglés (05.13)
SEAT S.A. se preocupa constantemente por mantener todos sus tipos y modelos en un desarrollo continuo. Por ello le rogamos que com-
prenda que, en cualquier momento, puedan producirse modificaciones del vehículo entregado en cuanto a la forma, el equipamiento y
la técnica. Por esta razón, no se puede derivar derecho alguno basándose en los datos, las ilustraciones y descripciones del presente
Manual.
Los textos, las ilustraciones y las normas de este manual se basan en el estado de la información en el momento de la realización de la
impresión. Salvo error u omisión, la información recogida en el presente manual es válida en la fecha de cierre de su edición.
No está permitida la reimpresión, la reproducción o la traducción, total o parcial, sin la autorización escrita de SEAT.
SEAT se reserva expresamente todos los derechos según la ley sobre el “Copyright”. Reservados todos los derechos sobre modificación.
❀
Este papel está fabricado con celulosa blanqueada sin cloro.
© SEAT S.A. - Reimpresión: 15.04.13
Foreword
This Instruction Manual and its corresponding supplements should be read carefully to familiarise yourself
with your vehicle.
Besides the regular care and maintenance of the vehicle, its correct handling will help preserve its value.
For safety reasons, always note the information concerning accessories, modifications and part replace-
ments.
If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board documentation to the new owner, as it should be kept with the
vehicle.
Table of Contents
Manual structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . . 10
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Knee airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Warning and indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Auto-check system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Speed warning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Onboard computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Menu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Tyre pressure monitoring* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Multifunction steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Remote control keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Childproof lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Sliding/tilting sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Rear vision mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Seats and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Manual adjustment of the front seats . . . . . . . . . 133
Electric adjustment of front seats* . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Lumbar support* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Driver seat memory* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Ashtray*, cigarette lighter* and electric sockets* . .147
Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Start-Stop function* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Parking aid acoustic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Cruise speed* (Cruise control system) . . . . . . . . 176
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Automatic gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Practical Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Intelligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Servotronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Driving and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Economical and environmentally friendly driving 196
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
3Table of Contents
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Removable towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . 210
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Vehicle interior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Accessories, replacement of parts and
modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Accessories and spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Mobile phones and two-way radios . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Athermic windscreen* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . . 235
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel . . . . . . . . . 252
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Tyre repair* (Tyre-Mobility-System) . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Changing bulbs. Halogen headlights . . . . . . . . . 266
Changing bulbs. Bi-Xenon AFS headlights . . . . . 272
Changing tail light bulbs (on side panel) . . . . . . 276
Changing tail light bulbs (on rear lid) . . . . . . . . . 281
Side turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Registration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Sun visor light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Description of specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
4 Table of Contents
5Manual structure
Manual structure
What you should know before reading this manual
This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the ve-
hicle at the time of press. Some of the equipment hereunder described will
not be available until a later date, or is only available in certain markets.
As this is a general manual for the EXEO, some of the equipment and func-
tions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or ver-
sions of the model. These may vary or be modified depending on technical
and market requirements, which is in no way deceptive advertising.
The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the
equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.
The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual re-
fer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when oth-
erwise indicated.
The equipment marked with an asterisk** is fitted as standard only in cer-
tain versions, and is only supplied as optional extras for some versions, or
are only offered in certain countries.
All registered marks are indicated with ®. Although the copyright sym-
bol does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.
The section is continued on the following page.
Marks the end of a section.
WARNING
Texts preceded by this symbol contain information on safety. They warn
you about possible dangers of accident or injury.
®
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage
to your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts preceded by this symbol contain relevant information concerning envi-
ronmental protection.
Note
Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.
6 Content
Content
This manual is structured to provide the information you need in an organ-
ised way. The content of this Manual is divided into sections which belong
to chapters (e.g. “Air conditioning”). The entire manual is divided into five
large parts which are:
1. Safety First
Information about the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as
seat belts, airbags, seats, etc.
2. Operating instructions
Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of your
vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, about how to create a suit-
able climate in the vehicle interior, etc.
3. Practical Tips
Advice relating to the driving, caring and maintenance of your vehicle and
certain problems you can solve yourself.
4. Technical specifications
Figures, values and the dimensions of your vehicle.
5. Alphabetic index
At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will
help you to quickly find the information you require.
7Safe driving
Safety First
Safe driving
Brief introduction
Dear SEAT Driver
Safety first!
This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and
warnings that you should read and consider for both your own
safety and for your passengers' safety.
WARNING
● This manual contains important information about the operation of
the vehicle, both for the driver and the passengers. The other sections of
the on-board documentation also contain further information that you
should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passen-
gers.
● Ensure that the on-board documentation is kept in the vehicle at all
times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to
another person.
Safety equipment
The safety equipment listed here are part of the vehicle's
passenger restraint system. They work together to help re-
duce the risk of injury in a wide variety of accident situa-
tions.
Your safety and the safety of your passengers should not be left to chance.
In the event of an accident, the safety features incorporated in your vehicle
are capable of reducing the risk of injury. These are just a few of the safety
features in your SEAT:
● Three-point seat belts optimised for all seats
● Belt force limiters for the seats
● Belt tension devices for the front seat belts
● Front airbags
● Side airbags in the front and rear seat backrests*
● Head-protection airbags*
● Knee airbag for left-hand drive only
● ISOFIX anchor points* for ISOFIX child safety seats on the outer rear
seats
● Height-adjustable head restraints
● Adjustable steering column
These individual safety features are harmonised to provide you and your
passengers with the best possible protection in case of an accident. Howev-
er, they can only be effective if you and your passengers sit in the correct
position and adjust and use the safety equipment properly.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
8 Safe driving
Therefore, this chapter explains why these safety features are so important,
how they can protect you, what you need to remember when using them
and how you and your passengers can gain the most benefit from them.
There are also a number of important safety warnings that you and your
passengers should always observe in order to minimise the risk of injury.
Safety is everyone's responsibility!
Before setting off
The driver is responsible for the safety of the passengers
and the safe operation of the vehicle at all times.
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note
the following points before setting off:
– Make sure that all lights and indicators are working properly.
– Check tyre pressure.
– Make sure that all windows are clean and give good visibility to
the outside.
– Secure all luggage and other items carefully ⇒ page 16.
– Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.
– Adjust the front seat, head restraint and mirrors correctly.
– Make sure that the head restraints for all passengers are adjus-
ted to the correct position.
– Make sure that children are protected with suitable safety seats
and properly worn seat belts ⇒ page 46.
– Sit in a correct position. Inform your passengers as to how they
should sit ⇒ page 10.
– Fasten your seat belt correctly. Make sure that your passengers
do the same ⇒ page 18.
What affects safe driving?
Safety on the road is directly related to how you drive, and
can also be affected by the passengers in the vehicle.
The driver is responsible for the safety of the vehicle and all its oc-
cupants. If your ability to drive is impaired in any way, you endan-
ger yourself and other road users ⇒
. Therefore:
– Do not let yourself be distracted by passengers or by using a
mobile phone, etc.
– Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (by medica-
tion, alcohol, drugs, etc.).
– Obey all traffic regulations and speed limits and always main-
tain a safe distance to the vehicle in front.
– Always adjust your speed to suit the road, traffic and weather
conditions.
– Take frequent breaks on long trips. Do not drive for more than
two hours without a stop.
– If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or stressed.
9Safe driving
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci-
dents increases.
What affects driving safety?
Driving safety is largely determined by your driving style
and the personal behaviour of all vehicle occupants.
As a driver, you are responsible for yourself and your passengers.
When your concentration or driving safety is affected by any cir-
cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as others on the road
⇒
, for this reason:
– Always pay attention to traffic and do not get distracted by pas-
sengers or telephone calls.
– Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (e.g. by medi-
cation, alcohol, drugs).
– Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
– Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and
weather conditions.
– When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least
every two hours.
– If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or stressed.
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci-
dents increases.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
10 Safe driving
Proper sitting position for occupants
Correct sitting position for driver
The correct sitting position for the driver is important for
safe and relaxed driving.
Fig. 1 The correct dis-
tance between driver and
steering wheel
Fig. 2 Correct head re-
straint position for driver
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
an accident, we recommend the following adjustments for the driv-
er:
– Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least
25 cm between the steering wheel and the centre of your chest
⇒ Fig. 1.
– Move the driver seat forwards or backwards so that you are able
to press the accelerator, brake and clutch pedals to the floor
with your knees still slightly angled ⇒
.
– Ensure that you can reach the highest point of the steering
wheel.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the
same level as the top of your head ⇒ Fig. 2.
–
Move the seat backrest to an upright position so that your back
rests completely against it.
11Safe driving
– Fasten your seat belt securely ⇒ page 18.
– Keep both feet in the footwell so that you have the vehicle un-
der control at all times.
Adjustment of the driver seat ⇒ page 133.
WARNING
● An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.
● Adjust the driver seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between
the centre of the chest and the centre of the steering wheel ⇒ Fig. 1. If
you are sitting closer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you
properly.
● If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the mini-
mum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The workshop
will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
● When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the
outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. This reduces
the risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.
● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any
other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if
the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and
head.
● To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking ma-
noeuvres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The
airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when
the backrest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her
seat belt correctly. The further the seat backrests are tilted to the rear,
the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web
or to the incorrect sitting position!
● Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.
Correct sitting position for front passenger
The front passenger must sit at least 25 cm away from the
dash panel so that the airbag can provide the greatest pos-
sible protection in the event that it is triggered.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
an accident, we recommend the following adjustments for the front
passenger:
– Move the front passenger seat back as far as possible ⇒
.
– Move the seat backrest to an upright position so that your back
rests completely against it.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the
same level as the top of your head ⇒ page 13.
– Always keep both feet in the footwell in front of the front pas-
senger seat.
– Fasten your seat belt securely ⇒ page 18.
It is possible to deactivate the front passenger airbag in exceptional circum-
stances ⇒ page 24.
Adjusting the front passenger seat ⇒ page 133.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
12 Safe driving
WARNING
● An incorrect sitting position of the front passenger can lead to severe
injuries.
● Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is at least 25 cm be-
tween your chest and the dash panel. If you are sitting closer than 25 cm,
the airbag system cannot protect you properly.
● If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the mini-
mum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The workshop
will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
● Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is moving;
never rest them on the dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An in-
correct sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case
of a sudden braking or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could
sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.
● To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger in events such as
sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the back-
rest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide op-
timal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the front
passenger is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the seat
backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incor-
rect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!
● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order to achieve maximum pro-
tection.
Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats
Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their
feet in the footwells, have the head restraints positioned for
use and wear their seat belts properly.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking ma-
noeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear seat bench must
consider the following:
– Adjust the head restraint to the correct position ⇒ page 14.
– Always keep both feet in the footwell in front of the rear seat.
– Fasten your seat belt securely ⇒ page 18.
– Use an appropriate child restraint system when you take chil-
dren in the vehicle ⇒ page 46.
WARNING
● If the passengers in the rear seats are not sitting properly, they could
sustain severe injuries.
● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order to achieve maximum pro-
tection.
● Seat belts can only provide optimal protection when seat backrests
are in an upright position and the vehicle occupants are wearing their
seat belts correctly. If passengers In the rear seats are not sitting in an
upright position, the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the seat
belt increases.
13Safe driving
Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
Fig. 3 Correctly adjusted
head restraint viewed
from the front
Fig. 4 Correctly adjusted
head restraint viewed
from the side
Adjust the head restraint correctly in order to achieve maximum
protection.
– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same
level as the top of your head or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head and, at the very least, at eye level
⇒ Fig. 3 and ⇒ Fig. 4.
Adjusting the head restraints ⇒ page 133
WARNING
● Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted
increases the risk of severe injuries.
● Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event
of a collision or accident.
● Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury
during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
● The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the height
of the passenger.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
14 Safe driving
Correct adjustment of rear seat head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
the passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries
in most accident situations
Fig. 5 Outer rear seats:
Head restraints
Fig. 6 Head restraint po-
sition warning label
Raising the head restraint
– Take hold of the sides of the head restraint with both hands.
– Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.
Lowering the head restraint
– Press button
A
⇒ Fig. 5 and lower the head restraint.
Removing the head restraint
– Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.
– Press button
A
⇒ Fig. 5 and pull out the head restraint.
Fitting the head restraint
– Insert the head restraint in its guides until it clicks into place.
Press button
A
and lower the head restraint.
WARNING
● Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the
head restraints are in the non-use position. See the warning label loca-
ted on the rear side fixed window ⇒ Fig. 6.
● Do not swap the centre rear head restraint with either of the outer
seat rear head restraints.
● Risk of injury in case of an accident!
CAUTION
Note the instructions on the adjustment of the head restraints ⇒ page 13.
15Safe driving
Examples of incorrect sitting positions
An incorrect sitting position can lead to severe injuries to ve-
hicle occupants.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only when the belt webs
are properly positioned. Incorrect sitting positions substantially re-
duce the protective function of seat belts and increase the risk of
injury due to incorrect seat belt position. As the driver, you are re-
sponsible for all passengers, especially children.
– Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in
the vehicle while travelling ⇒
.
The following list contains examples of sitting positions that could be dan-
gerous for all vehicle occupants. The list is not complete, but we would like
to make you aware of this issue.
Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:
● Never stand in the vehicle.
● Never stand on the seats.
● Never kneel on the seats.
● Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.
● Never lean against the dash panel.
● Never lie on the rear bench.
● Never sit on the front edge of a seat.
● Never sit sideways.
● Never lean out of a window.
● Never put your feet out of a window.
● Never put your feet on the dash panel.
● Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.
● Do not allow anyone to travel in the footwell.
● Never travel without wearing the seat belt.
● Do not allow anyone to travel in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
● Any incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.
● Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the vehicle occupants to se-
vere injuries if airbags are triggered, by striking a vehicle occupant who
has assumed an incorrect sitting position.
● Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and
maintain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passen-
gers to sit properly and to stay in this position during the trip ⇒ page 10,
Proper sitting position for occupants.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
16 Safe driving
Pedal area
Pedals
The operation of all pedals must never be impaired by ob-
jects or floor mats.
– Ensure that you can always press the accelerator, brake and
clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor.
– Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired to their initial po-
sitions.
Use only floor mats which leave the pedal area free and can be securely fas-
tened on the footwell.
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in
order to stop the vehicle.
Wearing suitable shoes
Always wear shoes which support your feet properly and give you a good
feeling for the pedals.
WARNING
● Restricting pedal operation can lead to critical situations while driv-
ing.
● Never place objects on the driver footwell. An object could move into
the pedal area and impair pedal operation. In the event of a sudden driv-
ing or braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to operate the brake,
clutch or accelerator pedal. Risk of accident!
Floor mats on the driver side
Only floor mats may be used which can be securely fastened
in the footwell and do not impair operation of the pedals.
– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened during the trip
and do not obstruct the pedals ⇒
.
Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to
prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a speci-
alised dealership.
WARNING
● If the pedals are obstructed, an accident may occur. Risk of serious
injuries.
● Ensure that the floor mats are always securely attached.
● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original
floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the ped-
als. Risk of accident.
Storing objects
Loading the luggage compartment
All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured
in the luggage compartment.
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the driv-
ing safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the
centre of gravity.
17Safe driving
– Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment.
– Place heavy objects as far forward as possible in the luggage
compartment.
– Place the heavy objects first.
WARNING
● Loose luggage and other objects in the luggage compartment could
cause serious injuries.
● Use suitable straps to secure heavy objects.
● During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects can be thrown
forward, injuring vehicle occupants or passers-by. This increased risk of
injury will be further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating
airbag. If this happens, objects can be transformed into “missiles”. Risk
of fatal injury.
● Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting
heavy objects; this may affect vehicle handling and lead to an accident.
Therefore, it is essential to adjust your speed and driving style accord-
ingly, to avoid accidents.
● Never exceed the allowed axle weights or allowed maximum weight.
If the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the driv-
ing characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, inju-
ries and damage to the vehicle.
● Never leave your vehicle unattended, especially when the rear lid is
open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment, closing the
door behind them; they will be trapped and run the risk of death.
● Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Close and lock
all the doors and rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Before you lock the
vehicle, make sure that there are no adults or children in the vehicle.
● Never transport passengers in the luggage compartment. All vehicle
occupants must have their seat belt fastened ⇒ page 18.
Note
● Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used
air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-
ment. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
18 Seat belts
Seat belts
Brief introduction
Before driving: remember your seat belt!
Wearing a seat belt properly can save your life!
In this section you will learn the importance of wearing seat belts,
how they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.
– Read and consider all the information as well as the warnings in
this chapter.
WARNING
● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju-
ries increases.
● Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in case of sudden
braking manoeuvres or accidents. For safety reasons, you and all other
vehicle occupants must always wear the seat belts properly while the ve-
hicle is moving.
● Pregnant women or people with physical disabilities must also use
seat belts. Like all other vehicle occupants, these people can also sustain
severe injuries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.
Number of seats
Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front and three in the rear. Each seat
is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
In some versions, your vehicle is approved only for four seats. Two front
seats and two rear seats.
WARNING
● Never transport more than the permitted amount of people in your ve-
hicle.
● Every vehicle occupant must properly fasten and wear the seat belt
belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro-
priate child restraint system.
Seat belt warning lamp*
The control lamp acts as a reminder to the driver to fasten
the seat belt.
Before starting the vehicle:
– Fasten your seat belt securely.
– Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly be-
fore driving off.
– Protect children by using a child seat according to the child's
height and weight.
After switching on the ignition, the warning lamp will remain lit until the
driver and front passenger (if applicable) have fastened their seat belts.
When the vehicle has reached a certain speed, you will also hear a warning
signal and the warning light will flash.
19Seat belts
Why wear seat belts?
Physical principles of frontal collisions
In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic
energy must be absorbed.
Fig. 7 Vehicle about to
hit a wall: the occupants
are not wearing seat
belts
Fig. 8 The vehicle hits
the wall: the occupants
are not wearing seat
belts
It is easy to explain how the laws of physics work in the case of a head-on
collision: When a vehicle starts moving
⇒
Fig. 7, a certain amount of energy
known as kinetic energy is produced in the vehicle and its occupants.
The amount of kinetic energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and the
weight of the vehicle and its passengers. The higher the speed and the
greater the weight, the more energy there is to be released in an accident.
The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle. If the
speed doubles from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), for example,
the kinetic energy is multiplied by four.
Because the vehicle occupants in our example are not restrained by seat
belts, all of the occupants' kinetic energy has to be absorbed at the point of
impact
⇒
Fig. 8.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h (20 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting
on bodies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater
speed these forces are even higher.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
20 Seat belts
Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are not “attached” to the vehicle.
In a head-on collision, they will move forward at the same speed their vehi-
cle was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to
head-on collisions, but to all accidents and collisions.
The danger of not using the seat belt
The general belief that the passengers can protect them-
selves with their hands in a minor collision is false.
Fig. 9 A driver not wear-
ing a seat belt is thrown
forward violently
Fig. 10 The unbelted
passenger in the rear
seat is thrown forward vi-
olently, hitting the driver
wearing a seat belt
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great
that it is not possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In a frontal colli-
sion, unbelted vehicle occupants are thrown forward and will make violent
contact with the steering wheel, dash panel, windscreen or whatever else is
in the way ⇒ Fig. 9.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts. When triggered, airbags
provide only additional protection. All occupants (including the driver) must
wear seat belts properly at all times during the trip. This will reduce the risk
of severe injuries in the event of an accident – regardless of whether an air-
bag is fitted for the seat or not.
Note that airbags can be triggered only once. To achieve the best possible
protection, the seat belt must always be worn properly so that you will be
protected in accidents in which no airbag is deployed.
It is also important for the rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as
they could otherwise be thrown forward violently through the vehicle interi-
or in an accident. Passengers in the rear seats who do not use seat belts
endanger not only themselves but also the front occupants ⇒ Fig. 10.
21Seat belts
Seat belt protection
Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the
event of an accident.
Fig. 11 A driver wearing
the seat belt properly is
secured by the belt in
sharp braking
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting po-
sitions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an acci-
dent. Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could
lead to severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the dan-
ger of being thrown from the vehicle.
Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the
ability of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front part of your vehicle
and other passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also de-
signed to absorb the kinetic energy released in a collision. Taken together,
all these features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the
risk of injury.
Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts
substantially reduce the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is
why it is so important to fasten seat belts before every trip, even when "just
driving around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics
have shown that wearing seat belts is an effective means of substantially
reducing the risk of injury and improving the chances of survival in a seri-
ous accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protection
provided by airbags in the event of an accident. For this reason, wearing a
seat belt is required by law in most countries.
Although your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the seat belts must be fas-
tened and worn. The front airbags, for example, are only triggered in some
frontal accidents. The front airbags will not be triggered during minor frontal
collisions, minor side collisions, rear collisions, overturns or accidents in
which the airbag trigger threshold value in the control unit is not exceeded.
Therefore, you should always wear your seat belt and ensure that all vehicle
occupants have fastened their seat belts properly before you drive off!
Safety instructions on using seat belts
If seat belts are used correctly, they can considerably reduce
the risk of injury in an accident.
– Always wear the seat belt as described in this section.
– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened at all times and are
not damaged.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
22 Seat belts
WARNING
● If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe
injuries increases. The optimal protection from seat belts can be ach-
ieved only if you use them properly.
● Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town.
The other vehicle occupants must also wear the seat belts at all times,
otherwise they run the risk of being injured.
● The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the seat belt is not
positioned correctly.
● Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat
belt.
● Always keep both feet in the footwell in front of your seat as long as
the vehicle is in motion.
● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal
injury.
● The seat belt must never be twisted while it is being worn.
● The seat belt should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as
glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.
● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any
sharp edges.
● Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi-
tion.
● Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the
proper fit and function of the seat belts, reducing their capacity to pro-
tect.
● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or
other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.
● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or similar instruments to al-
ter the position of the belt webbing.
WARNING (Continued)
● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retrac-
tors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an
accident. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at reg-
ular intervals.
● Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must
be replaced by a specialised workshop. Renewal may be necessary even
if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be
checked.
● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts
must not be removed or modified in any way.
● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the retractors may not work
properly ⇒ page 220.
23Seat belts
Seat belts
Seat belt adjustment
The seat belts for the front and rear occupants are locked in-
to position by a latch.
Fig. 12 Belt buckle and
latch plate of seat belt
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the seat belt is not
positioned correctly.
– Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
– To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly
across your chest and lap.
– Insert the latch into the buckle for the appropriate seat and
push it down until it is securely locked with a click ⇒ Fig. 12.
– Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged
in the buckle.
The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder
strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is
pulled slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in steep areas
or bends and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder
belt is locked.
The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with seat belt ten-
sioners ⇒ page 27.
WARNING
● An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of
an accident.
● The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an
upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.
● Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this,
the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is in-
creased.
● If a vehicle occupant is incorrectly belted in, the seat belt cannot pro-
tect him or her properly. An incorrectly positioned seat belt can cause ex-
tremely severe injuries.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
24 Seat belts
Seat belt position
Seat belts offer their maximum protection only when they
are properly positioned.
Fig. 13 Correct seat belt
and head restraint posi-
tions, viewed from front
Fig. 14 Correct seat belt
and head restraint posi-
tions, viewed from side
The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder
region:
● belt height adjustment for the front seats.
● front seat height adjustment*.
WARNING
● An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of
an accident.
● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoul-
der, never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the
torso ⇒ Fig. 13.
● The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across
the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis
⇒ Fig. 14. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.
● Read and observe the warnings ⇒ page 21.
25Seat belts
Pregnant women must also fasten their seat belts properly
The best protection for the unborn child is for the mother to
wear the seat belt properly at all times during the pregnan-
cy.
Fig. 15 Positioning seat
belts during pregnancy
The seat belt provides maximum protection only when the seat belt
is properly positioned ⇒ page 24.
– Adjust the front seat and head restraint correctly ⇒ page 10.
– Holding the latch plate, pull the belt evenly across your chest
and as low as possible over the pelvis ⇒ Fig. 15.
– Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat
and push it down until it is securely locked with a click ⇒
.
– Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged
in the buckle.
WARNING
● An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of
an accident.
● For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as
possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so
that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.
● Read and observe the warnings ⇒ page 21.
Seat belt release
The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has
come to a standstill.
Fig. 16 Remove latch
plate from buckle
– Press the red button on the belt buckle
⇒
Fig. 16. The latch
plate is released and springs out
⇒
.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
26 Seat belts
– Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the
trim is not damaged.
WARNING
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you
increase the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.
Seat belt height adjustment
Seat belt height adjusters can be used to adjust the height
of the shoulder area of the seat belt.
Fig. 17 Belt height ad-
juster
The belt height adjuster can be lowered by keeping the button
pressed down at the same time.
– Press button
⇒
Fig. 17
1
to adjust the belt height.
– Take hold of the top guide fitting and slide it up or down so that
the shoulder part of the seat belt is positioned roughly midway
over the shoulder, although it must never rest against the neck
⇒ Fig. 17
2
⇒ in Seat belt position on page 24.
– After adjusting, pull the belt sharply to check that the catch on
the guide fitting is engaged securely.
Note
It is also possible to adjust the height of the front seats to obtain the best
position for the front seat belts.
Incorrectly fastened seat belts
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe or even mortal
injuries.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is
properly worn. The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order
described in this chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs sub-
stantially the protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe or
fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially in-
creased when a deploying airbag strikes a vehicle occupant who
has assumed an incorrect sitting position. As the driver, you are re-
sponsible for yourself and all passengers, especially children.
Therefore:
– Never allow anyone to wear the seat belt incorrectly while the
vehicle is moving ⇒
.
27Seat belts
WARNING
● An incorrectly worn seat belt increases the risk of severe injuries.
● Before every trip, instruct your passengers to adjust their seat belts
properly and to wear them for the whole journey.
● Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the
use of seat belts ⇒ page 21.
Seat belt tensioners
Function of the seat belt tensioner
During a frontal collision, the seat belts on the front seats
are retracted automatically.
The seat belts for the occupants in the front seats are equipped with belt
tensioners. Sensors will trigger the belt tensioners during severe head-on,
lateral and rear collisions only if the seat belt is being worn. This retracts
and tightens the seat belts, reducing the forward motion of the occupants.
The seat belt tensioner can be triggered only once.
The seat belt tensioners will not be triggered in the event of a light frontal,
side or rear collision, if the vehicle overturns or in situations where no large
forces act on the front, side or rear of the vehicle.
Note
● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is
normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.
● The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or
components of the system are scrapped. Specialised workshops are famili-
ar with these regulations, which are also available to you.
Service and disposal of belt tensioners
The belt tensioners are components of the seat belts that are installed in
the seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tensioners or remove and
install parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat belt
may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an acci-
dent, the belt tensioners function incorrectly or not at all.
So that the effectiveness of the seat belt tensioner is not reduced and that
removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula-
tions, which are known to the specialised workshops, must be observed.
WARNING
● Improper use or repairs not carried out by qualified mechanics in-
crease the risk of severe or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may fail to
trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.
● Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt ten-
sioners or seat belts.
● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and automatic retractor cannot be
repaired.
● Any work on the belt tensioners and seat belts, including the removal
and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work, must
be performed by a specialised workshop only.
● The belt tensioners will only provide protection for one accident and
must be changed if they have been activated.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
28 Airbag system
Airbag system
Brief introduction
Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting
position?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the
seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sit-
ting position must be assumed.
For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please en-
sure the following before driving:
– Always wear the seat belt properly ⇒ page 18.
– Adjust the driver seat and the steering wheel correctly
⇒ page 10.
– Adjust the front passenger seat correctly ⇒ page 11.
– Adjust the head restraint correctly ⇒ page 13.
– Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your
vehicle ⇒ page 46.
The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second. If you have an
incorrect seating position at the time the airbag is deployed, it could cause
you critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle occupants as-
sume a correct sitting position while travelling.
Sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat
belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. In this case,
the inflating airbag may inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. This
also applies to children.
Always maintain the greatest possible distance between yourself and the
front airbag. This way, the front airbags can completely deploy when trig-
gered, providing their maximum protection.
The most important factors that will trigger an airbag are: the type of acci-
dent, the angle of collision and the speed of the vehicle.
Whether the airbags are triggered depends primarily on the vehicle deceler-
ation rate resulting from the collision and detected by the control unit. If the
vehicle deceleration occurring during the collision and measured by the
control unit remains below the specified reference values, the front, side
and/or curtain airbag will not be triggered. Take into account that the visible
damage in a vehicle involved in an accident, no matter how serious, is not a
determining factor for the airbags to have been triggered.
WARNING
● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assuming an incorrect sitting po-
sition can lead to critical or fatal injuries.
● All vehicle occupants, including children, who are not properly belted
can sustain critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered. Children up
to 12 years old should always travel on the rear seat. Never transport
children in the vehicle if they are not restrained or the restraint system is
not appropriate for their age, size or weight.
● If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side
while travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a sub-
stantially increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be fur-
ther increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.
29Airbag system
WARNING (Continued)
● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating airbag, always wear the
seat belt properly ⇒ page 18.
● Always adjust the front seats properly.
The danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger
seat
Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front pas-
senger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.
The front passenger front airbag is a serious risk for a child if it is activated.
The front passenger seat is life threatening to a child if he/she is transpor-
ted in a rear-facing child seat. Children up to 12 years old should always
travel on the rear seat.
If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating
airbag can strike it with such force that it can cause critical or fatal injuries.
Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear
seats. That is the safest place for children in the vehicle. Alternatively, the
front passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch
⇒ page 44. When transporting children, use a child seat suitable for the
age and size of each child ⇒ page 46.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to deactivate the air-
bag, the vehicle must be taken to a Technical Service.
WARNING
● If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the
child of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident in-
creases.
● Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the
front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal in-
juries if the front passenger airbag is triggered.
● An inflating front passenger airbag can strike the rear-facing child
seat and project it with great force against the door, the roof or the back-
rest.
● If, under special circumstances, it is necessary to transport a child in
a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, it is absolutely es-
sential that you observe the following safety measures:
– Deactivate the front passenger airbag ⇒ page 44, Deactivating
airbags.
– Child seats must be approved by the child seat manufacturer for
use on a front passenger seat with front or side airbag.
– Follow the installation instructions given by the child seat manu-
facturer and observe the safety instructions ⇒ page 46, Child safe-
ty.
– Before properly installing the child seat, push the front passenger
seat completely backwards so that the greatest possible distance to
the front passenger airbag is ensured.
– Ensure that no objects prevent the front passenger seat from being
pushed completely back.
– The backrest of the front passenger seat must be in an upright po-
sition.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
30 Airbag system
Control lamp for airbag and seat belt tensioner
This control lamp monitors the airbag and seat belt tension-
er system.
The control lamp monitors all airbags and seat belt tensioners in the vehi-
cle, including control units and wiring connections.
Monitoring of airbag and belt tensioner system
Both the airbag and belt tensioner systems operation is constantly moni-
tored electronically. The control lamp will light every time the ignition is
switched on until you attach your seatbelt.
The system must be checked when the control lamp :
● does not light up when the ignition is switched on
● turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on
● lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving
In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously.
Have the system inspected immediately by a specialised workshop.
If any of the airbags are disabled by a Technical Service, the warning lamp
lights for several seconds more after the verification and will turn off if there
is no fault.
WARNING
● If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tensioner system cannot
properly perform its protective function.
● If a malfunction occurred, have the system checked immediately by a
specialised workshop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the airbag
system and belt tensioners may not be triggered, or may not be triggered
correctly.
Repairs, maintenance and disposal of airbags
The parts of the airbag system are installed in various places in your vehi-
cle. If work is carried out on the airbag system or parts have to be removed
and fitted on the system when performing other repair work, parts of the air-
bag system may be damaged. In the event of an accident this could cause
the airbag to inflate incorrectly or not inflate at all.
The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or
components of the airbag are scrapped. Specialised workshops and vehicle
disposal centres are familiar with these requirements.
WARNING
● If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the airbags are
used incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries is increased. The air-
bags may fail to inflate, or could inflate in the wrong circumstances.
● Do not cover or stick anything on the steering wheel hub or the sur-
face of the airbag unit on the passenger side of the dash panel, and do
not obstruct or modify them in any way.
● It is important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or tele-
phone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
● To clean the steering wheel or dash panel, you may use only a dry or a
water-moistened cloth. Never clean the dash panel and the airbag mod-
ule surface with cleaners containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface
to become porous. If the airbag triggered, plastic parts could become de-
tached and cause injuries.
● Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the airbag
system.
31Airbag system
WARNING (Continued)
● Any work on the airbag system or removal and installation of the air-
bag components for other repairs (such as repairs to the steering wheel)
should be performed only by a specialised workshop. Specialised work-
shops have the necessary tools, repair information and qualified person-
nel.
● We strongly recommend you to go to a specialised workshop for all
work on the airbag system.
● Never attempt to alter the front bumper or the body.
● The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them
once they have deployed.
For the sake of the environment
The airbags, which are a special type of waste, must be disposed of through
an authorised service, because they contain pyrotechnic elements.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
32 Airbag system
Front airbags
Description of front airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
Fig. 18 Driver airbag in
the steering wheel and
knee airbag in the dash
panel
Fig. 19 Front passenger
airbag located in dash
panel
The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel ⇒ Fig. 18 and
the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel ⇒ Fig. 19. Air-
bags are identified by the word “AIRBAG”. On the driver side, the knee air-
bag* is found in the footwell lining, under the instrument panel.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the front
occupants additional protection for the head and chest in the event of a se-
vere frontal collision ⇒ page 35, Safety notes on the front airbag system.
In addition to their normal function of restraining the occupants, the seat
belts also hold the driver and front passenger in a position where the air-
bags can provide maximum protection in a frontal collision.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the vehicle occupants are
wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints
properly. Therefore, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times,
not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your
safety ⇒ page 18, Brief introduction.
The main parts of the front airbag system are:
● an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit)
● the two front airbags (airbag with gas generator) for the driver and front
passenger
● a knee airbag* for the driver,
● a control lamp on the dash panel ⇒ page 30
The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag control
lamp will light up for a few seconds every time the ignition is switched on
(self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system if the control lamp :
● does not light up when the ignition is switched on ⇒ page 30
● turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on
● lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving
33Airbag system
The front airbag system will not be triggered if:
● the ignition is switched off
● there is a minor frontal collision
● there is a side collision
● there is a rear-end collision
● the vehicle turns over
WARNING
● The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if
the occupants are seated correctly ⇒ page 10, Proper sitting position for
occupants.
● If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked
immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a frontal colli-
sion the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Operation of front airbags
Inflated airbags reduce the risk of injuries to the head or
chest.
Fig. 20 Inflated front air-
bags
The airbag system is designed so that the airbags for the driver and front
passenger are triggered in a severe frontal collision.
In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbags fill with a propellant gas and de-
ploy in front of the driver and front passenger
⇒
Fig. 20. The fully deployed
airbags cushion the forward movement of the front occupants and help to
reduce the risk of injury to the head and the upper part of the body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag. After the collision, the
airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibility.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
34 Airbag system
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to
provide additional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may
develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication
of fire in the vehicle.
Airbag covers when the frontal airbags are triggered
Fig. 21 Airbag covers reacting when the front airbags
are triggered
The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel or dash panel when the
driver and front passenger airbags are triggered ⇒ Fig. 21. The airbag cov-
ers remain connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.
35Airbag system
Safety notes on the front airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce
the risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
WARNING
● It is important for the driver and front passenger to keep a distance of
at least 25 cm from the steering wheel and dash panel. If the minimum
distance is not observed then the airbags do not correctly protect the ve-
hicle occupants; risk of fatal injuries! In addition, the front seats and
head restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the
occupant.
● If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side
while travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a sub-
stantially increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be fur-
ther increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.
● Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate re-
straint system. If the airbag is triggered in an accident, children can sus-
tain serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates ⇒ page 46,
Child safety.
● The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags
must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects.
● The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them
once they have deployed.
● It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or
telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
● Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any
way.
Knee airbag*
Description of the knee airbag
The airbag system provides additional protection to front
seat passengers if they are properly secured.
Fig. 22 Driver knee air-
bag
The knee airbag for the driver is located in the dash panel underneath the
steering wheel
⇒
Fig. 22.
The knee airbag offers additional protection to the driver's knees and upper
and lower thigh areas as a supplement to the seat belts.
If the front airbags deploy, the knee airbag also deploys in severe frontal
collisions
⇒
page 33.
Besides their normal safety function, seat belts help keep the driver in posi-
tion in case of a frontal collision so that the airbags can provide protection.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts. It is, on the other hand,
part of the overall occupant safety system of your vehicle. Always remember
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
36 Airbag system
that the airbag system can only help to protect you if you are wearing your
seat belt and wearing it properly.
Remember too that airbags will deploy only once and only in certain kinds
of accidents - your seat belts are always there to offer protection in those
accidents in which airbags are not supposed to deploy or when they have
already deployed, for example when your vehicle strikes or is struck by an-
other after the first collision.
This is just one of the reasons why an airbag is not a substitute for the seat
belt. The airbag system works most effectively when used with the seat
belts. Therefore, always wear your seat belts correctly.
It is important to remember that while the airbag system is designed to re-
duce the possibility of serious injuries, other injuries, for example, swelling,
bruising, and minor abrasions can also be associated with airbags.
The knee airbag system basically consists of:
● The electronic control module
● One inflatable airbag (airbag and gas generator) for the driver
● An airbag indicator light on the instrument panel
The knee airbag system will not be triggered:
● if the ignition is switched off
● in frontal collisions when the deceleration measured by the control unit
is too low
● in side collisions
● in rear-end collisions
● in rollovers
● in the event of a system malfunction (hazard warning lights/turn signals
illuminated) ⇒ page 65.
WARNING
● Seat belts and the airbag system can only provide protection when
occupants are in the proper seating position.
● If the airbag indicator light comes on when the vehicle is being used,
have the system inspected immediately by your Technical Service. The
airbag may not work properly when the vehicle acceleration in a side col-
lision is high enough to deploy the airbag. See also ⇒ page 65.
How knee airbags work
The risk of injury to the leg area is reduced by fully deployed
knee airbags.
Fig. 23 Inflated airbags
protect in a frontal colli-
sion.
The knee airbag system has been designed so that the airbag for the driver
is deployed in certain but not all frontal collisions.
If the front airbag deploys, the knee airbag also deploys in severe frontal
collisions.
37Airbag system
When the system is deployed, the airbag starts to fill with a propellant gas,
and inflates between the lower part of the dash panel and the driver
⇒ Fig. 23.
Although they are not a soft pillow, they can cushion the impact and in this
way help to reduce the risk of injury to lower limbs.
All this takes place instantaneously, so fast that many people do not even
realise that the airbags have deployed. The airbags also inflate with a great
deal of force and it is important for occupant safety that nothing should be
in their way when they deploy.
Fully inflated airbags in combination with properly worn seat belts slow
down and limit the occupant's forward movement and help to reduce the
risk of injury.
Important safety notes on the knee airbag system
Airbags are only additional safety
Always wear seat belts correctly and drive in a proper seated position. There
is a lot of information that you and your passengers should know and do so
that the seat belts and airbags can provide additional protection.
WARNING
An inflating knee airbag can cause serious injuries. Wearing seat belts
incorrectly and improper seating positions increase the risk of serious
personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used.
● The airbag system cannot protect you properly if you are seated too
close to any of the airbag locations. When adjusting the seat positions, it
is important for the driver to keep the upper body and knees at the fol-
lowing minimum safety distances:
– 25 cm between the chest and the steering wheel/dash panel.
– 10 cm between the knees and the lower part of the dash panel.
● The risk of personal injury increases if you lean forward or to the side,
or if the seat is improperly positioned and you are not wearing your seat
belt. The risk increases even more should the airbag deploy.
● Always make sure that the knee airbag can inflate without interfer-
ence. Objects between yourself and the airbag can increase the risk of in-
jury in an accident by interfering with the way the airbag deploys or by
being thrust into you as the airbag deploys.
– No objects of any kind should be carried in the footwell area in
front of the driver's seat. Bulky objects (shopping bags, for example)
can hinder or prevent proper deployment of the airbag. Small objects
can be thrown through the vehicle if the airbag deploys and injure
you or your passengers.
● Make sure there are no cracks, deep scratches or other damage in the
area of the dash panel where the knee airbag is located.
● If children are incorrectly seated, their risk of injury increases in the
case of an accident ⇒ page 46.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
38 Airbag system
Side airbags*
Description of side airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
Fig. 24 Side airbag in
driver seat
The front side airbags are located in the driver seat and front passenger
seat backrests ⇒ Fig. 24. The rear side airbags* are located in the rear
wheel housing lining. The locations are identified by the text “AIRBAG” in
the upper region of the backrests and in the rear wheel housing lining.
Together with the seat belts, the side airbag system gives the front seat oc-
cupants additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe
side collision ⇒ page 40, Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag
system.
In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers
on the front seats to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to
their normal function of protecting the occupants in a collision, the seat
belts also hold the passengers in the front seats and the outer rear seats in
a position where the side airbags can provide maximum protection.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing
their seat belts. Therefore, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all
times, not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also
for your safety ⇒ page 18, Brief introduction.
The side airbag system will not be triggered if:
● the ignition is switched off
● there is a minor side collision
● there is a frontal collision
● there is a rear-end collision
● the vehicle turns over
The main parts of the airbag system are:
● an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit)
● The front side airbags in the backrests of the front seats and the rear
side airbags in the lining of the rear wheel housing
● a control lamp on the dash panel ⇒ page 30
The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag control
lamp will light up for approx. 4 seconds every time the ignition is switched
on (self-diagnosis).
WARNING
● In a side collision, the side airbags will not work, if the sensors do
not correctly measure the pressure increase on the interior of the doors,
due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door
panel.
● Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels have been removed.
● Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the
panels have not been correctly fitted.
39Airbag system
WARNING (Continued)
● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers in the door panels have
been removed, unless the holes left by the loudspeakers have been cor-
rectly closed.
● Always check that the openings are closed or covered if loudspeakers
or other equipment are fitted in the interior door panels.
● Any work carried out to the doors should be made in an authorised
specialised workshop.
● The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if
the occupants are seated correctly ⇒ page 10, Proper sitting position for
occupants.
● If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked
immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a side colli-
sion, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Operation of side airbags
Inflated airbags can reduce the risk of head or chest injury
in many side impact collisions.
Fig. 25 Inflated side air-
bag on left side of vehicle
In some side collisions, the side airbag is triggered on the impact side of
the vehicle
⇒
Fig. 25.
In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas.
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to
provide additional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may
develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication
of fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the occupants of the
front seats and the outer rear seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to
the upper body.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
40 Airbag system
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.
Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system
If airbags are used correctly, they can considerably reduce
the risk of injury in side impact collisions.
WARNING
● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated
correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury
if the side airbag system is triggered in an accident.
● In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the
prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts
fastened while travelling.
● Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in
the deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children
or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to
attach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would im-
pair the protection offered by the side airbags.
● The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing.
Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon
the backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. In this case,
the side airbags would not be triggered.
● Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over seats
with side airbags unless the covers have been approved for use in your
vehicle. Because the airbag is triggered from the side of the backrest, the
WARNING (Continued)
use of non-approved seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, serious-
ly reducing the airbag's effectiveness ⇒ page 222, Accessories, replace-
ment of parts and modifications.
● Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of
the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a specialised
workshop.
● The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them
once they have deployed.
● When children assume an incorrect sitting position, they expose
themselves to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. This
is particularly the case if the child is travelling on the front passenger
seat and the airbag system is triggered in an accident; this could have
critical consequences including serious injury or death ⇒ page 46,
Child safety.
● Any work on the side airbag system or removal and installation of the
airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the front seat)
should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults
may occur during the airbag system operation.
● Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any
way.
● The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in
the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct operation of the side
and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modi-
fied in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged,
the airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the
front door must be done in a specialised workshop.
41Airbag system
Curtain airbags
Description of curtain airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
Fig. 26 Location of head
airbags on the left side of
the vehicle
The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors
⇒
Fig. 26 and are identified with the text “AIRBAG”.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the curtain airbag system gives the vehi-
cle occupants additional protection for the head and upper body in the
event of a severe side collision
⇒
page 42, Safety notes on the operation
of the curtain airbag system.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the vehicle occupants are
wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints
properly. Therefore, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times,
not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your
safety
⇒
page 18, Brief introduction.
The main parts of the curtain airbag system are:
● an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit)
● the curtain airbags (airbags with gas generator) for the driver, front pas-
senger and passengers on the rear seats
● a control lamp on the dash panel ⇒ page 30
The airbag system operation is monitored electronically.
The curtain airbag system will not be triggered if:
● the ignition is switched off
● there is a frontal collision
● there is a rear-end collision
● the vehicle turns over
● there is a minor side collision
WARNING
If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked im-
mediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that
during a collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
42 Airbag system
Operation of curtain airbags
Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury
in a side collision.
Fig. 27 Deployed curtain
airbags
During some side collisions the curtain airbag is triggered on the impact
side of the vehicle
⇒
Fig. 27.
In certain types of accident the front, side and curtain airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas. In the
process, the curtain airbag covers the side windows and door pillars.
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to
provide additional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may
develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication
of fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the front occupants
and help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper body.
The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.
Safety notes on the operation of the curtain airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce
the risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
WARNING
● In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the
prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts
fastened while travelling.
● For safety reasons, the curtain airbag must be disabled in those vehi-
cles fitted with a screen dividing the interior of the vehicle. See a Techni-
cal Service to make this adjustment.
● There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the oc-
cupants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the curtain air-
bags so that the curtain airbag can deploy without restriction and pro-
vide the greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have
not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached
to the side windows ⇒ page 222, Accessories, replacement of parts and
modifications.
● The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing.
Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Please, do
not hang the clothes on coat hangers.
● The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them
once they have deployed.
43Airbag system
WARNING (Continued)
● Any work on the curtain airbag system or removal and installation of
the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lin-
ing) should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise,
faults may occur during the airbag system operation.
● Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any
way.
● The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in
the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct operation of the side
and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modi-
fied in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged,
the airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the
front door must be done in a specialised workshop.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
44 Airbag system
Deactivating airbags
Front passenger front airbag deactivation
If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat,
the front passenger front airbag must be de-activated.
Fig. 28 In the glove com-
partment: switch for acti-
vating and deactivating
the front passenger air-
bag
Fig. 29 Control lamp for
deactivated front passen-
ger airbag in centre con-
sole
When the front passenger airbag is deactivated, only the front air-
bag is deactivated. All the other airbags in the vehicle remain acti-
vated.
Disabling the front passenger front airbag
– Switch the ignition off.
– Turn the ignition key in the key-operated switch in the glove
compartment to position
0
OFF ⇒ Fig. 28.
– Check that the control lamp, “OFF”, on the instrument panel
⇒ Fig. 29 remains lit when the ignition is switched on ⇒
.
Activating the front passenger front airbag
– Switch the ignition off.
– Turn the ignition key in the key-operated switch in the glove
compartment to position
1
ON ⇒ Fig. 28.
45Airbag system
– Check that the control lamp on the instrument panel ⇒ Fig. 29
does not light up when the ignition is switched on ⇒
.
WARNING
● The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated
switch.
● You should only deactivate the front passenger front airbag when, in
exceptional cases, you have to use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat ⇒ page 46, Child safety.
● Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger
seat unless the front passenger front airbag has been disabled. Other-
wise, there is a risk of death. If under exceptional circumstances it is nec-
essary to transport a child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passen-
ger seat, you must always disable the front passenger front airbag.
● As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger
seat, enable the front passenger front airbag again.
● Only deactivate the front passenger front airbag when the ignition is
off, otherwise a fault may occur in the airbag system, which could cause
the airbag to not deploy properly or not deploy at all.
WARNING (Continued)
● When the front passenger front airbag is deactivated, if the control
lamp AIRBAG OFF is not continuously lit up, there may be a fault in the
airbag system:
– Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a specialised
workshop.
– Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front pas-
senger front airbag could be triggered despite the fact that there is a
fault in the system and, as a result, a child could sustain serious or
fatal injuries.
– It is unpredictable whether the front passenger airbag will deploy
in the event of an accident. Warn all your passengers of this.
● When using the ignition key to activate/deactivate the front passen-
ger front airbag, only the front passenger airbag will be activated/deacti-
vated. The side airbag and head airbag on the passenger side will remain
active.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
46 Child safety
Child safety
Brief introduction
Introduction
Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear
seat than on the front passenger seat.
For safety reasons we recommend that children under 12 years of age travel
on the rear seats. Depending on their age, height and weight, children trav-
elling on the rear seat must use a child seat or a seat belt. It is advisable
that children always travel in the rear seats, the rear central position being
the safest seat, since the risk of injuries in a side collision is diminished.
The physical laws involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to
children ⇒ page 19, Why wear seat belts?. But unlike adults, children do not
have fully developed muscle and bone structures. This means that children
are subject to a greater risk of injury.
To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Original Ac-
cessories Programme, which includes systems for all ages made by Peke
1)
.
These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying
with the ECE-R44. regulation.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and note
⇒ page 46, Safety notes on using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruc-
tion Manual together with the on-board documentation.
Safety notes on using child seats
Proper use of child seats substantially reduces the risk of in-
jury in an accident!
As the driver, you are responsible for any children you transport in
your vehicle.
– Protect your children by properly using the appropriate child
seats ⇒ page 48.
– Always ensure that the seat belt is properly positioned accord-
ing to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child
seat.
– When travelling, do not allow children to distract you from traf-
fic.
– Take breaks regularly during long trips. Take a break at least ev-
ery two hours.
1)
Not for all countries
47Child safety
WARNING
● Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger
seat unless the front passenger front airbag has been disabled. Risk of
potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in excep-
tional cases, to transport a child in the front passenger seat, the front
passenger front airbag must always be disabled ⇒ page 44, Deactivating
airbags. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option, move it to
the highest position.
● For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to deactivate
the airbag, the vehicle must be taken to a Technical Service.
● All vehicle occupants, especially children, must assume the proper
sitting position and be properly belted in while travelling.
● Never hold children or babies on your lap, this can result in potential-
ly fatal injuries to the child!
● Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being prop-
erly secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. In an acci-
dent, the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal
injuries to themselves and to the other vehicle occupants.
● If children assume an improper sitting position when the vehicle is
moving, they expose themselves to greater risk of injury in the event of a
sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident. This is particularly impor-
tant if the child is travelling on the front passenger seat and the airbag
system is triggered in an accident; as this could cause serious injury or
even death.
● A suitable child seat can protect your child!
● Never leave an unsupervised child alone on a child seat or in the vehi-
cle.
● Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or
cold inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.
WARNING (Continued)
● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal
seat belt without a child seat, as this could cause injuries to the abdomi-
nal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident.
● Do not allow the seat belt to become twisted or jammed, or to rub on
any sharp edges.
● Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause injuries even in a minor colli-
sion or in sudden braking manoeuvres.
● The seat belt provides maximum protection only when the seat belt is
properly positioned ⇒ page 23, Seat belts.
● Only one child may occupy a child seat ⇒ page 48, Child seats.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
48 Child safety
Child seats
Categorisation of child seats into groups
Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable
for the child.
Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R stands for: Eco-
nomic Commission for Europe Regulation
The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:
Group 0: up to 10 kg
Group 0+: up to 13 kg
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg
Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg
Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R44 stand-
ard bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test num-
ber below it).
Group 0 and 0+ child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help you to protect your child.
Fig. 30 A group 0 rear-
facing child seat fitted on
the rear seat
Group 0: For babies up to about 9 months old and 10 kg in weight, the most
suitable seats are those appearing in the illustration
⇒
Fig. 30.
Group 0+: For babies up to about 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the
most suitable seats are those appearing in the illustration.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruc-
tion Manual together with the on-board documentation.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of child seats ⇒
in Safety notes on using child seats on page 47.
49Child safety
Group 1 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help you to protect your child.
Fig. 31 A category 1 for-
ward-facing child seat fit-
ted on the rear seat
Child seats using the ISOFIX system or seats in which the child faces the
rear of the vehicle are most appropriate for babies and small children
weighing between 9 and 18 kg.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruc-
tion Manual together with the on-board documentation.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use
of child seats ⇒
in Safety notes on using child seats on page 47.
Group 2 and 3 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help you to protect your child.
Fig. 32 Forward-facing
child seat installed on
rear seat
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruc-
tion Manual together with the on-board documentation.
Group 2 child seats
Children under 7 years of age weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best pro-
tected by group 2 child seats together with properly adjusted seat belts.
Group 3 child seats
Children over 7 years of age weighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than
1.5 metres tall are best protected by child seats with head restraints togeth-
er with properly worn seat belts
⇒
Fig. 32.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
50 Child safety
WARNING
● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the cen-
tre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must
lie close to the upper part of the body. The lap belt part must lie across
the pelvis, not across the stomach, and always fit closely. Pull the belt
tight if necessary to take up any slack ⇒ page 23, Seat belts.
● Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the
use of child seats ⇒
in Safety notes on using child seats on page 47.
51Child safety
Securing child seats
Ways to secure a child seat
A child seat can be secured differently on the rear seat and
on the front passenger seat.
You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the
following ways:
● Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured with a seat belt.
● Seats for children aged 0, 0+ and 1 with the “ISOFIX” system can be se-
cured without fastening seat belts, using the “ISOFIX” and/or Top Tether se-
curing rings ⇒ page 52.
Mass group
Seating position
Front passenger
seat
Rear side seat Rear central
seat
Group 0
to 10 kg
U* U U
Group 0+
to 13 kg
U* U U
Group I
9 to 18 kg
U* U U
Group II
15 to 25 kg
U* U U
Group III
22 to 36 kg
U* U U
Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this mass group.
Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, as high as pos-
sible and always disable the airbag.
WARNING
● When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a re-
straint system suitable for age, weight and size.
● Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger
seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This could
cause fatal injuries to the child! However, if, in exceptional cases, it is
necessary to transport a child in the front passenger seat, the front pas-
senger airbag ⇒ page 44, Deactivating airbags must always be disabled
and the seat adjusted to its highest position, where possible.
● Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the
use of child seats ⇒
in Safety notes on using child seats on page 47.
U:
*:
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
52 Child safety
Child seat mounting using the “ISOFIX” and/or Top Tether system
The child retention systems can be installed quickly and safely on the rear seat using the ISOFIX and/or Top Tether systems
(fitted on the rear tray).
Fig. 33 Position of the
ISOFIX anchors on the
side rear seat
Fig. 34 The ISOFIX child
seat anchors slide along
the fitted plastic guides
until secured in the vehi-
cle's ISOFIX anchorages
Following the instructions given by the child seat manufacturer
when installing and removing the seat.
– Fit the plastic guides on the vehicle's ISOFIX anchorages be-
tween the backrest and the seat ⇒ Fig. 33.
– Slide the child seat anchorages along the plastic guides until
secured in the vehicle's ISOFIX rings (when correctly closed, you
will hear a “click”). The seat should also have a visual indicator
to confirm it is correctly secured ⇒ Fig. 34.
– Check that the ISOFIX system is correctly secured by pulling on
the child seat.
Detailed fitting instructions are supplied with the child safety seat.
Child seats with “ISOFIX” mountings are available from Technical Services
and specialist retailers.
53Child safety
Mass group Size class Electrical equipment Mounting direction
Vehicle Isofix positions
Rear side seats
Baby carrier
F ISO/L1 Backward-facing X
G ISO/L2 Backward-facing X
Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU
Group 0+ to 13 kg
E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU
D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU
C ISO/R3 Backward-facing X
Group I 9 to 18 kg
D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU
C ISO/R3 Backward-facing X
B ISO/F2 Forward-facing IU
B1 ISO/F2X Forward-facing IU
A ISO/F3 Forward-facing IU
Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- Forward-facing ---
Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- Forward-facing ---
Suitable for ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in
this mass group
ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this
mass group or size class
WARNING
The retainers employed for this child safety seat are specially designed
for the “ISOFIX” system. Never secure other child seats, seat belts or
other items into the retainers. If you do, you increase the risk of sustain-
ing severe or fatal injuries.
IU:
X:
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
54 Child safety
Top Tether retainer straps
Some child restraint seats have a third Top Tether anchoring
point, apart from both “ISOFIX” anchoring points, which al-
low better child retention.
Fig. 35 Position of the
Top Tether rings on the
rear tray
The Top Tether system has an upper strap for attachment to the vehicle's
upper anchoring point, which is found on the rear luggage compartment
cover.
The retainer strap is used to reduce forwards movements of the safety seat
in a crash, helping reduce the risk of injuries to the head from hitting the
inside of the vehicle.
It is foreseen that an EU Directive will introduce requirements related to the
retention of child restraint systems by means of ISOFIX and Top Tether an-
chorages (probably compulsory for new types from 2010), which will entail
improved retention of the child restraint seat and less head movement in
case of frontal collisions.
Use of retainer straps on rear-facing seats
At present there are very few rear-facing child safety seats fitted with a re-
tainer strap. Please carefully read and follow the safety seat manufacturer's
instructions for information on how to install the retainer strap properly.
WARNING
An undue installation of the safety seat will increase the risk of injury in
the event of a crash.
● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the luggage compartment.
● Never secure or tie luggage or other items to the lower anchorages
(ISOFIX) or the upper ones (Top Tether).
Fitting the Top Tether child restraint to the anchoring point
Fig. 36 Retainer strap:
correct adjustment and
fitting
55Child safety
Securing the Top Tether child restraint to the anchoring point
situated on the rear shelf
– Pull out the fastening belt of the child restraint seat according
to the manufacturer's instructions.
– Guide the Top Tether fastening belt under the rear seat head re-
straint ⇒ Fig. 36 (lift the head restraint where necessary).
– Lift the anchorage cover on the rear shelf -see detail- ⇒ Fig. 36.
– Slide the belt so that the Top Tether belt of the child restraint
seat is correctly secured to the rear shelf anchorage.
– Firmly tighten the Top Tether belt following the child restraint
seat manufacturer's instructions.
Releasing the retaining strap
– Release the retainer strap in line with the instructions given by
the child safety seat manufacturer.
– Push the lock and release it from the anchoring support.
WARNING
Read and bear in mind all the WARNINGS ⇒ page 54.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
56 Cockpit
Fig. 37 Some of the equipment listed in this section is only fitted on certain models or are optional extras.
57Cockpit
Operating instructions
Cockpit
Overview
Dash panel overview
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Door handle
Central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Electric control for exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Air outlets with thumbwheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Lever for turn signals and main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Levers and switches for:
– Windscreen wipers and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
– On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
– Menu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Depending on equipment fitted:
– Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
– Start-Stop switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
– Warning lamp indicating that front passenger airbag has
been disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
– Switch for acoustic parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
– Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Storage compartment
Depending on equipment fitted: Sound system or navigation
system
Lockable glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Switch for heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Thumbwheel for seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Manual gear lever
Cigarette lighter/Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Auxiliary socket
Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Storage compartment
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Seat memory* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Bonnet lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
– coming home and leaving home: delayed lights off and
anticipated lights on function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Lever for cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
58 Cockpit
Steering wheel with:
– Horn
– Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
– Controls for radio and telephone*
Adjustable steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
On-board documentation compartment / knee airbag* . . . . . . 32
32
33
34
Note
● Separate Instruction Manual is enclosed if the vehicle is equipped with
a factory-fitted radio or navigation system.
● The arrangement of switches and controls on right-hand drive models*
may be slightly different from the layout shown in ⇒ Fig. 37. However, the
symbols used to identify the controls are the same.
59Cockpit
Instruments
Instrument panel overview
The instrument panel is the driver's information centre.
Fig. 38 Overview of instrument panel
Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Rev counter incorporating digital clock and date . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 61
Warning and indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Speedometer (incorporating odometer display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
1
2
3
4
5
Adjuster buttons for
– Digital clock and date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
– Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Digital display with
– Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
– Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6
7
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
60 Cockpit
CHECK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Call-up button for service indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Reset button for trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Coolant temperature gauge
Fig. 39 Engine coolant
temperature gauge
The coolant temperature gauge
⇒
Fig. 39 only works when the ignition is
switched on. In order to avoid engine damage, please read the following
notes for the different temperature ranges.
Cold area
A
If the needle is still on the left of the dial, this indicates that the engine has
not yet reached operating temperature. Avoid high revs and heavy accelera-
tion and do not make the engine work hard.
Normal area
B
In normal operations, the needle will settle somewhere in the centre of the
dial once the engine has reached running temperature. The temperature
may also rise when the engine is working hard, especially at high outside
8
9
10
temperatures. This is no cause for concern, provided the warning lamp
does not light up in the instrument panel.
Warning area
C
If the symbol flashes in the display, this means that either the coolant
temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low ⇒ page 79.
WARNING
● Before opening the bonnet and checking the coolant level, observe
the warning information ⇒ page 227.
● Never open the bonnet when steam or coolant is being released from
it. This could lead to burns. Wait until you can no longer see or hear es-
caping steam or coolant.
CAUTION
Accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant.
At high outside temperatures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the
engine overheating.
61Cockpit
Rev counter
The rev counter indicates the number of engine revolutions
per minute.
Fig. 40 Detailed view of
the instrument panel:
Rev counter
You should select a lower gear if the engine speed drops below 1500 rpm.
The start of the red zone on the dial indicates the maximum engine speed
which may be used when the engine is warm and after it has been run in
properly. Before reaching this zone, a higher gear must be selected or your
foot must be removed from the accelerator.
CAUTION
To prevent possible engine malfunctions, the rev counter needle should not
reach the red zone. The start of the red zone on the dial is different for some
engine versions.
For the sake of the environment
Changing up into higher gears sooner following the recommended gear in-
dications ⇒ Fig. 51 will help you to reduce fuel consumption, emissions and
also engine noise.
Digital clock and date
Your vehicle is equipped with a quartz clock.
Fig. 41 Detailed view of
the instrument panel:
Digital clock
The time and date are set using the
+
and
-
buttons.
Setting the hour
– Press the
MODE
button. The hour display will start to flash.
– Use the
+
and
-
buttons to set the hour.
Setting the minutes
– Keep pressing the
MODE
button until the minutes display flash-
es.
– Use the
+
and
-
buttons to set the minutes.
Setting the date
– Keep pressing the
MODE
button until the date display (day)
flashes.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
62 Cockpit
– Use the
+
and
-
buttons to set the day.
– Keep pressing the
MODE
button until the month display flashes.
– Use the
+
and
-
buttons to set the month.
– Keep pressing the
MODE
button until the year display flashes.
– Use the
+
and
-
buttons to set the year.
Deactivating the date display
– Keep pressing the
MODE
button until the complete date display
flashes.
– Use the
-
button to disable the date display.
Activating the date display
– Keep pressing the
MODE
button until the complete date display
flashes.
– Use the
+
button to enable the date display.
When the display stops flashing, this means the setting you are performing
is completed and the time and date have been successfully stored.
When the ignition is switched off, the odometer and the digital clock with
date display can be switched on for a few seconds by pressing the CHECK
button ⇒ Fig. 38
8
.
Instrument lighting
The brightness of the instrument lighting can be adjusted as
required.
Fig. 42 Instrument panel
lighting
– Press the "+" button to increase the brightness of the instru-
ment lighting.
– Press the "-" button to reduce the brightness of the instrument
lighting.
The instrument lighting (dials and needles), the centre console illumination
and the illumination of the displays are regulated by a photodiode incorpo-
rated in the instrument panel, depending on the outside light.
63Cockpit
Speedometer with odometer
The speedometer indicates the speed of the vehicle and the
distance travelled.
Fig. 43 Detailed view of
the instrument panel:
Odometer
The distance is normally stated in kilometres (km). On some models, how-
ever, the odometer will show “miles”.
Lower odometer
The lower odometer records the vehicle's total mileage.
Upper odometer (trip recorder)
The upper odometer shows the distance that has been travelled since the
trip recorder was last reset. It is used to measure short trips. The last digit of
the trip recorder indicates distances of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile.
The upper odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the reset button
⇒
Fig. 43.
Fault display
If there is a fault in the instrument panel, the letters DEF will appear perma-
nently in the trip recorder display. Please have the fault repaired as soon as
possible.
Electronic immobiliser
The vehicle key data is consulted when the ignition is switched on.
If an uncoded key is used, the message SAFE* will appear in the trip record-
er display. The vehicle can no longer be started if that happens.
Fuel reserve
The display only works when the ignition is switched on.
When the needle reaches the reserve zone, the symbol lights up in the in-
strument panel display ⇒ page 81. At this point there are still about 8 to
10 litres of fuel left in the tank. This is your reminder to fill up soon.
You can consult the tank capacity of your vehicle in the ⇒ page 305, Di-
mensions and capacities section.
CAUTION
Never run the tank completely dry. If there is an irregular fuel supply, misfir-
ing can occur. This means that fuel could reach the exhaust system without
burning. This may lead to the catalytic converter reheating and being dam-
aged.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
64 Cockpit
CHECK button
Fig. 44 Detailed view of
the instrument panel:
CHECK button
The
CHECK
button has the following functions:
Activating the digital clock and the odometer
When the ignition is switched off, the odometer and the digital clock with
date display can be enabled for a few seconds by pressing the
CHECK
but-
ton ⇒ Fig. 44.
Starting check procedure (auto-check control)
The auto-check control ⇒ page 76 checks important components and ve-
hicle systems. These background checks are run constantly, as long as the
ignition is switched on.
You can start the “check procedure” manually by pressing the
CHECK
button
with the ignition switched on. This function check can be started with the
engine either stationary or running, but not at road speeds above 5 km/h.
Calling up driver messages
If a Priority 1 symbol flashes in the display ⇒ page 76, or if the bulb moni-
tor detects a failure of one of the lights ⇒ page 83, the relevant driver in-
formation can be called up again by briefly pressing the
CHECK
button. For
example:
Switch off engine, check oil level
The message will disappear from the display after about 5 seconds.
Setting the speed warning
You can press the
CHECK
button to set speed limit warning 1 ⇒ page 84,
Setting speed limit warning 1 while the vehicle is moving. Speed limit warn-
ing 2* ⇒ page 85, Setting speed limit warning 2 can only be set when the
ignition is switched off.
65Cockpit
Warning and indicator lamps
General description
The warning and indicator lamps indicate a number of dif-
ferent functions and possible faults.
Fig. 45 Instrument panel with warning and indicator lamps
Exhaust emission control system ⇒ page 66
Airbag system ⇒ page 66
Tyre pressure too low ⇒ page 67
Cruise speed (Cruise control) ⇒ page 67
Trailer turn signals ⇒ page 67
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ⇒ page 68
Seat belt warning ⇒ page 68
If it stays lit: ASR switched off
⇒ page 69
⇒ page 69
⇒ page 165
Left turn signals ⇒ page 69
If flashing: the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is working or the ASR is working
If the following remain lit: ESC or ASR
faulty
⇒ page 69
⇒ page 69
⇒ page 165
Alternator ⇒ page 70
Main beam headlights ⇒ page 70
Handbrake on
⇒ page 70
⇒ page 77
Engine management (alternative to ) ⇒ page 70
Glow plug system (alternative to ) ⇒ page 70
Fault in brake system ⇒ page 71
Right turn signals ⇒ page 69
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
66 Cockpit
Note
A number of functions are monitored by the auto-check control
⇒ page 76. If a malfunction should occur, this will be shown by the dis-
play in the instrument panel either with a red symbol (priority 1 - danger) or
a yellow symbol (priority 2 - warning).
Exhaust emission control system
If the warning lamp lights up continuously you should take your vehicle to a
specialised workshop as soon as possible in order to have the fault re-
paired.
If the warning lamp flashes drive on at reduced speed and seek professio-
nal help in order to avoid damage to the catalytic converter.
For further information on the catalytic converter, see ⇒ page 195.
Airbag system
This warning lamp monitors the airbag and belt tension de-
vice system.
The control lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on.
If the warning lamp does not go out, or if it lights up, flashes or flickers
when the vehicle is moving, this indicates a malfunction in the system.
WARNING
If a malfunction should occur, have the system checked immediately by a
specialised workshop. Otherwise there is a risk that the airbag system
and/or belt tensioners may not be triggered in an accident.
67Cockpit
Tyre pressure warning lamp*
The tyre pressure should be corrected as soon as possible if
it is too low.
Fig. 46 Display: system
fault
Fig. 47 Display: warning
message
The yellow warning lamp remains on if the system is faulty or if
the pressure is too low in at least one tyre. In the event of a system
fault, the letters TPMS are displayed in the centre of the instrument
panel ⇒ Fig. 46. If the tyre pressure drops rapidly, message
A
⇒ Fig. 47 will be shown on the central display of the instrument
panel. If the pressure loss is more gradual, message
B
⇒ Fig. 47
will be shown on the central display of the instrument panel. This
message does not show the tyre affected. Should any of these
warnings be displayed:
– Stop the vehicle.
– Check the tyres. Although the warning corresponds to just one
tyre, you should also check the others.
– Correct the tyre pressure ⇒ page 243.
For more detailed information on the tyre pressure monitoring system,
please refer to ⇒ page 242.
Cruise speed (Cruise control)*
The control lamp on the instrument panel lights up when the cruise con-
trol system is operating.
Trailer turn signals*
This turn signal lamp flashes when the turn signals are op-
erating while towing a caravan or trailer.
The turn signal control lamp flashes when the turn signals are operated if
a trailer is correctly coupled to the vehicle.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
68 Cockpit
Where a turn signal bulb does not work, either on the trailer or on the tow-
ing vehicle, the turn signal bulb will not flash.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The warning lamp monitors the ABS and the integrated elec-
tronic differential lock (EDL).
The control lamp lights up for a few seconds when the ignition is switch-
ed on and while the engine is being started. The lamp goes out again after
the system has run through an automatic test sequence.
There is a fault in the ABS if:
● The warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on
● The control lamp does not go out again after a few seconds.
● The control lamp lights up when the vehicle is moving.
The vehicle can still brake in the normal way (except that the ABS control
function is out of action). Please take the vehicle to a specialised workshop
as soon as possible. For further information on the ABS, see ⇒ page 189.
If a malfunction should occur in the ABS, the ESC warning lamp will also
light up.
Entire brake system fault
If the ABS warning lamp lights up together with the brake warning lamp
⇒ page 71 (with the handbrake released), this indicates not only a
fault in the ABS function, but probably also a malfunction in the main brake
system ⇒
.
The symbol will light up on the instrument panel if there if a fault in the
brake system. Please refer to ⇒ page 78.
Electronic differential lock (EDL) fault
The EDL works in conjunction with the ABS. The ABS control lamp will light
up to indicate an EDL fault. Please take the vehicle to a specialised work-
shop as soon as possible. For further information on the EDL, see
⇒ page 190.
WARNING
● Before opening the bonnet and checking the brake fluid level, ob-
serve the warning information in ⇒ page 227, Work in the engine com-
partment.
● If the brake warning lamp should light up together with the ABS
warning lamp , stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid
level in the reservoir. If the fluid level has dropped below the "MIN" mark
you must not drive on, as there is a risk of accident. Obtain technical as-
sistance.
● If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may
have been caused by a fault in the ABS control function. As a result, the
rear wheels can lock relatively easily when braking. Under certain cir-
cumstances, the rear of the vehicle could suddenly sway from side to
side, with the subsequent danger of skidding. Drive carefully to the near-
est specialised workshop and have the fault repaired.
Seat belt warning lamp*
The warning lamp acts as a reminder to the driver to fasten
the seat belt.
After switching on the ignition, the warning lamp will remain lit until the
driver and front passenger (if applicable) have fastened their seat belts.
When the vehicle has reached a certain speed, you will also hear a warning
signal and the warning light will flash.
For further information on the seat belts, see ⇒ page 23.
69Cockpit
Turn signals and hazard warning lights
Depending on which turn signal is operated, either the left or right turn
signal lamp flashes. Both turn signal lamps will flash when the hazard warn-
ing lights are switched on.
If a turn signal fails, the indicator lamp will start flashing twice as fast as
normal.
This does not apply when towing a trailer. Where a turn signal bulb does not
work, either on the trailer or on the towing vehicle, the turn signal bulb will
not flash. For further information on the turn signals, see ⇒ page 122.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)* /
There are two control lamps for the electronic stability con-
trol. The lamp provides information concerning the func-
tion and the provides information on the disconnection
status
Both lamps come on together when the ignition is switched on and should
go out after approx. 2 seconds, which is how long the function check lasts.
This programme includes the ABS, EDL and ASR. This also includes the
brake assistance system (BAS), automatic cleaning of the brake discs and
the trailer stability programme (TSP).
The warning lamp has the following functions:
● It flashes whilst driving when the ASR/ESC is activated.
● It will light up continuously if there is a fault in the ESC.
● As the ESC operates in conjunction with the ABS, it will also light up if a
fault should occur in the ABS.
If the ESC control lamp lights up and stays on after the engine is started,
this may mean that the control system has temporarily switched off the ESC.
In this case the ESC can be reactivated by switching the ignition off and
then on again. If the control lamp goes out, this means the system is fully
functional.
The lamp provides information about the disconnection status of the
system:
● It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected when pressing the switch.
Traction control system (ASR)* /
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from
spinning when the vehicle is accelerating
There are two warning lamps for the traction control system: and . Both
lamps come on together when the ignition is switched on and should go out
after approx. 2 seconds, which is how long the function check lasts.
The lamp has the following function:
● It flashes when the ASR is working if the vehicle is moving.
If the system is deactivated or if it has any fault, the warning lamp will re-
main lit. The warning lamp will also light up if a fault should occur in the
ABS because the ASR operates in conjunction with the ABS. For further in-
formation, see ⇒ page 188.
The lamp provides information about the disconnection status of the
system:
● It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected when pressing the ASR OFF
switch.
By pressing it again, the ASR function is reactivated and the warning lamp
switched off.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
70 Cockpit
Alternator
The warning lamp signals a fault in the alternator or in the
vehicle's electrical system.
The control lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should
switch off after the engine has started.
The alternator is disconnected at very low temperatures and when the en-
gine is cold in order to facilitate starting.
Depending on the external temperature, the warning lamp might remain
on for up to 5 seconds after the engine has been started. This does not
therefore indicate a fault.
If the warning lamp lights up when you are driving, you can normally
continue as far as the nearest specialised workshop. However, given that
the battery will be running down, any electrical consumption not absolutely
vital should be switched off.
CAUTION
If the coolant warning lamp in the instrument panel lights up as well as
the alternator waning lamp while driving ⇒ page 79, stop the vehicle im-
mediately and switch off the engine. In this case the coolant pump is no
longer working, and there is a risk of engine damage.
Main beam headlights
The indicator lamp lights up when the main beams are on or when the
headlight flasher is operated.
For further information on the main beam headlights, see ⇒ page 122.
Handbrake
This lamp lights up when the handbrake is applied.
If you drive faster than 5 km/h (4 mph) with the handbrake on, the following
message will appear on the instrument panel display
1)
: HANDBRAKE ON. You
will also hear an acoustic warning signal ⇒ page 77.
Engine management
This warning lamp monitors the engine management sys-
tem for petrol engines.
The control lamp (Electronic Power Control) lights up while the function
is being checked.
Note
If the warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is moving, this indicates a
fault in the engine management system. The vehicle must be taken immedi-
ately to a specialised workshop to have the engine serviced.
Glow plug system
The control lamp lights up while the glow plugs are preheat-
ing the diesel engine.
The control lamp lights up while the glow plugs are preheating. When
the indicator lamp goes out the engine should be started straight away.
1)
Depending on the version of the model.
71Cockpit
When the engine is warm, or at outside temperatures above +8 °C, the
warning lamp will only light up very briefly.
Note
● If the glow plug indicator lamp should start flashing while the vehicle is
moving, this indicates a fault in the engine management system. The en-
gine should be serviced without delay.
● If the indicator lamp fails to light up when the ignition is switched on,
this can mean that the glow plug system is defective. The engine should be
serviced.
Brake system
The warning lamp flashes when the handbrake is applied, or
if the brake fluid level is too low or if there is a fault in the
ABS system.
If the control lamp flashes (and the handbrake is not applied), stop the
vehicle and check the brake fluid level ⇒
⇒ page 237.
If a failure should occur in the ABS, the ABS control lamp will light up
together with the brake control lamp ⇒
.
Handbrake on
The control lamp also lights up when the handbrake is applied. In addi-
tion to this, the handbrake warning ⇒ page 77 switches on after driving
for 3 seconds at a speed above 5 km/h.
WARNING
● Before opening the bonnet and checking the brake fluid level, ob-
serve the warning information in ⇒ page 227, Work in the engine com-
partment.
● If the brake warning lamp does not go out, or if it lights up when driv-
ing, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low and this may cause an
increased accident risk. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain
technical assistance.
● If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning
lamp, this can mean that there is a fault in the ABS control function. As a
result, the rear wheels can lock relatively easily when braking. Under cer-
tain circumstances, the rear of the vehicle could suddenly sway from side
to side, with the subsequent danger of skidding. Drive carefully to the
nearest specialised workshop and have the fault repaired.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
72 Cockpit
Driver information system
General notes
The driver information system in the instrument panel
shows the status of various on-board systems at a glance.
Fig. 48 Cockpit: Digital
instrument panel display
The display for the driver information system is in the centre of the instru-
ment panel.
The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the ig-
nition is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. The DIS system gives
an audible warning if a fault should occur or if servicing is required, and a
red or yellow warning symbol (in some cases with a corresponding driver
message) appears in the instrument panel display.
The driver is informed on the audio system.
The driver information system includes the following functions:
CD player, radio and telephone display* ⇒ page 73
Outside temperature indicator ⇒ page 73
Gear indicator* ⇒ page 74
Selector lever positions for the 7-speed automatic
gearbox*
⇒ page 185
Selector lever positions with multitronic
®
* ⇒ page 182
Operating range ⇒ page 74
Door and rear lid warning ⇒ page 75
Service indicator ⇒ page 75
auto-check control ⇒ page 76
Driving tips ⇒ page 77
Handbrake warning ⇒ page 77
Bulb monitor* ⇒ page 83
Onboard computer* ⇒ page 86
Tyre pressure monitoring* ⇒ page 90
Navigation information* Separate Instruc-
tion Manual
Note
● If a fault should occur, the display will show a red or yellow warning
symbol. A red warning symbol indicates a serious malfunction ⇒ page 78.
A yellow warning symbol indicates a less serious malfunction ⇒ page 80.
73Cockpit
CD, radio and telephone display*
Fig. 49 Display: addi-
tional radio information
If the radio is switched on and no Priority 2 faults are indicated by the auto-
check control, depending on the type of radio fitted, the display will show
the name or frequency of the selected radio station and complementary in-
formation, once the “OK” symbol has gone out.
When in CD mode*, the display will show the current track.
If you have a compatible telephone*, the phone book or telephone dialled
can also be seen on this display.
These displays appear in addition to the display on the radio itself.
Outside temperature display
Fig. 50 Display: Outside
temperature indicator
The outside temperature is shown in the display when the ignition is switch-
ed on
⇒
Fig. 50. In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, the display does not
appear until the driver has engaged a gear.
At temperatures below +5 °C a snowflake symbol appears next to the tem-
perature display. This is to warn the driver to take extra care when there is a
risk of ice on the road. When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very
low speeds, the temperature displayed may be slightly higher than the ac-
tual ambient temperature as a result of heat coming from the engine.
If the vehicle has an air conditioner and the digital display is changed over
to °F (degrees Fahrenheit), the outside temperature indicator automatically
changes over to °F
⇒
page 161.
WARNING
Do not rely on the outside temperature display as an ice warning. Please
bear in mind that there may be ice on the roads even at outside tempera-
tures of +5 °C beware of ice patches.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
74 Cockpit
Note
When the display shows route guidance instructions from the navigation
system, the outside temperature appears in the second line of the radio dis-
play.
Gear display*
This display helps to save fuel.
Fig. 51 Gear display
Use the gear display to save fuel. The indication ⇒ Fig. 51 on the instrument
panel display recommends that you select the gear indicated by the arrow.
It may also skip a gear, and recommend changing up from 4th gear to 6th
gear, for example.
Note
● The display may not recommend any gear-change while you are acceler-
ating.
● The gear change indication should not be taken into account the accel-
eration is required (for example when overtaking).
● If desired, you can have the gear-change display deactivated by a Tech-
nical Service.
Distance to empty
The distance to empty display can help you to plan your trip.
The estimated distance to empty is displayed in km. It shows how far the
vehicle can be driven with the amount of fuel left in the tank, assuming the
same style of driving. The distance to empty is displayed in increments of
10 km.
The distance to empty is calculated on the basis of the fuel consumption
over the last 30 kilometres. The distance to empty will increase if you drive
in a more economical manner.
75Cockpit
Door and rear lid warning
Fig. 52 Display: Door
and rear lid warning
The door and rear lid warning symbol lights up if one or more of the doors,
or the bonnet or rear lid are not properly closed when the ignition is on. The
symbol also indicates which of these is not properly closed. The display in
the illustration
⇒
Fig. 52 shows that the driver door is open.
The corresponding part of the pictogram will flash if either the bonnet or
rear lid are open. The warning symbol goes out when the bonnet, rear lid
and all the doors are closed.
In vehicles with a driver information system and an onboard computer* the
door catches/rear lid warning symbol can be switched off by briefly press-
ing one of the control switches for the onboard computer
⇒
page 87. How-
ever, the warning symbol will appear again if any of the doors or the bonnet
or rear lid is opened or closed.
Service indicator
This display reminds the driver when the next routine serv-
ice is due.
Fig. 53 Detailed view of
the instrument panel:
Service indicator
Displaying distance to next service
When you press the service button
1
briefly with the ignition switched on,
the display will show how far the vehicle can be driven before the next serv-
ice is due. This check can be carried out with the engine stopped or running
up to 5 km/h. Before the first 500 km and after the ignition cycle, the kilo-
metres and days before the service inspection are not displayed.
If the service button
1
is pressed before the first 500 km the following indi-
cation appears on screen:
Service in ----- km --- days
This is only valid for vehicles with “LongLife Service Intervals”*.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
76 Cockpit
Service reminder
The instrument panel controls the distance travelled every day. It calculates
the average of these distances travelled and activates the service reminder
sufficiently in advance.
The display reverts back to the standard display after about 5 seconds. The
remaining distance to the next service is updated every time the ignition is
switched on, until the service becomes due.
Service due
When a service is due, SERVICE! will appear in the display immediately after
you switch on the ignition. The display reverts back to the standard display
after about 5 seconds.
Resetting the display
The display is reset by the specialised workshop after the service has been
carried out. The service interval will be set to a LongLife Service (flexible
service interval) or Inspection Service (fixed service interval), depending on
which engine oil is used. It is only possible to reset the display via the in-
strument panel when an oil change is performed; in this case the display
can only be reset to a fixed service interval of 15 000 km. Proceed as fol-
lows:
● Switch the ignition off.
● Press the service button ⇒ Fig. 53
1
and hold while switching on the
ignition. The display will show one of these messages: Service in ----- km or
Service!
● Now press and hold the reset button
2
until the display shows Service
in ----- km --- days or Service!
The display switches out of the reset mode if you do not press the reset but-
ton within 5 seconds.
CAUTION
The system cannot calculate the figures for the service interval display if the
battery is disconnected from the vehicle, so no service reminder can be dis-
played during this time. Please remember that it is essential to service the
vehicle within the established time limits to prevent its deterioration and to
extend its useful life (particularly that of the engine). The period between
two services must never be longer than the time specified in the Mainte-
nance Programme, even if you only cover a low mileage during this time.
Note
● Do not reset the service indicator between services, otherwise the dis-
play will be incorrect.
● The information in the service indicator remains intact if the battery is
disconnected.
● The distance to the next service cannot be called up if the system has
detected a Priority 1 fault (red symbol).
Auto-check system
Introduction
The auto-check system checks important components and vehicle systems.
These background checks are run constantly, as long as the ignition is
switched on.
A message is displayed on the instrument panel if a fault should occur or if
any maintenance or repairs are urgently required. This is accompanied by
an audible warning signal. Depending on the priority of the fault, a red or
yellow warning symbol lights up on the display.
77Cockpit
The red symbol indicates danger, whereas the yellow one represents a
warning. Additional messages for the driver may be shown with the red or
yellow symbols.
Driver messages
Additional messages for the driver are displayed together
with the warning symbols on the instrument panel.
Fig. 54 Instrument pan-
el: CHECK button
Driver messages and red symbols
If a red warning symbol appears on the display, you can press the
CHECK
button ⇒ Fig. 54 to call up an additional driver message.
For example: in the event of an oil pressure malfunction, the oil pressure
symbol will appear in the display. If you now press the
CHECK
button,
the following message will appear in the display:
Switch off engine, check oil level
The message will disappear from the display after about 5 seconds. If re-
quired, the message can be called up again by briefly pressing the
CHECK
button.
Driver messages and yellow symbols
If a yellow warning symbol appears in the display, it will automatically be
accompanied by the corresponding driver message.
For example, the symbol is displayed to indicate that the windscreen
washer fluid level is low. In addition, the following message will appear:
Top up washer fluid
The message will disappear after a few seconds. If required, the message
can be called up again by briefly pressing the
CHECK
button.
Note
● The messages handbrake on and when stationary apply footbrake to se-
lect gear cannot be called up a second time. They will remain in the display
until the handbrake is released or until a gear is selected.
Handbrake warning
– Release the handbrake.
If you drive by mistake with the handbrake still applied, you will hear a
warning buzzer and the display will show the message:
Handbrake on
The handbrake warning switches on after driving for 3 seconds at speeds
above 5 km/h.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
78 Cockpit
Red symbols
A red symbol warns of a danger.
Fig. 55 Display: Coolant
level warning
– Stop the vehicle.
– Switch the ignition off.
– Check the fault. Obtain professional assistance if necessary.
BRAKES
Brake fluid required or
brake system fault
⇒ page 78
COOLANT
Coolant level too low / coolant tempera-
ture too high
⇒ page 79
OIL PRES-
SURE
Engine oil pressure too low
⇒ page 79
The red symbols are used to indicate a Priority 1 fault (serious malfunction).
A red symbol is accompanied by three warning chimes. The symbols will
keep flashing until the faults are corrected. If several Priority 1 faults are de-
tected at the same time, the symbols are displayed one after the other for
about 2 seconds.
Fault in the brake system
A fault in the brake system should be repaired as soon as
possible.
If the symbol flashes in the display, there is a fault in the brake
system. One of the following messages will appear in the display
together with the symbol:
Stop vehicle, check brake fluid and hydraulic fluid levels
Warning! Fault in brake system (ABS) Take vehicle to workshop
– Stop the vehicle.
– Check the brake fluid level ⇒ page 237.
If the ABS fails, the ABS control lamp will light up together with the brake
system fault symbol ⇒
.
79Cockpit
WARNING
● Before opening the bonnet and checking the brake fluid level, ob-
serve the warning information in ⇒ page 227, Work in the engine com-
partment.
● If the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low, this could result in
an accident. Do not drive on! Obtain technical assistance.
● If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning
lamp, this can mean that there is a fault in the ABS control function. As a
result, the rear wheels can lock relatively easily when braking. Under cer-
tain circumstances, the rear of the vehicle could suddenly sway from side
to side, with the subsequent danger of skidding. Drive carefully to the
nearest specialised workshop and have the fault repaired.
Fault in the cooling system
Faults in the cooling system must be repaired immediately.
If the symbol flashes in the display, this means that either the
coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low. The
following message will appear in the display together with the
symbol:
Switch off engine and check coolant level
– Stop the vehicle.
– Switch the ignition off.
– Check the coolant level ⇒ page 233.
– Add more coolant if necessary ⇒ page 234.
– Wait for the symbol to go out before driving on.
– Obtain professional assistance if necessary.
If the coolant level is correct, the overheating may be caused by a malfunc-
tion of the radiator fan.
If the alternator warning lamp lights up as well ⇒ page 70, it is possible that
the drive belt has broken.
CAUTION
Do not drive on if the symbol has come on to indicate a fault in the cool-
ing system, otherwise there is a risk of engine damage.
Engine oil pressure too low
If the engine oil pressure is too low the fault must be re-
paired immediately.
If the symbol flashes in the display, the oil pressure is too low.
The following message will appear in the display together with the
symbol:
Switch off engine, check oil level
– Stop the vehicle.
– Switch the ignition off.
– Check the engine oil level ⇒ page 231.
– Obtain professional assistance if necessary.
Engine oil level too low
If the engine oil level is too low, add more oil
⇒
page 232.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
80 Cockpit
Engine oil level correct
If the symbol flashes and the engine oil level is correct, obtain profes-
sional assistance. Do not drive on! Do not continue to run the engine, even
at idle speed.
Note
The oil pressure warning lamp is not an indicator for the oil level. The oil
level should therefore be checked regularly, preferably every time you fill
the tank.
Yellow symbols
A yellow symbol indicates a warning.
Fig. 56 Display: Fuel lev-
el low
Brake light failure warning light ⇒ page 81
Fuel level low ⇒ page 81
Engine speed governing ⇒ page 81
Check engine oil level ⇒ page 81
Engine oil sensor faulty* ⇒ page 81
Diesel particulate filter* obstructed ⇒ page 81
Photosensor/rain sensor faulty ⇒ page 82
Brake pad worn ⇒ page 82
Speed warning 1 ⇒ page 82
Dynamic headlight range control* faul-
ty
⇒ page 82
Adaptive headlights* faulty ⇒ page 82
Washer fluid level low* ⇒ page 82
Speed warning 2* ⇒ page 82
Battery voltage too high or too low* ⇒ page 82
Bulb monitor* ⇒ page 83
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
Loss of pressure
⇒ page 90
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
System not available
⇒ page 67
Start-Stop system fault* ⇒ page 171
81Cockpit
Yellow symbols are used to indicate a Priority 2 fault (warning).
Yellow symbols are accompanied by one warning buzzer. The function indi-
cated should be checked as soon as possible. If several Priority 2 faults are
detected at the same time, the symbols are displayed one after the other for
about 2 seconds at a time.
Brake light failure
This warning light will appear on the upper part of the display if any of the
brake lights has failed. A text message in the central part of the display indi-
cates which brake light has failed (left or right).
Fuel level low
When this symbol comes on for the first time, there are about 8 to 10 li-
tres of fuel left in the tank. You should fill up as soon as possible
⇒ page 224.
Engine speed governing
Max. engine speed XXXX rpm
There is a fault in the engine management. In addition, the warning lamp
on the instrument panel will light up. The engine speed will be governed to
the speed displayed in the driver information system. Please ensure that
the engine speed does not exceed the speed shown (for example, when
changing down a gear).
Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop immediately to have the fault re-
paired.
Checking the engine oil level
If the symbol lights up, please check the engine oil level as soon as pos-
sible ⇒ page 231. Top up the oil at the next opportunity ⇒ page 232.
Engine oil sensor defective*
If the symbol lights up, take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and
have the oil level sensor checked. Until then it is advisable to check the oil
level every time you fill up with fuel ⇒ page 231.
Diesel particulate filter obstructed
If the symbol lights up, you can contribute towards automatic filter
cleaning by driving in the right manner. To do this, drive about 15 minutes
in 4th or 5th gear (automatic gearbox: S gear range) at a speed of 60 km/h,
with the engine running at approximately 2,000 rpm. The increase in tem-
perature will burn off any soot in the filter. When cleaning is successful, the
symbol switches off.
If the symbol does not turn off, or the three lamps turn on (particulate
filter , emission control system fault and heaters ), take the vehicle
to a specialised workshop to repair the fault.
For further information on the diesel particulate filter, see ⇒ page 196.
WARNING
It is essential that you adjust your speed to suit the weather, road, ter-
rain and traffic conditions. The recommended driving speed must never
lead to the driver disregarding the traffic regulations.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
82 Cockpit
Photosensor/rain sensor faulty
Automatic headlights / automatic wipers faulty
If the symbol lights up, this means that the photosensor/rain sensor is
not working. For safety reasons, the dipped beam headlights will then be
switched on permanently when the light switch is set to the AUTO position.
However, you can still switch the lights on and off in the normal way with
the light switch. If the rain sensor is faulty, the functions operated via the
windscreen wiper lever will still be available. You should have the photosen-
sor/rain sensor checked by a specialised workshop as soon as possible.
Worn brake pads
If the symbol lights up, have the front brake pads (and, for safety rea-
sons, the rear pads as well) inspected by a specialised workshop.
Speed warning 1
If the symbol lights up, this means you are exceeding the speed that has
been pre-set with the speed warning function. You should reduce your
speed accordingly ⇒ page 83.
Headlight range control faulty
This symbol indicates a malfunction in the dynamic headlight range con-
trol. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have the dynamic head-
light range control function repaired.
Adaptive headlights* faulty
Adaptive headlights faulty
This symbol indicates that the adaptive headlight system is faulty. Take
the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have the headlights or the adap-
tive headlight control unit repaired.
Washer fluid level low
If the symbol lights up, top up the fluid for the windscreen washer and
headlight washer system* ⇒ page 235.
Speed warning 2
If the symbol lights up, this means you are exceeding the speed that has
been pre-set. You should reduce your speed accordingly ⇒ page 83.
Battery voltage too high or too low
If the symbol lights up, take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and
have the following items checked:
● Poly V-belt
● Battery condition
It is also advisable to check whether the alternator warning lamp has come
on ⇒ page 70.
83Cockpit
Bulb monitor
The bulb monitor checks whether the lights on the vehicle
are working.
If a defective bulb is detected, or if one of the lights has failed for any rea-
son, the bulb monitor symbol will appear in the display together with an
additional message (which goes out after 5 seconds). For instance, if the
rear left turn signal is not working, the display in the instrument panel will
show the following message:
Left rear turn signal
The message disappears after 5 seconds. Press the CHECK button briefly if
you wish to call up the message again.
If the display indicates that one of the lights is not working, this can have a
number of causes:
● Bulb failure ⇒ page 265.
● A blown fuse ⇒ page 264.
● Faulty electrical wiring.
It is not necessary to have lamps replaced in a specialised workshop, how-
ever the use of Xenon lamps is recommended.
LED lamps
If any of the LED (Light Emitting Diode) functions fail, the complete lamp
should be replaced.
The failure of the lamp is only shown when the LED function goes out com-
pletely. Sometimes, a LED will stop working, without displaying the warning
as the function continues to operate.
WARNING
● Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The glass can break when you
touch the bulb, causing injury.
● The high voltage element of gas discharge bulbs* (xenon light) must
be handled correctly. Otherwise, there is a risk of death.
Speed warning*
Introduction
The speed warning function can help prevent you exceeding
a particular pre-set maximum speed.
Fig. 57 Display: Speed
warning function
The speed warning function will warn the driver if a pre-set maximum speed
is exceeded. The system gives a warning buzzer signal if the set speed is
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
84 Cockpit
exceeded by about 10 km/h (6 mph). A warning symbol will also appear in
the display ⇒ Fig. 57.
The speed warning function has two different warning speeds, which oper-
ate independently and serve slightly different purposes:
Speed limit warning 1
With speed limit warning 1, the maximum speed can be changed while driv-
ing. The speed limit that has been set remains stored until the ignition is
switched off, or until it is changed or cleared.
The warning symbol for speed limit warning 1 ⇒ Fig. 57 will appear in the
display if you exceed the pre-set speed. It goes out again if the speed is re-
duced below the set speed limit.
The symbol also goes out if the speed is increased to more than about
40 km/h above the set speed for at least 10 seconds. However, this does
not cancel the speed limit that was originally set.
Setting speed limit warning 1 ⇒ page 84.
Speed limit warning 2
With speed limit warning 2, the speed limit can only be changed or cleared
when the ignition is switched off. You are recommended to store this speed
limit warning if you always wish to be reminded of a particular speed limit.
This could be when driving in countries with general speed limits, or if a
particular speed should not be exceeded when winter tyres are fitted etc.
The speed limit warning symbol for speed warning 2 will appear in the
display if you exceed the pre-set speed. Unlike speed limit warning 1, the
warning symbol only goes out once the road speed has dropped below the
set value again.
Setting speed limit warning 2 ⇒ page 85.
Note
Please bear in mind that, even with the speed warning function, it is still im-
portant to keep an eye on the vehicle speed with the speedometer and to
observe the legal speed limits.
Setting speed limit warning 1
Use the CHECK button to set speed limit warning 1.
Fig. 58 Detailed view of
the instrument panel:
CHECK button
Setting the speed limit
– Drive at the desired maximum speed.
– Press the CHECK button and hold it down until the symbol
⇒ Fig. 57 appears.
Clearing the speed limit
– Drive the vehicle at a minimum of 5 km/h.
85Cockpit
– Press the CHECK button for at least two seconds.
The speed warning symbol lights up briefly in the display when the but-
ton is released to confirm that the selected speed has been stored. The
speed limit that has been selected remains stored until another speed is se-
lected with a brief push of the button, or until the memory is cleared with a
long push of the button.
Setting speed limit warning 2
Speed limit warning 2 is set using the switches on the wind-
screen wiper lever.
Fig. 59 Windscreen wip-
er lever: Function selec-
tor switch
Setting the speed limit
– Switch the ignition off.
– Briefly press the CHECK button in the instrument panel
⇒ Fig. 58. The odometer and the digital clock will light up.
– Press the CHECK button for at least two seconds. The display
will show the speed limit which is currently set or, if no speed
limit has been set, the crossed out warning symbol for speed
limit 2.
– To change the speed limit, press the top or bottom of the func-
tion selector switch on the windscreen wiper lever
A
⇒ Fig. 59.
The speed limit displayed will then increase or decrease by
10 km/h at a time.
Clearing the speed limit
– Switch the ignition off.
– Briefly press the CHECK button in the instrument panel
⇒ Fig. 58. The odometer and the digital clock will light up.
– Press the CHECK button for at least two seconds. The display
will show the speed limit which is currently set.
– Now press and hold the Reset button on the windscreen wiper
lever
B
⇒ Fig. 59 until the crossed out warning symbol for
speed limit 2 appears on the display.
The display lighting for the odometer and digital clock goes off again a few
seconds after the button is released.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
86 Cockpit
Onboard computer
Introduction
The onboard computer provides you with useful information
during a journey, including average and current fuel con-
sumption, average speed, distance to empty, driving time
and distance covered.
Fig. 60 Onboard com-
puter: memory 1
Press RESET button
B
⇒
Fig. 61 to switch back and forward between on-
board computer functions 1 and 2.
The numbers in the display
⇒
Fig. 60 indicate which of the two memories is
currently in use. A 1 means that the display is showing the information in
the single journey memory (onboard computer 1). A 2 means that the dis-
play is showing the information in the total journey memory (onboard com-
puter 2).
Single-journey memory (onboard computer 1)
The single-journey memory processes the information on a journey from the
time the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is re-
sumed within two hours after the ignition is switched off, the new figures
are automatically included in the calculation. If the journey is interrupted for
more than two hours the stored information is automatically erased when
you resume your journey.
Total-journey memory (onboard computer 2)
Unlike the single-journey memory, the total-journey memory is not erased
automatically. Hence, you can determine the period for which you wish the
onboard computer to supply figures.
Distance to empty
The estimated distance to empty is displayed in km. The distance to empty
is displayed in increments of 10 km.
Average fuel consumption
This mode shows the average fuel consumption since the memory was last
cancelled in litres/100 km.
Instantaneous fuel consumption
The display shows the instantaneous fuel consumption in litres/100 km.
When the vehicle is stationary, the computer will display the last value in
the memory.
Average speed
This mode shows the average speed driven since the memory was last can-
celled (in km/h).
Driving time
This display shows the period of time which has elapsed since the memory
was last cancelled. The longest possible period it can cover is 999 hours
and 59 minutes.
87Cockpit
Driving time warning
After 2 hours of continuous driving, the display automatically switches over
to the driving time display of 2:00. At the same time the driving time display
starts flashing. This is to remind the driver to take a break.
The driving time warning can be switched off by briefly pressing the func-
tion selector switch or the
Reset
button ⇒ Fig. 61.
If you continue driving or take a break for less than 10 minutes, the driving
time warning will switch on once again when the total driving time is 4:00
hours, 6:00 hours, etc. However, if you take a break for more than 10 mi-
nutes, the driving time warning clock will be erased.
Distance covered
This display shows the distance you have covered since the memory was
last cancelled. The longest possible distance which can be recorded is
9999.9 km.
Note
● The displays for fuel consumption (average and instantaneous), dis-
tance to empty and speed are shown in metric units.
● The information in the memory is lost if the battery is disconnected.
Operation
The onboard computer is controlled by means of two
switches on the windscreen wiper lever.
Fig. 61 Windscreen wip-
er lever: Onboard com-
puter controls
Activating the onboard computer
– Press the reset button
B
repeatedly until the onboard comput-
er (memory 1 or 2) ⇒ Fig. 60 is displayed.
Selecting the function
– Press the top or bottom of the function selector switch
A
⇒ Fig. 61. This displays the functions of the onboard computer
in sequence.
Resetting to zero
– Press and hold the Reset button
B
for at least two seconds.
The following values can be reset to zero using the Reset button:
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
88 Cockpit
● Journey duration
● Distance covered
● Average fuel consumption
● Average speed
The onboard computer can only be operated when the ignition is switched
on. When the ignition is switched on, the display shows the function that
was last selected.
As well as the figures from the onboard computer (1 or 2), the display can
also show information from the navigation system*. Press the Reset button
B
briefly to switch back and forward between these displays.
Note
● If you keep the Reset button pressed for longer than two seconds, it will
reset the currently displayed figure to zero (for instance average fuel con-
sumption).
● Faults detected by the auto-check control will be displayed even if the
display is off.
● The information in the memory is lost if the battery is disconnected.
89Cockpit
Menu display
Introduction
Fig. 62 Windscreen wip-
er lever: Menu selection
button
Fig. 63 Display: Main
menu
Some of your vehicle's functions can be adjusted, activated and controlled
by menus. With the aid of the menus you can then also select the informa-
tion you wish to see displayed on the DIS display. This is only possible
when the ignition is on. The menu is enabled using the
Reset
button on the
windscreen wiper lever ⇒ Fig. 62.
The main menu lists the different display types (or basic commands):
Programming
Check
Menu off
Help
The main menu options have the following submenus:
Programming Clock ⇒ page 90
Computer ⇒ page 90
Speed warning ⇒ page 83
Radio info (on/off)
Units (measuring distance,
fuel consumption, tempera-
ture)
⇒ page 90
Language: you can select
one of 6 languages.
⇒ page 90
Check Service ⇒ page 75
Menu off When the menu is switched off, the display shows the
same information as in vehicles without the menu func-
tion.
Help The help function may be used to understand the mean-
ing of symbols that can appear on different menus.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
90 Cockpit
Controlling the menu
The menu display is called up via the
Reset
button and the
rocker switch on the windscreen wiper lever. Use these con-
trols to make checks and adjust the settings.
Fig. 64 Windscreen wip-
er lever: Reset button
and rocker switch
Functions of the
Reset
B
⇒ Fig. 64 and the rocker switch
A
:
Activating the menu
– Press the
Reset
button until the menu display ⇒ Fig. 63 ap-
pears.
Selecting and setting
– Press the rocker switch to select one of the menus. Press "up"
or "down" on the switch to select the options accordingly.
Entering and confirming
– Press the
Reset
button.
Use the rocker switch to select the menus and adjust various values. The se-
lected values are highlighted on a red background.
By pressing the
Reset
button, you can confirm the option you have selected
or the value you have set. Selected functions are marked with a tick.
The following symbols are used:
Cursor Function selected Red background (active
function)
Tick Selected
Box Not selected
Triangle pointing upwards Previous page
Triangle pointing down-
wards
Next page
Tyre pressure monitoring*
Introduction
The tyre pressure monitoring system constantly checks the
pressure of the tyres.
The system warns the driver in the event of a loss of pressure by means of
symbols and messages in the instrument panel display. The system works
with the help of the ABS sensors in the wheels.
Please bear in mind that the tyre inflation pressure is also influenced by the
temperature of the tyre. Tyre pressure increases about 0.1 bar for each 10 °C
in tyre temperature increase. The tyre heats up while the vehicle is being
91Cockpit
driven and the tyre pressure will rise accordingly. Therefore, you should only
adjust the tyre pressures when they are cold (i.e. approximately at ambient
temperature).
To ensure that the tyre pressure monitoring system works reliably, you
should check and, if necessary, adjust the tyre pressures at regular intervals
and store the correct pressures (reference values) in the system.
A tyre pressure information label is attached to the inside of the fuel tank
flap.
WARNING
● Never adjust tyre pressure when the tyres are hot. This may damage
or even burst the tyres. Risk of accident!
● An insufficiently inflated tyre flexes a lot more at high speeds and
causes significant heating of the tyre. Under these conditions, the tyre
bead may be released or the tyre may burst. Risk of accident!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel consumption and tyre wear.
Note
● Responsibility for ensuring that the tyres are correctly inflated remains
with the driver; the system can only provide assistance.
● Pressure can only be adjusted when the tyres are at ambient tempera-
ture.
Tyre pressure monitoring display
The tyre pressure should be corrected as soon as possible if
it is too low.
If the symbol appears, the tyre pressure on at least one of the
wheels is too low.
– Stop the vehicle.
– Check the tyre(s).
– Correct the tyre pressure ⇒ page 243.
For more detailed information on the tyre pressure monitoring system,
please refer to ⇒ page 242.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
92 Steering wheel controls
Steering wheel controls
Multifunction steering wheel*
Introduction
You can use the multifunction steering wheel to quickly and
easily operate selected functions of the radio, CD, and tele-
phone*.
Fig. 65 Controls on the
multifunction steering
wheel
Fig. 66 Driver informa-
tion system
The functions are operated by pressing or scrolling the controls
A
to
D
on
the multifunction steering wheel
⇒
Fig. 65:
● Press the
MODE
button
B
repeatedly to switch between modes, which
are then displayed in the driver information system
⇒
Fig. 66.
● Scroll and press the left thumbwheel
A
to select a function from one of
the menus.
● The speech control system* for the on-board phone system is enabled
by pressing the talk button
C
. Pressing the talk button again disables
speed control*.
● Scroll the right thumbwheel
D
up/down to increase/decrease the vol-
ume.
93Steering wheel controls
Steering wheel audio version controls
A
B
(Mode)
C
(PTT)
D
+ - Press + - Press
Radio
mode
Station search.
Increase frequen-
cy
Station search.
Decrease fre-
quency
Press once: starts
the search.
Press twice: can-
cels the search
Long press:
block the steering
wheel controls
Short press:
activates the steering
wheel controls (if
they are blocked /
without specific func-
tion (if they are not
blocked)
No function
specified
Volume up Volume down MUTE
CD/
iPod-USB
Mode
CD mode: next
track.
iPod/USB Mode:
next track
CD mode: previ-
ous track.
iPod/USB Mode:
previous track
CD mode: fast for-
ward.
iPod/USB Mode:
fast forward
Volume up Volume down MUTE
MP3
mode
Next track Previous track Fast forward Volume up Volume down MUTE
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
94 Steering wheel controls
Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls
A
B
(Mode)
C
(PTT)
D
+ - Press + - Press
Radio mode
Station search.
Increase frequen-
cy
Station search.
Decrease fre-
quency
Press once: starts
the search.
Press twice: can-
cels the search
Change to
phone
Enable voice
recognition
Volume up Volume down MUTE
CD/
iPod-USB Mode
CD mode: next
track.
iPod/USB Mode:
next track
CD mode: previ-
ous track.
iPod/USB Mode:
previous track
CD mode: fast for-
ward.
iPod/USB Mode:
fast forward
Volume up Volume down MUTE
MP3 mode Next track Previous track Fast forward Volume up Volume down MUTE
Phone mode
Next name in
phone book
Previous name in
phone book
Accept
Change to ra-
dio / CD /
iPod-USB /
MP3
Volume up Volume down
No function
specified
Incoming call
mode
No function
specified
No function
specified
One press: accept
call.
Held down: reject
call
No function
specified
No function
specified
Volume up Volume down
No function
specified
Active call
mode
No function
specified
No function
specified
End call
No function
specified
No function
specified
Volume up Volume down
No function
specified
Voice activation
mode
No function
specified
No function
specified
No function speci-
fied
No function
specified
Cancel Volume up Volume down
No function
specified
95Steering wheel controls
Steering wheel controls, Navigation System* version
A
B
(Mode)
C
(PTT)
D
+ - Press + - Press
Radio mode
Station search.
Increase frequen-
cy
Station search.
Decrease fre-
quency
Press once: starts
the search.
Press twice: can-
cels the search
No function
specified
No function
specified
Volume up Volume down
Repetition of
the last naviga-
tion order (only
if active)
CD/
iPod-USB Mode
CD mode: next
track.
iPod/USB Mode:
next track
CD mode: previ-
ous track.
iPod/USB Mode:
previous track
CD mode: fast for-
ward.
iPod/USB Mode:
fast forward
Volume up Volume down
Repetition of
the last naviga-
tion order (only
if active)
MP3 mode Next track Previous track Fast forward Volume up Volume down
Repetition of
the last naviga-
tion order (only
if active)
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
96 Steering wheel controls
Steering wheel controls, Navigation System + Telephone* version
A
B
(Mode)
C
(PTT)
D
+ - Press + - Press
Radio mode
Station search.
Increase frequen-
cy
Station search.
Decrease fre-
quency
Press once: starts
the search.
Press twice: can-
cels the search
Change to
phone
Enable voice
recognition
Volume up Volume down
Repetition of
the last naviga-
tion order (only
if active)
CD/
iPod-USB Mode
CD mode: next
track.
iPod/USB Mode:
next track
CD mode: previ-
ous track.
iPod/USB Mode:
previous track
CD mode: fast for-
ward.
iPod/USB Mode:
fast forward
Volume up Volume down
Repetition of
the last naviga-
tion order (only
if active)
MP3 mode Next track Previous track Fast forward Volume up Volume down
Repetition of
the last naviga-
tion order (only
if active)
Phone mode
Next name in
phone book
Previous name in
phone book
Accept
Change to ra-
dio / CD /
iPod-USB /
MP3
Volume up Volume down
Repetition of
the last naviga-
tion order (only
if active)
Incoming call
mode
No function
specified
No function
specified
One press: accept
call.
Held down: reject
call
No function
specified
No function
specified
Volume up Volume down
Repetition of
the last naviga-
tion order (only
if active)
Active call
mode
No function
specified
No function
specified
End call
No function
specified
No function
specified
Volume up Volume down
Repetition of
the last naviga-
tion order (only
if active)
Voice activation
mode
No function
specified
No function
specified
No function speci-
fied
No function
specified
Cancel Volume up Volume down
No function
specified
97Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Remote control keys
Set of keys
Fig. 67 Set of keys sup-
plied with the vehicle
Fig. 68 Remote control
key: Release button
The set of keys belonging to your vehicle consists of the following items:
one remote control key.
one key without remote control.
a plastic key tab*.
Remote control key
The remote control key will lock and unlock the vehicle and start the engine.
Press the release button
⇒
Fig. 68 (arrow) to make the key spring out of the
handle and to fold it back in.
Replacing a key
If you lose a key, please contact the Technical Service. Have the remote con-
trol coding for that key disabled. You should therefore bring the plastic key
tab* and all available keys with you. It is also important to notify your insur-
ance company if a key or the plastic key tab has been lost.
A
B
C
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
98 Opening and closing
2 remote control keys
In certain European markets, vehicles with alarm are equipped with 2 re-
mote control keys.
WARNING
● Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you
only intend to be gone for a short time. This is particularly important if
there are children in the vehicle, as they might otherwise be able to start
the engine or use power-operated equipment (e.g. the electric windows),
which could cause injuries.
● Wait for the vehicle to come to a standstill before removing the igni-
tion key from the lock! Otherwise, the steering lock could engage sud-
denly, causing an accident.
Indicator light on the remote control key
The condition of the battery in the remote control key is
monitored by the indicator light.
Fig. 69 LED on the re-
mote control key
Condition of the key battery
The indicator light ⇒ Fig. 69 (arrow) flashes when one of the buttons is
pressed. If the indicator light does not light up or flash, this means that the
battery is exhausted and must be replaced.
Replacing the batteries ⇒ page 98.
Replacing the key battery
Fig. 70 Master key:
Opening the cover
We recommend you have the batteries changed in a specialised
workshop. If you decide to change the used battery yourself, follow
the steps below:
– Carefully prise apart the key ⇒ Fig. 70
A
and the cover
B
us-
ing a coin.
– Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow.
– Remove the used battery from the cover.
99Opening and closing
– Insert the new battery. Make sure that the “+” symbol on the
battery is facing downwards. The correct polarity is indicated on
the cover.
– After inserting the battery, align the cover and key and press
the two parts together.
For the sake of the environment
Used batteries must be disposed of at an appropriate waste facility or
through an authorised service, given that their components can affect the
environment.
Note
● The system must be re-synchronised after each battery replacement to
be able to lock and unlock the vehicle using the remote control
⇒ page 107.
● The new battery must be of the same type as the original.
Electronic immobiliser
The electronic immobiliser is designed to prevent unauthor-
ised persons from starting up the vehicle.
There is an electronic chip inside the key which automatically deactivates
the immobiliser when the key is inserted into the ignition lock. The electron-
ic immobiliser is enabled automatically when the ignition key is removed
from the ignition lock after coming to a stop.
If an uncoded key is used, the message SAFE* will appear in the trip record-
er display.
Note
● The engine can only be started using an original SEAT key with the cor-
rect code.
● It may not be possible to start the engine with the key if there is another
ignition key from a different make of vehicle on the same key tab.
Central locking system
Description
The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock
all the doors, the rear lid and the tank flap together.
The central locking system on your vehicle locks and unlocks all the doors
and the tank flap simultaneously. The rear lid is unlocked when the vehicle
is opened. However, the handle must be used to open it. The vehicle can be
locked and unlocked using the remote control ⇒ page 105 or by turning the
key in the lock in the driver door.
The windows can also be centrally opened or closed using the central lock-
ing system ⇒ page 111. The sunroof* can be closed but not opened using
the central locking system.
The central locking system is combined with an anti-theft security system.
If the vehicle is locked with the key from the outside, the interior opening
levers stop working, which prevents unauthorised persons from entering
the vehicle.
Should the central locking system fail to work, you can activate all the locks
individually.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
100 Opening and closing
Automatic locking function (Auto Lock)*
The Auto Lock* function automatically locks all doors and the rear lid when
the vehicle exceeds a speed of about 15 km/h.
The vehicle is unlocked again automatically when the ignition key is re-
moved. Alternatively, the driver can also unlock the vehicle using the central
locking switch or by opening one of the doors.
WARNING
Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the vehicle if it is locked from
the outside and the anti-theft security system is enabled, as the doors
and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could
delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.
Note
● Should the central locking system fail to work, you can still lock and un-
lock the driver door and the rear lid using the key. Locking the doors man-
ually if central locking fails to work ⇒ page 103.
● The anti-theft mechanism and the anti-theft alarm* cannot be enabled if
the central locking is not working.
● Never leave any valuable items in the vehicle unattended. Even a locked
vehicle is not a safe.
Unlocking the vehicle with the key
Fig. 71 Turning the key
to enable the open and
close functions
– To unlock the vehicle, turn the key in the driver door to position
A
⇒ Fig. 71.
– Pull the handle to open the door.
● This will unlock all the doors, the rear lid and the tank flap simultane-
ously.
● The anti-theft security system will be disabled.
Locking with the key
– To lock the vehicle, turn the key in the driver door to position
B
⇒ Fig. 71 ⇒
.
101Opening and closing
● This will lock all the doors and the rear lid.
● The interior lights are switched off, provided the light switch is in the
courtesy light position.
● The windows and the sunroof* will close as the key is held in the locking
position.
● The anti-theft security system will be enabled immediately.
Locking the vehicle without activating the anti-theft security system
With the anti-theft security system enabled, it is more difficult to break into
the vehicle. If the anti-theft security system has been enabled, the inside
door handles and the central locking switch will not work ⇒
.
If you are leaving passengers in the vehicle while it is parked, it is possible
to lock the vehicle without activating the anti-theft security system.
To do so, turn the key in the driver door twice in quick succession to posi-
tion
B
⇒ Fig. 71.
WARNING
Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the vehicle if it is locked from
the outside and the anti-theft security system is enabled, as the doors
and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could
delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.
CAUTION
If the driver door is locked using the key while open, the vehicle will be au-
tomatically immobilised and the alarm triggered.
Note
● Please note that when the vehicle is locked without activating the anti-
theft mechanism, the anti-theft alarm* remains operative. You should there-
fore switch off the interior monitoring* before locking the vehicle, as other-
wise the alarm* could be triggered unintentionally.
● The driver door cannot be locked using the central locking system when
it is still open. The door must be locked separately after it has been closed.
This helps to prevent you from being locked out of the vehicle.
Central locking switch
The central locking system can be enabled from inside the
vehicle using the central locking switch on the driver door.
Fig. 72 Detail of the
driver door: Central lock-
ing switch
Locking the vehicle
– Press button
⇒
Fig. 72
⇒
.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
102 Opening and closing
Unlocking the vehicle
– Press button
.
Please note the following when using the central locking switch to lock your
vehicle:
● The doors and the rear lid cannot be opened from the outside (for secur-
ity reasons, e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).
● You can open the doors individually from the inside by pulling the inside
door handle.
● When the driver door is open, it cannot be locked by pressing the central
locking switch and then closing the door. This helps to prevent you from be-
ing locked out of the vehicle. The door has to be locked separately after it
has been closed.
● In the event of an accident in which the airbags inflate, doors locked
from the inside will be automatically unlocked to facilitate access and assis-
tance.
WARNING
The central locking switch is still operative when the ignition is switched
off. This switch can be used to automatically lock all the doors and the
rear lid. However, since this makes it difficult to enter the vehicle from
the outside, you should never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting
lives at risk.
Note
The central locking switch inside the vehicle will not be operative if the anti-
theft mechanism has been enabled.
Security central locking*
The security central locking feature allows you to only unlock
the driver door and the tank flap. All other doors and the
rear lid remain locked.
Unlocking the driver door and tank flap
– Turn the key once to the unlock position, or press the unlock
button on the remote control once.
Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and the tank flap
simultaneously.
– Turn the key twice within five seconds, or press the unlock but-
ton on the remote control twice within five seconds.
The security system and the anti-theft alarm* are immediately disabled if
you unlock only the driver door, without unlocking the other doors
⇒ page 107.
103Opening and closing
Locking the doors manually if the central locking fails to
work
Should the central locking system fail to work at any time
(for instance if there is no electrical power supply), each
door will have to be locked separately.
Fig. 73 Manual lock-
ing device
Fig. 74 Activating
manual locking
A manual locking device is provided on the front passenger door
and the rear doors (only visible when the door is open).
– Open the door.
– Use the key ⇒ Fig. 73 to turn the cap slightly and then fold it
downwards.
– Insert the key into the slot inside ⇒ Fig. 74 and turn it as far as
the stop, i.e. about 90 degrees to the right (doors on right side)
or to the left (door on the left side).
Once the door has been closed it can no longer be opened from the outside.
The door can be opened from the inside by pulling the door handle. If the
childproof lock is engaged on one of the rear doors, the door can be opened
by pulling the inside door handle once and then opening the door from the
outside.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
104 Opening and closing
Rear lid
Rear lid: opening and closing
Fig. 75 Driver door: Un-
locking the rear lid
Fig. 76 Luggage com-
partment: opening from
the outside
Opening the rear lid
– Press the centre button
on the remote control key or press
the switch*
on the driver door ⇒ Fig. 75. The rear lid will
open.
– Then lift up the rear lid. If your vehicle is equipped accordingly,
the rear lid will open automatically*.
Closing the rear lid
– Pull down the rear lid and let it drop into the latch ⇒
.
Use the recessed handle in the interior trim to make it easier to pull down
the rear lid.
WARNING
● After closing the rear lid, always check that the catch has engaged
properly. If not, the rear lid could open while driving, even if it has been
locked. Risk of accident!
● The rear lid must always be completely closed when the vehicle is
moving, otherwise toxic exhaust fumes may be drawn into the vehicle.
Danger of poisoning!
Note
● The door/rear lid warning symbol lights up on the instrument panel dis-
play if the rear lid is not properly closed when the ignition is switched on
⇒ page 75.
105Opening and closing
Childproof lock
Childproof locks on rear doors
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors from being
opened from the inside.
Fig. 77 Childproof lock
on the rear doors
The rear doors are equipped with childproof locks. These can be
operated using the ignition key. The childproof locks are only visi-
ble with the doors open.
Activating the childproof lock
– Turn the key in the direction of the arrow ⇒ Fig. 77.
Deactivating the childproof lock
– Turn the key in the opposite direction of the arrow.
When the childproof lock is enabled, the inside door handle will not work
and the door can only be opened from the outside.
Remote control key
Description
The remote control key will lock and unlock the vehicle with-
out having to insert the key in the lock.
The following functions are available:
● Locking and unlocking the vehicle
● Unlocking the rear lid
All the turn signals will flash as confirmation when the vehicle is locked or
unlocked. Furthermore, the interior lights will automatically light up when
the vehicle is unlocked and go out when the vehicle is locked, provided that
the switches are in the courtesy light position.
The remote control transmitter and the battery are integrated into the han-
dle of the key. The receiver is in the interior of the vehicle. The maximum
range depends on different circumstances. The range is reduced when the
battery starts to lose power.
The remote control incorporates a foldaway key that can be used to manual-
ly lock or unlock the vehicle, as well as to start the engine.
If the receiver has been repaired or replaced, or if a replacement key is
used, the system will need re-programming by a specialised workshop. Only
then will you be able use the remote control again.
The remote control meets all relevant authorisation requirements and has
been approved by the Federal Approvals Office for Telecommunications of
the Federal Republic of Germany. All components are marked in accordance
with the current legal requirements. This certification forms the basis for of-
ficial approval for use in other countries.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
106 Opening and closing
Note
● The remote control is automatically disabled when the ignition is switch-
ed on.
● The function of the remote control may be impaired by interference from
other nearby radio signals (e.g. from a mobile phone or TV transmitter) if
these are in the same frequency range.
Locking and unlocking the vehicle
Fig. 78 Remote control
key: Control buttons
Unlocking the vehicle
– Press button
A
⇒
Fig. 78 for about 1 second.
Locking the vehicle
– Press button
B
for about 1 second.
Opening the rear lid
– Press button
C
and hold for at least one second.
The turn signals will flash twice as confirmation when you unlock the vehi-
cle. The vehicle will be locked again automatically if you do not open one of
the doors or the rear lid within 60 seconds after unlocking the vehicle with
button
A
. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the
unlocking button is pressed by mistake.
In vehicles with the security central locking* feature, you can unlock just
the driver door and the tank flap by pressing button
A
once or the whole
vehicle by pressing the button twice.
The turn signals flash once when the vehicle is locked to confirm that the
doors and rear lid are properly locked.
Moreover, apart from unlocking the vehicle, the seat* and mirror* memory
programmed in the key is activated. The driver seat and exterior mirrors will
be automatically adjusted to the positions stored in the memory.
The interior lights will automatically light up when the vehicle is unlocked
and go out when the vehicle is locked, provided that the switch is in the
courtesy light position.
WARNING
Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the vehicle if it is locked from
the outside and the anti-theft security system is enabled, as the doors
and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could
delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.
Note
● The remote control should only be used when the doors and the rear lid
are closed.
● The remote control should not be used when the vehicle is out of sight.
● The anti-theft alarm* can be accidentally triggered and the vehicle
locked if you press the locking button
on the remote control inside the
vehicle before inserting the key in the ignition. If this should happen by
mistake, press the unlock button
.
107Opening and closing
Re-synchronising
Should the remote control fail to lock or unlock the vehicle,
the system must be re-synchronised.
– If the vehicle is locked, use the key to unlock the driver door.
– Press the unlock button
on the remote control.
– Insert the key into the ignition and switch on the ignition.
– Switch off the ignition and remove the key.
– Press the unlock
or the lock button
.
Anti-theft alarm system*
Description
The system triggers an alarm if anyone attempts to break in-
to the vehicle.
The anti-theft alarm helps to prevent the vehicle being broken into or sto-
len. If the system senses interference with the vehicle, it triggers an audible
and visible alarm.
How is the system enabled?
The anti-theft alarm system is enabled automatically when the vehicle is
locked with the remote control or by turning the key in the driver door (if the
door is closed). The anti-theft alarm is enabled about 30 seconds after the
vehicle is locked.
How is the system disabled?
The anti-theft alarm is only disabled when the vehicle is unlocked using the
remote control. The vehicle will lock again automatically if none of the doors
is opened within 60 seconds after pressing the remote control button.
If the vehicle is unlocked by turning the key in the driver door, all the other
doors, the rear lid and the tank flap will remain locked.
If the vehicle has been unlocked with the key in the driver door, the key
must be inserted in the ignition lock and the ignition switched on within 15
seconds of opening the door in order to disable the alarm. The alarm will be
triggered if the ignition is not switched on within 15 seconds.
Opening and closing function in cars with alarm
When using the key only without remote control to lock and unlock:
in unlocking all the doors, they unlock simultaneously.
When using the key only without remote control to lock and unlock:
in unlocking all the doors, they unlock simultaneously.
When combining locking using the remote control key and unlocking using
the key but without the remote control:
when unlocking, only the driver door will unlock.
When does the system trigger the alarm?
The following parts of the vehicle are monitored when the vehicle is locked:
● Engine compartment (bonnet)
● Luggage compartment
● Doors
● Tilt angle (tow-away protection)
● Ignition
● Radio (only with a factory-fitted SEAT radio)
● Interior ⇒ page 108
–
–
–
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
108 Opening and closing
If any of these areas are entered, the alarm will be triggered.
How is the alarm disabled?
The alarm can be switched off by unlocking the vehicle using the remote
control, or by switching on the ignition with the key, thus “disabling” the
alarm system. The alarm will also switch off when it comes to the end of its
cycle.
Turn signals
The turn signals flash briefly when the vehicle is locked to confirm that the
doors, the engine bonnet and the rear lid are properly closed and locked.
If the turn signals do not flash, check the doors, the bonnet and the rear lid
to make sure they are properly closed. The turn signals will also flash briefly
if one of the doors or the rear lid or engine bonnet is closed after the alarm
system has been enabled.
LED
When the vehicle is locked, the LED on the top of the driver door trim will
flash rapidly for about 30 seconds and then continue flashing slowly. This is
to indicate that the anti-theft alarm system (including the interior monitor-
ing and tow-away protection) is operative. If the LED lights up continuously
for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is locked instead of flashing, this
means the alarm system is not working properly.
Note
● To make sure that the alarm is fully operative when leaving the vehicle,
briefly check that all the doors and windows and the sunroof* are closed.
● The alarm is triggered immediately if one of the battery cables is discon-
nected while the alarm system is enabled.
Interior monitoring*
The interior monitoring triggers an alarm if it detects move-
ment inside the vehicle.
Fig. 79 Interior monitor-
ing switch
You should disable the interior monitoring if there is a possibility
that the alarm could be triggered, e.g. by a pet or by an object
moving inside the vehicle ⇒
. The tow-away protection feature,
which is integrated into the alarm system, should be disabled if
the vehicle is being towed or transported (e.g. by rail or ship).
Deactivating the interior monitoring
– Open the door and pull out the switch
A
(with the symbol )
to one side of the storage compartment, in the driver door
⇒ Fig. 79.
– Lock the vehicle.
109Opening and closing
Deactivating the tow-away protection
– Open the door and pull out switch
B
(with the symbol ) to
one side of the storage compartment, in the driver door
⇒ Fig. 79.
– Lock the vehicle.
The LED on switch
will light up when the interior monitoring is disabled.
The LED on the top of the driver door trim will also light up for about 3 sec-
onds. When the vehicle is locked, the LED on the top of the driver door trim
will flash rapidly for about 3 seconds. About 30 seconds later it starts flash-
ing slowly. The interior monitoring is automatically enabled again the next
time the vehicle is locked.
The LED on switch
will light up when the tow-away protection function is
disabled. The LED on the top of the driver door trim will also light up for
about 3 seconds. When the vehicle is locked, the LED on the top of the driv-
er door trim will flash rapidly for about 3 seconds. The tow-away protection
is automatically enabled again the next time the vehicle is locked.
WARNING
Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the vehicle if it is locked from
the outside and the anti-theft security system is enabled, as the doors
and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could
delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.
Electric windows
Controls
Fig. 80 Detail of the
driver door: Controls
Switches for front electric windows
Switch
⇒
Fig. 80 for the driver door window
Switch for the front passenger door window.
Switches for rear electric windows
Switch for the rear left door window
Switch for the rear right door window
Safety switch
A
B
C
D
E
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
110 Opening and closing
WARNING
● Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you
only intend to be gone for a short time. This is particularly important if
there are children in the vehicle, as they might otherwise be able to start
the engine or use power-operated equipment (e.g. the electric windows),
which could cause injuries. The electric window switches are only disa-
bled when the driver door or the front passenger door is opened.
● Never close the windows in a careless or uncontrolled manner, as
there is a risk of causing injuries.
● When locking the vehicle from the outside, make sure that nobody is
inside the vehicle, as the windows cannot be opened from the inside in
an emergency.
Switches on the driver door
The driver can operate all the electric windows in the vehi-
cle.
The electric windows are controlled by two-stage switches:
Opening the windows
– Press the switch as far as the first stop and hold it until the win-
dow has moved to the desired position.
– Press the switch briefly to the second stop and the window will
automatically open all the way.
Closing the windows
– Pull the switch as far as the first stop and hold it until the win-
dow has moved to the desired position.
– Pull the switch briefly to the second stop and the window will
automatically close all the way.
Safety switch
The safety switch ⇒ Fig. 80
E
can deactivate the rear door switches. The
windows can only be operated from the rear when the safety switch is press-
ed in.
The symbol lights up on the safety switch when the electric windows in
the rear doors are disabled (switch not pressed in).
Note
The windows will work for about ten minutes after the ignition has been
switched off. The electric window switches are only disabled when the driver
door or the front passenger door is opened.
Switches on the front passenger's door and rear doors
Each of these doors has a switch for its own window.
Fig. 81 Switch on front
passenger door
111Opening and closing
The electric windows are controlled by two-stage switches:
Opening the windows
– Press the switch as far as the first stop and hold it until the win-
dow has moved to the desired position.
– Press the switch briefly to the second stop and the window will
automatically open all the way.
Closing the windows
– Pull the switch as far as the first stop and hold it until the win-
dow has moved to the desired position.
– Pull the switch briefly to the second stop and the window will
automatically close all the way.
Note
The windows will work for about ten minutes after the ignition has been
switched off. The electric window switches are only disabled when one of
the front doors is opened.
Opening and closing the windows using the central locking
function
The windows can be opened or closed simultaneously when
the vehicle is unlocked or locked.
Opening the windows using the remote control
– Press and hold the unlock button
on the remote control until
the windows reach the desired position.
Opening the windows using the ignition key
– Unlock the driver door with the key and hold the key in the un-
lock position until all the windows are open.
Closing the windows using the remote control
– Press and hold the lock button
until all windows are closed
⇒
.
Closing the windows using the ignition key
– Lock the driver door with the key and hold the key in the lock
position until all the windows are closed ⇒
.
The windows will stop moving when you release the remote control button
or turn the key back to its initial position in the door lock.
WARNING
● Be careful when closing the windows to ensure nobody is hurt.
● For safety reasons, you should only use the remote control open and
close functions within about 2 metres of the vehicle. To avoid injuries, al-
ways keep an eye on the windows when pressing the button to close
them. The windows stop moving as soon as the button is released.
Possible malfunctions
Automatic open and close function not working
The automatic open and close function will not work if the battery has been
temporarily disconnected. The function can be restored as follows:
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
112 Opening and closing
● Close the window as far as it will go by lifting and holding the electric
window switch.
● Release the switch and then lift it again for one second. This will re-ena-
ble the automatic function.
Sliding/tilting sunroof*
Description
The sliding/tilting sunroof is operated using the rotary knob ⇒ Fig. 82. The
rotary knob for sliding the roof open can be adjusted to several different
settings (with click stops). This knob only works when the ignition is switch-
ed on. The rotary knob must be in the
0
position if you want to tilt the roof
up at the rear.
The sunroof will work for about ten minutes after the ignition has been
switched off. However, it is immediately disabled when one of the front
doors is opened.
Opening/Tilting
The sunroof will create less wind noise if it is opened in the
convenience position.
Fig. 82 Detail of headlin-
er: Sliding/tilting sunroof
control
Convenience position
– Turn the control until it engages at position
1
⇒ Fig. 82. The
sunroof will now only open as far as the convenience position
which means there is less wind noise.
Opening completely
– Turn the switch to position
2
and hold it until the sunroof rea-
ches the desired position. This position can cause more wind
noise.
Tilting open
– Turn the control to position
0
.
113Opening and closing
– With the control in position 0, press the control briefly to make
the roof tilt open all the way.
– To open the roof as far as an intermediate setting, press and
hold the control until the roof has moved to the desired posi-
tion.
When you release the switch it will automatically spring back from position
2
to position
1
.
The sliding sun blind in the headliner automatically opens when the sunroof
is slid open. If required, it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is
closed.
It is advisable to close the sun blind when the vehicle is left standing in the
sun. It is important to remember to close the sunroof when parking the vehi-
cle or if it suddenly starts raining, especially when the sun blind is closed.
For further information on the automatic close function, see ⇒ page 113.
Closing
Closing
– Turn the control to position
0
⇒ Fig. 82 to close the sunroof
⇒
.
Closing the sunroof from the tilt position
– Pull the specially formed rear end of the control and hold it until
the sunroof has moved down to the desired position.
– Pull the switch briefly to lower the sunroof automatically to the
fully closed position. If required, the sunroof can be stopped in
any position by briefly pulling the control again ⇒
.
WARNING
Take care when closing the sunroof. There is a risk of suffering injury. For
this reason, always take out the ignition key when leaving the vehicle.
Automatic close function
The sunroof can also be closed from outside the vehicle.
– Turn the key in the lock on the driver door and hold it in the lock
position or press the lock button on the remote control until the
sunroof has closed all the way ⇒
.
WARNING
Take care when closing the sunroof. There is a risk of suffering injury.
Solar sunroof*
The solar cells in the sunroof power the air conditioner fan.
The solar sunroof is operated in the same way as the normal sliding/tilting
sunroof.
The interior trim is fixed to the solar sunroof and cannot be opened and
closed separately.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
114 Opening and closing
Emergency electrical activation
In an emergency it is possible to close the sunroof electroni-
cally.
The sliding sunroof mechanism is equipped with a safety cut-out. If
the roof should fail to close normally, it can be closed with the
emergency function.
– Turn the control to position
0
⇒ Fig. 82.
– Pull on the control switch until the roof closes.
WARNING
Take care when closing the sunroof. There is a risk of suffering injury. For
this reason, always take out the ignition key when leaving the vehicle.
115Lights and visibility
Lights and visibility
Lights
Lights: switching on and off
Fig. 83 Detailed view of
the dash panel: Light
switch
Switching on the side lights
– Turn the light switch ⇒ Fig. 83 to position .
Switching on dipped or main beam headlights (driving lights)
Dipped beam headlights
– Turn the lights switch to position .
Main beam headlights
– Turn the lights switch to position .
– Press the main beam lever forward ⇒ page 122.
Switching off the lights
– Turn the light switch to position O.
Daytime running lights: In vehicles for countries where daytime running
lights are obligatory and in all vehicles with AFS headlights, daytime run-
ning lights are turned on or off with the ignition. Daytime running lights
have main beam flashers, as usual, but not the dipped beam headlight
function
The dipped beam headlights will only work with the ignition on. The head-
lights are automatically switched to side lights after the ignition has been
switched off.
If the side lights or the dipped beam headlights are turned on, the sym-
bol will come on together with the lights switch.
Note
● If the lights are left on after the key has been taken out of the ignition
lock, a buzzer sounds when the driver door is opened.
● Observe all relevant legal requirements when using the signalling and
lighting systems described here.
● Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog
lights, the tail lights and the turn signals may be temporarily misted. This
has no influence on the useful life of the lighting system. By switching on
the lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly
be demisted. However, the edges may continue to be misted.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
116 Lights and visibility
Automatic headlight switch* (sensor-controlled)
If you set the light switch to “AUTO”, the dipped headlights
will switch on and off automatically according to the ambi-
ent light level.
Fig. 84 Detailed view of
the dash panel: Light
switch
Turning on dipped beam headlights
– Turn the light switch ⇒ Fig. 84 to the AUTO position.
Turning off dipped beam headlights
– Turn the light switch to position O.
The symbol on the switch lights up when the switch is in the AUTO position.
The dipped beams, side lights, tail lights and number plate lights come on
together when the headlights are switched on automatically.
When you are using the automatic headlights switch, you can also operate
the main beam headlights, however, please note the following: If you ena-
ble the main beam headlights while using the automatic headlights func-
tion during the day (e.g. when driving through a tunnel), but do not disable
them again, only the dipped beam headlights will come on the next time
the lights are automatically switched on. To be able to use the main beam
headlights again, you must first pull the main beam lever back to the "off"
position and then push it forward again to "on".
The side lights, headlights, fog lights and rear fog light can still be switched
on manually in the normal way by using lights switch ⇒ page 115.
The interior mirror is fitted with sensors that measure the ambient light. The
dipped beam headlights will be switched on automatically if the available
light drops below the factory preset value (for instance when driving
through a tunnel, etc.). The headlights switch off again automatically when
the light level increases ⇒
.
WARNING
● The automatic dipped beam headlights are only intended to assist
the driver. Automatic dipped beam headlights do not relieve the driver of
his or her responsibility to control them and turn off or turn on the lights
manually according to weather or lighting conditions. The light sensors
are, for example, unable to detect rain and fog - you should therefore al-
ways switch on the dipped beam headlights manually in these condi-
tions and when driving after dark.
● Observe all relevant legal requirements when using the signalling
and lighting systems described here.
Note
● If automatic headlight switching is activated, when the ignition is turned
off the dipped beam headlights are turned off, and when the key is removed
from the ignition the side lights are turned off.
● If you have to attach any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so
in front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the automatic dipped beam
headlight or anti-dazzle function from working correctly or even from work-
ing at all.
117Lights and visibility
● The warning symbol will appear on the instrument panel if a malfunc-
tion occurs ⇒ page 82.
● Observe all relevant legal requirements when using the signalling and
lighting systems described here.
Front fog lights
The light switch can also be used to turn on the front fog
lights.
Switching on the front fog lights
– Do ⇒ Fig. 83 not turn the light switch to the symbol .
– First turn the light switch to the position or .
– Then pull the light switch out to the first stop
1
.
The front fog light symbol next to the switch will light up when the front
fog lights are on.
Rear fog light
The light switch can also be used to turn on the rear fog
light.
– Do ⇒ Fig. 83 not turn the light switch to the symbol .
– First turn the light switch ⇒ Fig. 83 to the position or .
– Then pull out the light switch to the second stop
2
to switch
on the rear fog light.
The symbols and next to the switch will light up when the rear fog light
is switched on.
If you are towing a trailer or caravan equipped with a rear fog light on a vehi-
cle with a factory-fitted towing bracket*, only the rear fog light on the trailer
or caravan will light up.
CAUTION
To avoid dazzling the traffic behind you, the rear fog light should only be
used in accordance with legal regulations.
Coming home / leaving home function*
The coming home and leaving home functions are used to
light up the surroundings in the dark. The front fog lights,
the rear side lights and the number plate light switch on.
Fig. 85 Detailed view of
the dash panel: Coming
home and leaving home
functions
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
118 Lights and visibility
Activating the function
– Briefly press the knob ⇒ Fig. 85 to release it from its set posi-
tion.
– Turn the knob to position 1.
– Press the knob in again to prevent the setting from being
changed unintentionally.
Deactivating the function
– Briefly press the knob ⇒ Fig. 85 to release it from its set posi-
tion.
– Turn the knob to position 0.
– Press the knob in again to prevent the setting from being
changed unintentionally.
The coming home and leaving home functions are controlled by light sen-
sors in the interior mirror housing. The system will function when the follow-
ing requirements are met:
● The knob is set to position 1.
● The headlights and the ignition are switched off.
● Dark conditions; the sensors register little or no light.
Coming home
When the system is enabled and it is dark, the corresponding exterior lights
switch on as soon as the driver door is opened.
The exterior lights will stay on for up to a maximum of 2 minutes as long as
one of the doors or the rear lid is open.
The exterior lights stay on for about 30 seconds to light up the area around
the vehicle after all the doors and the rear lid have been closed.
This time interval is factory-set, but you can have it changed by a special-
ised workshop to suit your own requirements (max. setting is 60 seconds).
Leaving home
The exterior lights are switched on when the vehicle is unlocked with the
button on the remote control key.
The exterior lights go out when the driver door is opened or after 60 sec-
onds when the vehicle locks itself again automatically ⇒ page 106.
WARNING
Before leaving the vehicle, remove the key from the ignition, as the lights
will not go out if the coming home function is activated. This will lead to
battery discharge and vehicle breakdown.
Note
● If you always wish to use the coming home and leaving home functions,
you can leave them permanently switched on. As the system is controlled
via a photosensor, it will only work in dark conditions.
● Permanent use of the coming home and leaving home functions, partic-
ularly on short journeys, will increase the load on the battery. To make sure
the battery is always sufficiently charged, occasionally drive longer distan-
ces.
● If the fog lights have been switched on by the coming home and leaving
home functions, they will always be switched off when you switch on the ig-
nition.
● Observe all relevant legal requirements when using the signalling and
lighting systems described here.
119Lights and visibility
Instrument lighting
The brightness of the instrument lighting, displays and cen-
tre console lighting can be varied as required.
Fig. 86 Instrument panel
lighting
– Press the
+
button to increase the brightness.
– Press the
-
button to reduce the brightness.
With the ignition switched on
The lighting of the digital displays will adjust automatically, depending on
the ambient light.
With the vehicle's lights switched on
When the vehicle's lights are switched on, the brightness of the instrument
lighting, displays and centre console lighting can be varied by pressing the
+
and
-
buttons.
Headlight range control
When the dipped beam headlights are switched on, the
range of the headlights can be adjusted to suit the load of
the vehicle.
Fig. 87 Headlight range
control
– Briefly press the knob ⇒ Fig. 87 to release it from its set posi-
tion.
– Turn the knob to the required setting.
– Press the knob in again to prevent the setting from being
changed unintentionally.
Settings
The settings roughly correspond to the following load conditions:
Two front occupants, luggage compartment empty
All seats occupied, luggage compartment empty
O
1
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
120 Lights and visibility
All seats occupied, luggage compartment loaded
Driver only, luggage compartment loaded
CAUTION
Always adjust the headlights to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Make sure
you lower the headlights when the vehicle is more heavily laden.
Dynamic headlight range control
On vehicles with xenon lamps, the headlights automatically adapt to suit
the load being carried when the ignition is switched on and when the vehi-
cle is moving, depending on the load of the vehicle and the type of driving
(e.g. when accelerating and braking).
2
3
Daytime driving lights*
The daytime running lights turn on automatically when the
ignition is switched on.
Fig. 88 Daytime running
lights switch
Activating the function
– Briefly press the knob ⇒ Fig. 88 to release it from its set posi-
tion.
– Turn the knob to position 1.
– Press the knob in again to prevent the setting from being
changed unintentionally.
Deactivating the function
– Briefly press the knob ⇒ Fig. 88 to release it from its set posi-
tion.
– Turn the knob to position 0.
121Lights and visibility
– Press the knob in again to prevent the setting from being
changed unintentionally.
This button activates or deactivates the daytime running lights function.
With the function activated, when the ignition is switched on the daytime
running lights are turned on automatically.
Note
Please observe any relevant legal requirements which may apply in your
country.
Adaptive headlights* (for driving around bends)
When driving around bends, the headlights will light the
most important areas of the road.
Fig. 89 Adaptive head-
lights when driving
The dynamic cornering light gives better illumination of the curve area and
the side of the road when driving around a bend ⇒ Fig. 89. The dynamic cor-
nering light is controlled automatically depending on the speed and the
steering wheel angle.
The dipped beam headlights are regulated automatically when you drive
around a bend, depending on how far you turn the steering wheel. The two
main headlights move at different angles to avoid that the front of the vehi-
cle is left completely in the dark.
Note
The system operates from a speed of about 10 km/h (6 mph).
Hazard warning lights
The hazard warning lights are used to draw the attention of
other road users to your vehicle in emergencies.
Fig. 90 Centre console:
Switch for hazard warn-
ing lights
– Press the switch
⇒
Fig. 90 to switch the hazard warning
lights on or off.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
122 Lights and visibility
All four turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights
are switched on. The turn signal indicators and the hazard control lamp
indicator flash at the same time. The hazard warning lights also work
when the ignition is switched off.
In an accident in which the airbags are triggered, the hazard warning lights
are switched on automatically.
Note
You should switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users,
e.g.
● When reaching the tail end of a traffic jam
● If your vehicle breaks down or there is an emergency
● If your vehicle is being towed away or if you are towing another vehicle
Turn signal and main beam headlight lever
The turn signal and main beam headlight lever also oper-
ates the parking lights and the headlight flasher.
Fig. 91 Turn signal and
main beam headlight lev-
er
The turn signal and main beam headlight lever has the following
functions:
Turn signals
– Move the lever all the way up to indicate right or all the way
down to indicate left ⇒ Fig. 91.
– Move the lever up or down just as far as the point of resistance
and hold it there: the turn signals flash for as long as you hold
the lever (for instance when changing a lane).
– Move the lever briefly up or down as far as the point of resist-
ance and release it to signal briefly (the turn signals flash three
times).
123Lights and visibility
Main beam headlights
– Press the lever forward to switch on the main beams.
– Pull the lever back towards you to switch the main beam head-
lights off again.
Headlight flasher
– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel to operate the flasher.
Parking light
– Switch the ignition off.
– Move the lever up or down to turn on the right or left-hand park-
ing lights respectively.
Notes on these functions
● The turn signals only work when the ignition is switched on. The turn
signal lamp or flashes in the instrument panel when the turns signals
⇒ page 65 are working.
● The turn signals are cancelled automatically when the steering wheel is
returned to the straight-ahead position.
● The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam
headlights are already on. The main beam headlight indicator lamp then
comes on in the instrument panel.
● The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever, even if
no other lights are switched on. The main beam headlight indicator lamp
then comes on in the instrument panel.
● When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight and the tail light
on one side of the vehicle light up with reduced intensity. The parking lights
will only work with the ignition off.
CAUTION
Never use the main beam headlights or the headlight flasher if this would
dazzle oncoming traffic.
Interior lights
Front interior lights and glove compartment light
The front interior light also incorporates the reading lights
for the driver and passenger.
Fig. 92 Detail of headlin-
er: front interior lights
The rocker switch
A
⇒
Fig. 92 for the front interior light has the
following functions:
Door light position
– Move switch
A
to the centre position.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
124 Lights and visibility
Interior light switched on
– Move switch
A
to position I.
Interior light switched off
– Move switch
A
to position O.
Front reading lights
– Press one of the switches
B
to turn the left and right reading
lights on and off.
Glove compartment light
– Open the glove compartment on the front passenger side. The
glove compartment light will come on automatically if the side
lights or headlights are switched on, and will go out again
when the glove compartment is closed.
Footwell* and door lighting
– This is switched on when the doors are opened and off when
they are closed.
If the switch is in the courtesy light position, the interior light comes on au-
tomatically when the vehicle is unlocked or the doors are opened. The light
also comes on when the key is pulled out of the ignition. The light turns off
about 30 seconds after closing the doors. The interior light is switched off
immediately when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is switched on.
If a door is left open, the light is switched off after about 10 minutes to pre-
vent the battery from running flat.
The brightness of the lights is automatically adjusted by a dimmer when
they are switched on.
Ambient lighting*
The ambient lighting illuminates a number of important
controls.
Fig. 93 Detail of headlin-
er: Ambient lighting
The lights in the door handles come on automatically when the ignition is
switched on.
The lighting above the windscreen* also comes on when the side lights or
headlights are switched on. The centre console is illuminated from above.
The ambient lighting* cannot be switched off manually.
125Lights and visibility
Rear reading lights
Fig. 94 Detail of headlin-
er: rear reading lights
The reading lights are switched on and off with the switches
.
Luggage compartment light
Fig. 95 Detailed view of
the top of the luggage
compartment: luggage
compartment lighting
The light is in the upper part of the luggage compartment. A second light is
provided on the inside, below the loading edge.
The light
⇒
Fig. 95 switches on automatically when the rear lid is opened.
The luggage compartment light is switched off automatically if the rear lid is
left open for more than 10 minutes.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
126 Lights and visibility
Visibility
Heated rear window
The rear window heating clears the rear window of conden-
sation.
Fig. 96 Switch for heat-
ed rear window
– Press button
to switch the rear window heating on or off
⇒ Fig. 96.
The heated rear window only works when the ignition is switched on. An in-
dicator lamp on the button lights up when the rear window heater is switch-
ed on.
The heated rear window switches off automatically after about 10 minutes if
the outside temperature is above 0 °C.
Depending on the outside temperature, the exterior mirrors are also heated
while the heated rear window is turned on.
The exterior mirror heating is not activated at temperatures above approxi-
mately 20 °C.
For the sake of the environment
Switch off the heated rear window as soon as the rear window has demis-
ted. By saving electrical power you can also save fuel.
Sun visors
The sun visors can improve visibility and contribute to safe-
ty.
Fig. 97 Sun visor
The sun visors
1
for the driver and the front passenger can be pulled out of
their mountings in the centre of the vehicle and turned towards the doors
⇒ Fig. 97.
The vanity mirrors in the sun visor have covers. On opening the cover
2
,
the mirror light* located in the headliner is automatically switched on. The
127Lights and visibility
light switches itself off when the cover is closed and when the sun visor is
pushed back up.
Sun blind*
Sun blinds are provided for the rear window and the rear
side windows.
Fig. 98 Sun blind exten-
ded to cover rear side
window
Fig. 99 Switch for elec-
tric sun blind on rear win-
dow
Sun blind (rear side windows)
– Pull out the blind and hook it into the hooks at the top of the
door frame ⇒ Fig. 98.
Sun blind (rear window)
– Press the switch
to extend or retract the electric sun blind for
the rear window ⇒ Fig. 99.
The sun blind for the rear window switches off automatically when it reaches
the end position. It can be made to move in the other direction before it rea-
ches its end position by briefly pressing the switch a second time. If the ig-
nition is turned off while the blind is still moving, it continues until it rea-
ches the end position before switching off.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
128 Lights and visibility
Note
● An overload cut-out may be triggered if the sun blind for the rear window
is operated repeatedly. There will then be a short delay before the blind can
be operated again.
● As the material of the sun blind is less flexible at low temperatures the
electric actuator is switched off when the temperature in the car is below
-5 °C. The sun blind can only be operated when the temperature inside the
car rises above this level.
Windscreen wipers
Windscreen wipers
The windscreen wiper lever controls the windscreen wipers
and the automatic wash and wipe.
Fig. 100 Windscreen
wiper lever
The windscreen wiper lever
⇒
Fig. 100 has the following settings:
Short wipe
– Move the lever down to position
1
to give the windscreen a
short wipe.
Intermittent wipe / Rain sensor* (activate)
– Move the lever up to position
2
.
– Move the switch
A
up or down to set the wiper intervals.
– In vehicles equipped with a rain sensor*, you can move the
switch
A
up and down to set the sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Slow wipe
– Move the lever up to position
3
.
Continuous wipe
– Move the lever up to position
4
.
Automatic wash and wipe
– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel,
5
, to activate the
windscreen washer.
– Release the lever. The washer will stop and the wipers will keep
running for approximately 4 seconds.
Deactivating the windscreen wiper
– Pull the lever to basic position
0
.
General notes
The washers and wipers will work only when the ignition is switched on.
129Lights and visibility
If you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights, the wiper speed will automatically be
reduced. The rain sensor* will automatically be set to the intermittent wipe
function.
The windscreen washer jets are heated when the ignition is switched on.
The wiper intervals in the intermittent wipe setting are also varied automati-
cally according to the road speed (in addition to the manual delay setting).
When the lights are switched on you should only pull the lever briefly to
wash the windscreen, otherwise the headlight washers* will also be ena-
bled. This will use an unnecessary amount of fluid from the reservoir.
Rain sensor
The rain sensor* will only function in the intermittent wipe position. The in-
termittent wipe function is enabled automatically when it starts to rain.
If the windscreen wiper lever was in the intermittent wipe position when the
ignition was off, the rain sensor will not activate until you reach a speed of
6 km/h.
Use switch
A
to set the sensitivity of the rain sensor*.
If you have selected a high sensitivity level for the rain sensor the wind-
screen wipers will react sooner to any moisture on the windscreen.
The wiper intervals in the intermittent wipe setting are also varied automati-
cally according to the road speed (in addition to the sensitivity setting).
WARNING
● For correct visibility and safe driving, the wiper must be in perfect
condition ⇒ page 214. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
● The rain sensor* is only intended to assist the driver. The driver is
still obliged to manually operate the windscreen wipers as required de-
pending on visibility.
● Do not use water-repellent coatings on the windscreen. In bad visibili-
ty conditions such as light rain, low sun or when driving at night, these
coatings can cause increased dazzle, which is a serious safety hazard.
Such coatings can also cause the windscreen wiper blades to make
noise.
CAUTION
● In the event of frost, check that the wiper blade has not frozen before
activating the windscreen wipers. Should the windscreen wiper system be
enabled when the blade is frozen, this could damage it or even the wind-
screen wiper system motor.
● Make sure you switch off the windscreen wiper system (lever in position
0) before you use an automatic car wash. This will avoid inadvertent trigger-
ing of the wipers and possible damage to the wiper system.
Note
● Check that the washer fluid reservoir is full before starting a long jour-
ney. Fill the reservoir ⇒ page 235.
● Worn or dirty wiper blades can cause smearing on the glass which can
also impair the effectiveness of the rain sensor*. Check the condition of
windscreen wiper blades at regular intervals.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
130 Lights and visibility
Headlight washer system
Fig. 101 Headlight with
extended washer jet
With the lights switched on, operate the automatic wash and wipe
⇒ Fig. 100
5
, and keep the lever pulled towards you for at least 1
second.
The headlight washer jets come out of the bumper automatically (under wa-
ter pressure)
⇒
Fig. 101.
Clean off dirt (insects, etc.) from the lenses at regular intervals, for instance
when filling the tank.
To ensure that the system works properly in winter, keep the nozzle holders
free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer spray.
Rear vision mirrors
Interior mirror with manual anti-dazzle setting
Normal setting
– Point the lever at the bottom of the mirror forwards.
Anti-dazzle setting for the interior mirror
– Position the small lever of the lower edge of the mirror to face
towards the rear.
Interior mirror with automatic anti-dazzle adjustment*
The automatic anti-dazzle function can be switched on and
off as desired.
Fig. 102 Interior mirror
with anti-dazzle setting:
Indicator lamp and on/off
switch
131Lights and visibility
Switching off the anti-dazzle function
– Press button
A
⇒ Fig. 102. Control lamp
B
goes off.
Switching on the anti-dazzle function
– Press button
A
⇒ Fig. 102. Indicator lamp
B
turns on.
Anti-dazzle function
The anti-dazzle function is activated every time the ignition is switched on.
The green warning lamp lights up in the rear vision mirror housing.
When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the interior rear vision mirror will
darken automatically according to the amount of light it receives. The anti-
dazzle function is disabled if:
● the interior lighting is switched on
● reverse gear is engaged
Sensors for automatic headlights*
When the light switch is set to the AUTO position, the dipped beam head-
lights are switched on and off automatically according to the ambient light
level with the aid of the sensors located in the interior mirror ⇒ page 116.
WARNING
Electrolyte fluid can leak from a broken mirror. This could cause irritation
to the skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you come into contact with
this liquid, it must be rinsed with large quantities of water. Seek medical
assistance if needed!
CAUTION
Electrolyte fluid leaking from a broken mirror can cause damage to plastic
surfaces. Use a sponge or similar to remove the fluid as soon as possible.
Note
● The interior mirror automatic anti-dazzle function* will only work proper-
ly if the sun blind* for the rear window is retracted and if there are no other
objects preventing light from reaching the mirror.
● If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in
front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the automatic headlight or anti-
dazzle function from working correctly or even from working at all.
Exterior mirrors
The exterior mirrors are adjusted electrically.
Fig. 103 Detailed view of
the armrest: Adjuster
knob
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
– Turn the adjuster knob to position
⇒
Fig. 103
L
(left exterior
mirror) or position
R
(right exterior mirror).
– Move the knob as required to adjust the exterior mirror for a
good view behind you.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
132 Lights and visibility
Retracting both exterior mirrors
– Turn the knob to position
A
.
It is advisable to fold the exterior mirrors, for example when parking or when
driving through narrow spaces.
Heated mirrors
The mirrors are heated (depending on the outside temperature) when the
heated rear window ⇒ page 126 is switched on.
The exterior mirror heating is not activated at temperatures above approxi-
mately 20 °C.
Memory for exterior mirrors*
In vehicles with memory function for the driver seat, the setting of the exte-
rior mirrors is automatically stored together with the seat position
⇒ page 137.
Tilting function for exterior mirror on the passenger side* (only if equipped
with memory for exterior mirrors)
When reverse gear is engaged, the mirror surface tilts slightly downwards,
provided the mirror control is switched to the exterior mirror on the passen-
ger side (knob in position
R
⇒ Fig. 103). This provides a better view of the
kerb when parking.
The mirror returns to its original position as soon as reverse gear is disen-
gaged and the vehicle is driven forwards at a speed above 15 km/h, or
when the mirror control is turned to position
L
or to the neutral position
0
.
CAUTION
● Rear view convex or aspheric* mirrors increase the field of vision, al-
though objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors. Therefore,
you should not rely on these mirrors for judging the distance of vehicles be-
hind.
● If one of the mirror housings is knocked out of position (e.g. when park-
ing), the mirrors must first be fully retracted with the electric control. Do not
readjust the mirror housing by hand, as this will interfere with the mirror ad-
juster function.
Note
If the electrical adjustment ever fails to operate, the mirrors can be adjusted
by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.
133Seats and storage
Seats and storage
Manual adjustment of the front seats
Seat adjuster controls
There are several seat adjustment functions for your conven-
ience
Fig. 104 Adjuster con-
trols on driver seat
Some of the equipment listed is only fitted on certain models or is an op-
tional extra.
Controls
Moving the seat backwards or forwards
Raising/lowering the seat
Adjusting the backrest angle
Adjusting the lumbar support
1
2
3
4
Moving the seats forwards and backwards
– Lift the lever
1
⇒ Fig. 104 and move the seat to the desired po-
sition.
– Then release the lever
1
and move the seat further until the
catch engages.
WARNING
The driver seat must only be moved forwards and backwards when the
vehicle is at a standstill. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Adjusting the seat height*
Raising the seat
– Pull the lever
2
⇒ Fig. 104 up repeatedly until the seat is in the
desired position.
Lowering the seat
– Press the lever
2
down repeatedly until the seat is in the de-
sired position.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
134 Seats and storage
WARNING
● The height of the driver seat must not be adjusted while driving. Fail-
ure to do so could result in an accident.
● Be careful when adjusting the seat height. Injuries can be caused if
the seat height is adjusted without due care and attention.
Adjusting the backrest angle
– Lean forwards to take your weight off the backrest.
– Turn the adjuster wheel
3
⇒ Fig. 104 to set the angle of the
backrest as required.
WARNING
The front seat backrests must not be reclined for driving. Otherwise, seat
belts and the airbag system might not protect as they should, with the
subsequent danger of injury.
Adjusting lumbar support*
– Do not exert any pressure on the backrest and turn adjuster
wheel
4
⇒ Fig. 104 to adjust lumbar support.
As you make the adjustments, the curvature of the cushioned area of the
lumbar region becomes more or less acute. In this way, it adapts to the nat-
ural curvature of the spine.
135Seats and storage
Electric adjustment of front seats*
Adjusting the seat
The arrangement of the switches corresponds with the de-
sign of the seats.
Fig. 105 Front seat: Ad-
juster controls
Fig. 106 Front seat: Seat
adjustment switches
The adjustment switches for the seat and backrest correspond with
the layout, design and operation of the seat. The seats can be ad-
justed merely by pressing the corresponding switch in the required
direction.
Moving the seat forwards / backwards
– Press switch
A
⇒ Fig. 105 forwards or backwards
1
⇒ Fig. 106 ⇒
.
Raising/lowering the seat
– Press switch
A
up or down ⇒ .
Raising/lowering the front part of the seat
– Press the front of switch
A
up or down
2
⇒ .
Raising/lowering the rear part of the seat
– Press the rear of switch
A
up or down
3
⇒ .
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
136 Seats and storage
Controls
Seat adjustment
Backrest adjustment
Lumbar support*
WARNING
● The electrical seat adjustment also works when the ignition is off or
when the key is not in the ignition. To avoid accidental injuries, never
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
● For safety reasons, the seat must only be adjusted when the vehicle
is at a standstill. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
● Be careful when adjusting the seat height. Injuries can be caused if
the seat height is adjusted without due care and attention.
Adjusting the backrest angle
Fig. 107 Front seat:
Backrest adjuster switch
A
B
C
– Press the button in the appropriate direction of the arrow
⇒ Fig. 107 to adjust the backrest ⇒
.
WARNING
The front seat backrests must not be reclined for driving. Otherwise, seat
belts and the airbag system might not protect as they should, with the
subsequent danger of injury.
Lumbar support*
The lumbar support can be adjusted to fit the natural curve
of the spine.
Fig. 108 Front seat: Ad-
juster switch for lumbar
support
Adjusting the contour
– Press the front part of the adjuster switch
⇒
Fig. 108 to increase
the contour of the lumbar support.
137Seats and storage
– Press the rear part of the adjuster switch to decrease the con-
tour of the lumbar support.
Adjusting the height
– Press the top part of the adjuster switch to move the contour
upwards.
– Press the bottom part of the adjuster switch to move the con-
tour down.
The lumbar support provides effective support for the natural curvature of
the spine to give a more relaxed seating position, especially on long jour-
neys.
Driver seat memory*
Description
The memory buttons in the driver door can be used to store
and recall up to four different positions for the driver seat
and exterior mirrors.
Fig. 109 Driver door:
Memory system
Memory buttons
Using memory buttons 1, 2, 3 and 4
⇒
Fig. 109, you can store and recall the
seat and exterior mirror positions for up to four different drivers.
STOP
button
The seat memory will be disabled if the
STOP
button is in the up position
(press and release). The word will light up next to the
STOP
button (only
visible when the lights are switched on).
The stored settings will all remain in the memory. However, the seat and the
exterior mirrors can now only be adjusted using the conventional electrical
adjustment. Use of the
STOP
button is recommended to disable the memory
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
138 Seats and storage
system when the vehicle is being driven temporarily by a different driver
whose settings do not need to be stored in the memory.
Note
You can also use the remote control to call up the stored settings
⇒ page 139.
Storing settings
The
STOP
button must be in its down position (pressed in) before
you can store the desired settings.
– Adjust the driver seat as required ⇒ page 135.
– Adjust both exterior mirrors ⇒ page 131.
– Press and hold the
MEMO
button. At the same time, press one
of the memory buttons for at least a second.
– Release both buttons. The setting is now stored on the selected
memory button.
Any new setting selected automatically cancels the existing setting stored
on the memory button. It is best to begin with memory button No. 1 for the
first driver and then assign the other memory buttons to each subsequent
driver.
The seat and mirror positions are stored when the vehicle is locked with the
remote control and are assigned to the remote control key. The exterior mir-
rors adjust automatically to the previous position when you unlock the vehi-
cle; the driver seat adjusts automatically when you open the driver door.
However, this does not delete the settings stored in memory buttons 1 to 4.
These settings can be enabled at any time.
Activating settings
Stored settings can be recalled using either the memory but-
tons or the remote control (remote control key).
Using the memory buttons
– If the driver door is open, press the desired memory button
briefly.
– If the driver door is closed, press and hold down the appropri-
ate memory button until the seat and exterior mirrors reach
their programmed positions.
Using the remote control
– Unlock the vehicle using the remote control and open the driver
door within the next ten minutes.
The seat adjustment will have to be called up using the memory buttons if
the driver door is not opened within 10 minutes after unlocking the vehicle
with the remote control.
WARNING
● For safety reasons, the seat must only be adjusted when the vehicle
is at a standstill. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
● In an emergency, the memory function can be stopped at any time by
pressing the STOP button or by briefly pressing any of the memory but-
tons.
139Seats and storage
Assigning remote control keys
The key must be assigned to a memory button so that the
positions stored in the memory can also be recalled using
the remote control key.
Assigning the remote control key to a memory button
– Using the memory button, recall the settings that are to be pro-
grammed onto the key.
– Keeping the memory button pressed down, press the unlock
button on the remote control key within 10 seconds.
– Wait for about 2 seconds before releasing the memory button.
Deleting assignment of the remote control key to the memory
button
– Press and hold the
MEMO
button and press the unlock button
on the remote control key within 10 seconds.
– Wait for about 2 seconds before releasing the
MEMO
button.
The previous settings are automatically cancelled when the keys are re-as-
signed to different memory buttons.
Head restraints
Front head restraints
In combination with properly worn seat belts, the head re-
straints offer effective protection, provided they are properly
adjusted to suit the height of the occupant.
Fig. 110 Front seats:
Head restraints
Raising the head restraint
– Take hold of the sides of the head restraint with both hands.
– Pull up the head restraint.
Lowering the head restraint
– Press button
A
and lower the head restraint.
Removing the head restraints
– Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
140 Seats and storage
– Press button
A
and pull out the head restraint.
Fitting the head restraint
– Insert the head restraint in its guides until it clicks into place.
Press button
A
and lower the head restraint.
The height of the head restraints is adjustable. They should be set to suit
the height of the occupant. In combination with the seat belts, the head re-
straints offer effective protection, provided they are properly adjusted.
For best protection, the top of the head restraint should be at least at eye
level or higher.
Head restraints on the side rear seats
Fig. 111 Outer rear
seats: Head restraints
Raising the head restraint
– Take hold of the sides of the head restraint with both hands.
– Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.
Lowering the head restraint
– Press button
A
⇒ Fig. 111 and lower the head restraint.
Removing the head restraint
– Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.
– Press button
A
⇒ Fig. 111 and pull out the head restraint.
Fitting the head restraint
– Insert the head restraint in its guides until it clicks into place.
Press button
A
and lower the head restraint.
When the rear seats are not occupied, the head restraints should be moved
to the lowest position so that they do not obstruct the driver's field of vi-
sion.
Rear seat central head restraint
Fig. 112 Centre rear
seat: Head restraints
141Seats and storage
Raising the head restraint
– Take hold of the sides of the head restraint with both hands.
– Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.
Lowering the head restraint
– Press button
A
⇒ Fig. 112 and lower the head restraint.
Removing the head restraint
– Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.
– Press button
A
⇒ Fig. 112 and pull out the head restraint.
Fitting the head restraint
– Insert the head restraint in its guides until it clicks into place.
Press button
A
and lower the head restraint.
When the rear seats are not occupied the head restraints should be moved
to the lowest position so that they do not obstruct the driver's field of vi-
sion.
Armrests
The armrest can be adjusted to several positions and incor-
porates a storage compartment.
Fig. 113 Armrest be-
tween the driver seat and
front passenger seat
Adjusting the armrest
– To adjust the position of the armrest, fold the armrest all the
way down.
– Then lift the armrest gradually until it engages in the desired
position.
Opening the storage compartment
– Press the release lever ⇒ Fig. 113.
Please note that the armrest can restrict the driver's movements when it is
lowered. The armrest should therefore be raised when driving in city traffic.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
142 Seats and storage
Luggage compartment
Loading the luggage compartment
Loads in the luggage compartment should be safely se-
cured.
Fig. 114 Position heavy
items as far forward as
possible.
To maintain safe handling on the road, please observe the follow-
ing points:
– Distribute the load evenly.
– Position heavy items as far forward as possible ⇒ Fig. 114.
WARNING
● Unsecured objects in the luggage compartment can suddenly shift
and cause changes in the handling of the vehicle.
● In an accident or a sudden manoeuvre, loose objects in the passenger
compartment can be flung forward and might injure vehicle occupants.
● Always keep all objects in the luggage compartment and use appro-
priate grips to secure them, particularly in the case of heavy objects.
● When you transport heavy objects, always bear in mind that a change
of the centre of gravity can also cause changes in vehicle handling.
● Please refer to the notes on ⇒ page 7.
Note
The tyre pressure must be adjusted according to the load. Consult the label
with the pressure values inside the fuel tank plug when required ⇒ Fig. 167.
143Seats and storage
Extending the luggage compartment
The two sections of the backrest can be folded forwards ei-
ther together or separately to increase the capacity of the
luggage compartment.
Fig. 115 Backrest re-
lease lever
Folding the backrest forwards
– Press the release lever
A
⇒ Fig. 115 in the direction indicated
by the arrow.
– Fold down the backrest.
Returning the backrest to its upright position
– Push the backrest up until it engages securely ⇒
. The red
marking on the tab
B
should no longer be visible when the
backrest is properly secured.
WARNING
● Make sure that the rear backrest is securely locked in position so that
the seat belt can provide proper protection on the centre rear seat.
● The rear backrest must always be securely latched so that objects
stored in the luggage compartment will not fly forward through the inte-
rior during sudden braking.
CAUTION
When returning the backrest to an upright position, make sure that the seat
belts for the outer rear seats are in their guides, so that they cannot be
caught up and damaged in the catches for the backrest.
Rear shelf
The rear shelf behind the rear seat backrest can be used to
store light items of clothing.
WARNING
Do not store any heavy or hard objects on the rear shelf. These could
cause injury if the brakes are applied suddenly.
CAUTION
Please note that hard objects could chafe against the wires of the heating
element in the rear window and cause damage.
Note
Make sure that the slots between the rear window and the rear shelf are
kept clear to ensure unimpaired ventilation.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
144 Seats and storage
Ski bag*
You can use the ski bag to transport skis or other extra-long
objects safely inside the vehicle without soiling or damag-
ing the upholstery.
Fig. 116 Detailed view of
the rear of the rear back-
rest: Ski bag cover
Fig. 117 Securing the
ski bag on the centre
seat belt buckle on the
rear seat bench
Loading
– Open the rear lid.
– Press the release catch for the ski bag cover (arrow) and fold the
cover downwards ⇒ Fig. 116.
– Pull down the centre rear armrest.
– From the passenger compartment, press down the release catch
for the ski bag cover and pull out the cover.
– Pull out and unfold the ski bag.
– The long items can now be loaded through the luggage com-
partment into the ski bag ⇒
.
Securing
– Insert the fastening belt
A
⇒ Fig. 117 of the ski bag into the
centre seat belt buckle
B
.
– Pull the free end of belt
C
to tighten.
Storing
– Close the cover of the load-through hatch in the luggage com-
partment.
– Carefully fold away the ski bag.
– Close the inside cover of the load-through hatch from the pas-
senger compartment.
WARNING
The ski bag must be secured in place with the fastening belt after it has
been loaded.
145Seats and storage
Note
Do not fold away the ski bag after use if it is still damp.
Roof rack
Description
Additional luggage can be carried on the roof rack.
Note the following points if you intend to carry loads on the roof:
● There are aerodynamic drainage channels on the roof of the vehicle and,
therefore, normal roof racks cannot be used. We recommend using the ba-
sic support units from the range of genuine SEAT accessories.
● These basic supports are the base of a complete roof rack system. For
safety reasons, however, the corresponding additional fastenings must be
fitted to carry luggage, bicycles, surfboards, skis and boats. All the parts of
this system are available from SEAT Official Services.
CAUTION
Any damage to the vehicle caused by the use of other types of roof rack or
incorrect installation will not be covered by the factory warranty. The roof
rack system must therefore be installed exactly according to the instructions
provided.
Attachment points
The roof rack must be attached at the marked points only.
Fig. 118 Attachment
points for basic support
units
Installation
The feet of the support units must be fitted exactly between the points
marked with arrows on the roof sealing strip
⇒
Fig. 118. The arrows are only
visible with the doors open.
Roof load
Loads carried on the roof must be securely attached. The ve-
hicle's handling is affected whenever you carry loads on the
vehicle.
The authorised load on the roof of your vehicle is 75 kg. Use the weight of
the roof rack system and that of the load as a basis to calculate the roof
load.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
146 Seats and storage
If less resistant systems are used, the roof rack must not be loaded to the
maximum weight permitted. If less resistant systems are used, these must
only be loaded to the maximum weight permitted indicated in the assembly
instructions.
WARNING
● Loads carried on the roof must be securely attached. Failure to do so
could result in an accident.
● Do not exceed the maximum roof load for the vehicle, the maximum
axle loads or the maximum gross vehicle weight. Failure to do so could
result in an accident.
● When transporting heavy or bulky loads on the roof, bear in mind that
the vehicle's handling is affected by the extra weight on the roof and a
possible susceptibility to cross winds. Adjust your speed and driving
style accordingly to avoid accidents.
For the sake of the environment
Roof racks are often left attached for convenience, even when they are not
being used. However, the increased air resistance means that the vehicle
uses more fuel. For this reason you should always take off the roof rack
when it is not in use.
Drink holder
Front drink holder
Fig. 119 Detailed view of
the dash panel: Drink
holder
– To open the drink holder, press the symbol on the drink hold-
er lid ⇒ Fig. 119
– To close the drink holder, press it in until it engages.
WARNING
● Do not put any hot drinks in the drink holder while the vehicle is mov-
ing. You can be scalded if the hot liquid is spilt.
● Do not use hard china cups or glasses. These could cause injury in the
event of an accident.
147Seats and storage
Drink holder in the rear armrest*
Fig. 120 Drink holder in
the rear armrest
Opening the drink holder
– Press the symbol
A
⇒ Fig. 120.
Adjusting the retainer arm
– To adjust one of the retainer arms
B
, release it by pressing in
the direction indicated (arrow) and move it as required.
The retainer arm should be positioned against the drink holder so that it is
held securely.
One or two drink holders can be held in the centre console.
WARNING
● Do not put any hot drinks in the drink holder while the vehicle is mov-
ing. You can be scalded if the hot liquid is spilt.
● Do not use hard china cups or glasses. These could cause injury in the
event of an accident.
Ashtray*, cigarette lighter* and electric
sockets*
Front ashtray*
Fig. 121 Centre console:
Open ashtray
Opening the ashtray
– Lightly press the front part of the ashtray
A
⇒ Fig. 121.
Removing the ashtray
– Take hold of the sides of the ashtray
B
⇒ Fig. 121 and lift it
out.
Fitting the ashtray casing
– Insert the casing and press it into its mountings.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
148 Seats and storage
WARNING
Never put waste paper in the ashtray, as this could cause a fire.
Rear ashtray
Fig. 122 Rear ashtray
Opening the ashtray
– Lift the lid.
Removing the ashtray
– Take hold of the lid ⇒ Fig. 122 and lift out the ashtray.
Fitting the ashtray casing
– Open the lid on the ashtray and press the casing into the
mounting as far as it will go.
WARNING
Never put waste paper in the ashtray, as this could cause a fire.
Cigarette lighter*
The 12 volt socket for the cigarette lighter can also be used
as a power source for other electrical appliances.
Fig. 123 Cigarette light-
er in the centre console
Using the cigarette lighter
– Press in the cigarette lighter button.
– Wait for the lighter to pop out slightly.
– Pull out the cigarette lighter immediately.
– Use the glowing heater element of the cigarette lighter to light
your cigarette.
149Seats and storage
– Put the cigarette lighter back in its socket.
Operating the socket
– Take out the cigarette lighter.
– Insert the plug of the electrical appliance into the cigarette
lighter socket.
The cigarette lighter ⇒ Fig. 123 employs a standard 12 volt socket, which
can also be used as a power source for electrical appliances. The applian-
ces connected to the power socket must not exceed a power rating of 100
W.
WARNING
● Be careful when using the electric cigarette lighter. Carelessness or
negligence when using the cigarette lighter can cause burns.
● The lighter will only work when the ignition is switched on.
● The electrical sockets and, therefore, any appliances connected to
them will only work when the ignition is switched on.
CAUTION
Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid damaging the sockets.
Note
The use of electrical appliances with the engine switched off will cause a
battery discharge.
Power socket*
Electrical equipment can be connected to the 12 volt power
socket.
Fig. 124 Detailed view of
the side trim in the lug-
gage compartment:
12 volt power socket
– Lift the power socket cover ⇒ Fig. 124.
– Insert the plug of the electrical appliance into the power socket.
Electrical equipment can be connected to the 12 volt power socket. The ap-
pliances connected to the power socket must not exceed a power rating of
100 W.
WARNING
The electrical sockets and, therefore, any appliances connected to them
will only work when the ignition is switched on.
CAUTION
Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid damaging the sockets.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
150 Seats and storage
Note
The use of electrical appliances with the engine switched off will cause a
battery discharge.
230 volt socket for Europlug*
Electrical equipment can also be connected to the 230 volt
socket in the centre console.
Fig. 125 Centre console:
230 volt socket
The 230 Volt socket can only be used when the engine is running
⇒
.
In vehicles with folding cover:
– Hold the cover of the socket at the lower recess.
– Lift the cover to open
⇒
Fig. 125.
Inserting the Europlug
– Insert the Europlug in the socket. The childproof safety device
on the socket is deactivated.
– If necessary, press the Europlug as far as possible into the sock-
et to ensure it is correctly inserted and will not jump out of
place while driving over a bump or similar.
LED warning lamp above socket
Steady green
light:
The childproof lock is unlocked. The socket is ready for
use
Flashing red
light:
There is a fault, for example, disconnection due to ex-
cess current or temperature
Equipment which may be connected
The 230 volt socket can be used to connect electrical equipment with a Eu-
roplug. Please note that the power consumption in this socket must not ex-
ceed 150 watts (peaks of 300 watts).
Even when more than one appliance is connected, the total consumption of
all the appliances must not exceed 150 watts. If necessary, please refer to
the manufacturer's label to confirm the power consumption of the connec-
ted equipment.
All connected appliances should be in perfect working order without any
faults.
151Seats and storage
WARNING
● Heavy appliances or connectors (for example, adapters) which hang
down directly from the Europlug socket may damage the socket with the
resultant risk of injury.
● Ensure that appliances connected to the socket are secure to prevent
them from being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking
or an accident. This could result in severe injury or loss of life ⇒ page 16,
Storing objects.
● Never spill liquid over the power socket– there is a risk of death. If
any moisture enters the socket, ensure that it is thoroughly dry before
using.
● Improper use of the sockets or electrical accessories can lead to seri-
ous injuries or cause a fire, with the resultant risk of injury.
● Children must never be left alone in the vehicle with the engine run-
ning. They could cause an accident.
● Appliances connected to the socket do not behave in the same way as
when they are connected to the mains power supply. They may overheat
during use and cause injury.
● When using adapters and extension leads, the childproof safety de-
vice on the 230 volt socket is disconnected and the socket is live. Risk of
injury!.
● Never insert objects which conduct electricity, such as a needle, in
the pins of the 230 volt socket. There is a risk of death.
● Always switch off electrical appliances connected to the socket if the
inverter goes off as a result of overheating. Failure to comply could result
in injuries.
CAUTION
● The instructions for handling appliances connected to the socket must
be observed.
● If the power consumption of the appliances connected exceeds 150
watts, the socket inverter will overheat. If the temperature exceeds a certain
value, the inverter will switch off. It may also switch off if the outside tem-
perature is very high, even if the power consumption is normal. The inverter
will switch on again automatically after it has cooled down. Appliances con-
nected to the socket, and which have been left switched on, will automati-
cally come back on ⇒
.
● Do not connect neon lamps to the socket. For technical reasons, these
could break down.
● Do not connect 115 volt appliances to the 230 volt power socket, as
they could be damaged. If you have any queries, please check the manufac-
turer's label for details of the power supply accepted by the appliance.
● With some adapters, for example for laptops, their built-in overload dis-
connection system prevents the equipment from switching on in the event
of an excessive start-up current. In this case, disconnect the adapter from
the power supply and try to reconnect after ten seconds.
Note
● Non-insulated equipment may cause interference to the radio or vehicle
electronics.
● The Europlug socket has a built-in childproof device and only carries live
current when the Europlug is correctly plugged in.
● Some appliances may not operate correctly in the absence of adequate
power (watts).
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
152 Seats and storage
● In some countries this socket is 115 volts. Therefore the socket should
have a different inverter installed at the factory. You can obtain retrofit kits
from your Technical Service. Do not connect 115 Volt appliances to the
230 Volt socket.
● The use of electrical equipment in the vicinity of the aerial in the rear
window may cause interference to the reception of stations broadcasting in
AM.
Compartments
Overview
There are several storage compartments at various points in
the vehicle.
Your vehicle has the following storage compartments:
First-aid kit*
Emergency triangle*
Glove compartment ⇒ page 152
Storage compartment in the centre console
On-board documentation compartment*
Compartments in the door trims ⇒ page 153
Coat hooks ⇒ page 153
Rear shelf ⇒ page 143
Side storage compartment in luggage com-
partment
Some of the compartments listed are only provided in certain models or are
optional extras.
Glove compartment
The lockable glove compartment is equipped with a light.
Fig. 126 Glove compart-
ment
Opening the glove compartment
– Pull the handle on the lid in the direction indicated (arrow)
⇒ Fig. 126 and open the lid.
Closing the glove compartment
– Close the lid and push it in until it engages.
If the side lights or headlights are switched on, the light in the glove com-
partment comes on when it is opened.
The lid has separate holders for a pen and a note pad.
WARNING
For safety reasons, the glove compartment must always be closed when
the vehicle is moving. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
153Seats and storage
Compartments in the door trim
Storage compartments are provided in the door trims.
Fig. 127 Door trim with
storage compartment
WARNING
The storage compartments in the door trims should only be used to store
small objects. Make sure that they are stored safely inside the compart-
ment, as they might otherwise impair the protection offered by the side
airbags.
Coat hooks
There is a coat hook above each of the rear doors.
Fig. 128 Area above the
rear doors: Coat hooks
WARNING
● Please make sure that any items of clothing hanging from the coat
hooks do not obstruct your view to the rear.
● The coat hooks should only be used for lightweight clothing. Do not
leave any heavy or sharp objects in the pockets.
● Do not use clothes hangers to hang up the clothing, as this could in-
terfere with the function of the head-protection airbags*.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
154 Seats and storage
Compartments in the front seats*
There is a storage compartment with a lid at the front of
each front seat.
Opening
– Pull the handle to open the compartment.
Closing
– Close the lid and push it in until it engages.
Note
The compartments will hold a maximum weight of 1 kg.
155Air conditioning
Air conditioning
2C-Climatronic
Description
The air conditioner is designed to automatically keep the
passenger compartment at the temperature you find most
comfortable at all times of the year.
Recommended settings:
– Set the temperature to 22 °C (71 °F).
– Press the
AUTO
⇒ Fig. 129 button.
The following setting quickly provides a comfortable temperature inside the
vehicle. We therefore recommend you do not modify the setting unless you
find this temperature uncomfortable or where circumstances require as
such.
The air conditioner provides heating and ventilation and also cools and de-
humidifies the air inside the vehicle.
The air conditioner is fully automatic and will constantly maintain the tem-
perature which has been set. To achieve this, the temperature of the air sup-
plied to the interior, the blower speed (volume of air delivery) and the air
distribution are regulated automatically. The system also takes solar radia-
tion into account and, therefore, no subsequent manual readjustments are
required. Therefore, automatic mode ⇒ page 158 should be used for the
comfort of all the passengers in virtually all conditions throughout the year.
Please note the following points:
The humidity of the air is automatically reduced when the system cools the
interior of the vehicle. This helps to prevent condensation on the windows.
If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensation
can drip off the evaporator in the air cooling system and form a pool under-
neath the vehicle. This is normal and does not indicate a leak.
If the outside temperature is low, the blower normally only switches to a
higher speed once the coolant has warmed up sufficiently (this does not ap-
ply to the defrost setting).
In order to achieve maximum engine power, the air conditioner compressor
is temporarily switched off when pulling away from standstill with full throt-
tle.
The compressor also switches off if the coolant temperature is excessively
high to ensure adequate engine cooling under extreme loads.
Pollution filter
The pollution filter (a combined particulate filter and activated charcoal fil-
ter) serves as a barrier against impurities in the outside air, including dust
and pollen.
For the air conditioner to work with maximum efficiency, the pollution filter
element must be replaced at the intervals specified in the Service Plan.
If the vehicle is driven in areas with a high level of air pollution and the filter
is no longer fully effective, it may be necessary to change the filter element
more frequently.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
156 Air conditioning
CAUTION
● If you suspect that the air conditioner system is damaged, switch over to
ECON mode to prevent further damage and have the system checked by a
specialised workshop.
● Repairs to the air conditioner require specialist knowledge and special
tools. For this reason, please contact a specialised workshop if the system
is not working properly.
Note
● Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen clear of snow, ice and
leaves to ensure unimpaired heating and cooling and to prevent the win-
dows misting over.
● The air from the outlets flows through the passenger compartment and
out through the slots below the rear window. Therefore, do not cover these
slots with items of clothing or other objects.
● The air conditioner operates most effectively with the windows and the
sliding/tilting sunroof* closed. However, if the vehicle has heated up after
standing in the sun for some time, the air inside can be cooled more quickly
by opening the windows briefly.
157Air conditioning
Controls
This overview will help you become quickly familiar with the controls for the air conditioner.
Fig. 129 Air conditioner controls
The left-hand display shows the temperature selected for the left-hand side
and the right-hand display the temperature for the right-hand side.
The functions can be switched on or off by briefly pressing the buttons. The
diode on the buttons lights up when the function is enabled.
The grille between buttons
and
must be kept clear, as the tempera-
ture sensors are located behind the grille.
● Do not cover the grille.
● Do not clean the grille with a vacuum cleaner, as this could damage the
temperature sensors located behind the grille.
Button(s) Meaning
Automatic mode
(left and right)
Temperature selection for driver and passenger
sides
Defrost
Manual air recirculation mode
Switches off air cooling
Switches off air conditioner (instead of
)
Automatic air recirculation mode (instead of
OFF
)
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
158 Air conditioning
Button(s) Meaning
(in the centre) Adjusts blower speed
Air to the windows
Air from the dashboard outlets
Air to the footwells
The
,
and
buttons (which regulate air distribution) can either be
selected individually or in combination.
Automatic mode
AUTO
Standard setting for all seasons.
Switching on automatic mode
– It is possible to select interior temperatures from +18 °C (64 °F)
to +29 °C (86 °F).
– Press the
AUTO
⇒ Fig. 129 button.
The automatic mode maintains a constant temperature inside the vehicle
and dehumidifies the air. Air temperature, air delivery and air distribution
are regulated automatically to reach the desired interior temperature as
quickly as possible, and then to maintain this temperature. The system au-
tomatically compensates for any variations in the outside temperature and
for the effect of direct sunlight.
The automatic temperature regulation only operates at temperature settings
between +18 °C and +29 °C. If a temperature below +18 °C is selected, LO
appears on the display. If a temperature is selected which is higher than
+29 °C, the display will show HI. In the maximum and minimum settings,
the climate control operates continuously with maximum cooling or heating
output and the temperature is not regulated automatically. The temperature
is not regulated.
Note
By keeping the
AUTO
button on the driver side pressed for several seconds,
the temperature of the passenger side can be set to the temperature of the
driver side or vice versa. The display indicates the new temperature value.
Selecting the temperature
-
+
Separate temperatures can be selected for the driver and
front passenger sides.
– Press the
-
or
+
buttons below the displays ⇒ Fig. 129 until
the desired temperature is selected for the driver side or front
passenger side.
The currently selected temperature setting is shown in the display above
the buttons.
By keeping the
AUTO
button on the driver side pressed for several seconds,
the temperature of the passenger side can be set to the temperature of the
driver side or vice versa. The display indicates the new temperature value.
The previous temperature setting can be restored by resetting the display
on the driver or passenger side as required.
159Air conditioning
Defrosting
The windscreen and side windows are defrosted or demisted
as quickly as possible.
– To enable this mode, press the
⇒ Fig. 129 button.
– To switch off, press the
button again, or select the
AUTO
but-
ton.
The temperature is regulated automatically. The air output is increased to
maximum and most of the air comes out of outlets 1 and 2 ⇒ page 162.
The air recirculation and ECON modes are switched off when the
button
is pressed.
Air recirculation: manual activation
The air recirculation setting prevents fumes etc. from enter-
ing the interior.
Activating air recirculation mode
– Press button
⇒ Fig. 129 ⇒ .
Deactivating air recirculation mode
– Press the
button again or
– Press the
AUTO
button or
– Press button
.
In this setting, the air in the vehicle is constantly recirculated. We recom-
mend using the air recirculation mode in the following circumstances:
● When driving through a tunnel or in traffic congestions, to prevent ex-
haust gas entering the interior of the vehicle.
WARNING
Do not drive for too long with the air recirculation mode enabled because,
if the compressor is disconnected, the windscreen may mist up because
no fresh air is entering the interior of the vehicle, with the subsequent
risk of accidents.
ECON Mode (economy)
ECON
ECON mode helps save fuel.
– To activate, press the
ECON
button ⇒ Fig. 129.
– To deactivate, press the
ECON
button again or select the
AUTO
button.
Air cooling is disconnected in ECON mode. The heating and the blower are
adjusted automatically. “ECON” stands for “Economy”. Disconnecting air
cooling (compressor) reduces fuel consumption.
Please note that the interior temperature must not be lower than the outside
temperature in ECON mode. The blower does not cool or dehumidify the air
in the interior. The windows could therefore mist up.
In diesel vehicles, the auxiliary heater is switched off in ECON mode to save
fuel.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
160 Air conditioning
Note
If the diode on the ECON button continues to light up when the ECON mode
has been switched off (i.e. the air conditioner has been switched on) this is
due to a defect in one of the air conditioner components. If a malfunction
should occur, please contact a specialised workshop.
Air recirculation: automatic activation*
If the outside air is polluted by diesel and petrol emissions,
an air quality sensor in the vehicle will automatically switch
on the air recirculation.
Fig. 130 Button for auto-
matic air recirculation
Activating air recirculation mode
– Press the button
⇒
Fig. 130.
Deactivating air recirculation mode
– Press the
button again or
– Press the
AUTO
button or
– Press button
.
The automatic air recirculation mode should normally be left switched on at
all times.
The system is ready to operate approx. 30 seconds after the engine ignition
key has been turned. During this initial period, fresh air is fed into the vehi-
cle.
If the air purity sensor in the air conditioner detects a certain concentration
of fumes in the outside air, the control unit will either pass the incoming air
through the pollution filter or automatically switch on the air recirculation. If
there is a high concentration of pollution in the outside air, the air condi-
tioner automatically switches to air recirculation and the supply of air from
the outside is cut off. As soon as the level of pollution decreases, air is fed
into the vehicle from the outside again.
The automatic air recirculation operates for a maximum period of 12 mi-
nutes. If the windows mist up when the automatic air recirculation is on,
press the
button immediately.
The automatic air recirculation switches itself off under certain circumstan-
ces (for instance if
or
is selected). In “ECON” and at temperatures
lower than approx. 8 °C below zero, the automatic air recirculation mode is
limited to 12 seconds.
161Air conditioning
Switching the temperature display from °C to °F and vice
versa
The outside temperature indicator can be switched from °C
(degrees Celsius) to °F (degrees Fahrenheit) and vice versa.
– Press and hold the
button for air recirculation mode and
briefly press the plus button of the left-hand temperature selec-
tor ⇒ Fig. 129.
Switching the air conditioner on/off
Switching the air conditioner off: models with an
OFF
button
– Press the
OFF
button. The air conditioner is switched off and
the supply of air from outside the vehicle is cut off.
Switching the air conditioner off: models with a
button
– Keep pressing the
-
button for the blower until the display seg-
ment is empty. The air conditioner is switched off and the sup-
ply of air from outside the vehicle is cut off.
Switching the air conditioner on: models with an
OFF
button
– Press the
OFF
button again, or
– Press the
AUTO
button or
– Press one of the air distribution buttons
,
or
.
Switching the air conditioner on: models with a
button
– Press the
+
button for the blower, or
– Press the
AUTO
button or
– Press one of the air distribution buttons
,
or
.
The air conditioner also starts to operate if one of the blower or temperature
selector buttons is pressed.
Blower speed
-
+
The automatically selected blower speed can be reduced or
increased manually.
– Press the
-
and
+
buttons in the centre of the control panel
⇒ Fig. 129 to set the blower to the desired speed (and regulate
the volume of air delivery).
The air conditioner system automatically regulates the blower speed accord-
ing to the interior temperature. However, you can also adjust the air delivery
manually. The current blower setting is illustrated by a bar in the middle dis-
play (above the buttons).
Automatic change of passenger temperature
In order to automatically set the passenger temperature like the driver tem-
perature, press the
AUTO
button on the driver side for 2 seconds approxi-
mately. In order to automatically set the driver temperature like the passen-
ger temperature, press the
AUTO
button on the passenger side for 2 sec-
onds approximately.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
162 Air conditioning
Air outlets
Fig. 131 Dash panel: Location of air outlets
The air outlets ⇒ Fig. 131
3
and
4
can be operated as follows:
Outlets
3
and
4
– The outlets can be opened and closed by turning the left
thumbwheels.
– The direction of air delivery from the outlets can be varied as re-
quired using the adjuster in the centre of each outlet grille. The
direction of air flow can be adjusted horizontally and vertically
as desired.
The flow of air from the outlets is controlled either automatically or manual-
ly, depending on the operating mode selected. All the outlets can provide
air that is either heated, unheated or cooled.
The heater outlets for the rear footwells are located under the front seats.
They are controlled together with outlets
5
.
Note
The cool air provided by the air conditioner is mainly issued from outlets
3
and
4
. To ensure adequate cooling, outlets
3
and
4
should therefore
never be closed completely.
Air distribution
The automatically-programmed air distribution can be al-
tered manually.
The buttons
,
and
can be operated either separately or in combi-
nation. To return to automatically controlled air distribution, switch off the
selected functions separately or press the
AUTO
button
Each of the three buttons has a specific function. The numbers relate to the
air outlets ⇒ Fig. 131.
163Air conditioning
Air directed to windows
This setting directs all the air to outlets 1 and 2. Unlike in setting
, the
volume of air delivery remains the same.
Air to the driver/front passenger
All the air comes from outlets 3 and 4 in the dash panel and from the rear of
the centre console.
Air to the footwells
Most of the air emerges from outlets 5 and the outlets under the front seats.
Some of the air will also be issued from outlets 3 and 4.
Note
In all of the above air distribution settings, a small amount of air will still
come from the other outlets.
Economical use of the air conditioner
Economical use of the air conditioner will help save fuel.
Engine power is reduced and fuel consumption increases when the
air conditioner is in cooling mode. To ensure that the system is on-
ly switched on when it is really necessary, please note the follow-
ing points:
– Select ECON mode if you wish to save fuel.
– Select ECON mode if you decide to open the windows or sun-
roof* while driving.
– If the vehicle has heated up after standing in the sun, open the
windows and doors for a short time to cool the vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
By saving fuel you also reduce the amount of pollutants emitted from your
vehicle.
Key settings
When the ignition is switched on, the air conditioner set-
tings assigned to the key are selected automatically.
The air conditioner settings selected are automatically stored and assigned
to the key in use. When the vehicle is started, the air conditioner automati-
cally selects the settings assigned to the key. Hence, every driver automati-
cally obtains his/her preferred settings without having to select them man-
ually.
Note
Should another driver use the key and enter other settings, the previous
settings will be deleted.
Solar-powered blower/sunroof*
If the vehicle is parked in sufficiently strong sunlight, the
blower will operate in solar-powered mode when the igni-
tion is switched off.
After the ignition is switched off, the blower is supplied with electrical pow-
er from the sunroof. Please ensure that outlets 3 and 4 are open
⇒
Fig. 131
to ensure the best possible ventilation.
The blower only works when the sunroof is closed or tilted open at the rear.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
164 Air conditioning
If the air recirculation mode is on when you switch off the engine, the air
conditioner will automatically switch to fresh air ventilation.
Auxiliary heater*
Diesel vehicles are fitted with an auxiliary heater
1)
to raise the temperature
of the interior as quickly as possible. At outdoor temperatures below +5 °C
and with the engine running, the supplementary heating will switch on and
off automatically depending on the temperature of the coolant.
In order to save fuel, the auxiliary heater can be can be switched off by brief-
ly pressing the
button on the air conditioner.
Seat heating*
The surface and backrest of the front seats can be electrical-
ly heated.
Fig. 132 Detailed view of
the dash panel: Thumb-
wheel controls for seat
heating
Turn thumbwheel
1
or
2
⇒ Fig. 132 to switch on and adjust the
heating on the left or right front seats.
The heating is switched off when the thumbwheel is set to 0. The tempera-
ture settings range from 1 to 6.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat heating, please do not
kneel on the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single point.
1)
For Nordic countries only.
165Driving
Driving
Steering
Adjusting the steering wheel position
The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely ad-
justed to suit the driver
Fig. 133 Lever beneath
steering column
– Push the lever ⇒ Fig. 133 down ⇒
.
– Move the steering wheel to the desired position.
– Then push the lever back up against the steering column until it
engages in position.
WARNING
● Never adjust the position of the steering wheel when the vehicle is
moving, as this could cause an accident.
● For safety reasons, the lever must always be securely engaged when
the vehicle is moving, so that the position of the steering wheel cannot
shift unexpectedly. Otherwise this could cause an accident.
Safety
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The ESC helps make driving safer in extreme driving condi-
tions.
Fig. 134 Detailed view of
the centre console: ESC
button
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
166 Driving
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) contains the electronic differential lock
(EDL) and the traction control system (ASR). The ESC works together with
the ABS. If a fault in the ABS occurs, both warning lamps light up, but if the
ESC fails, only the ESC warning lamp lights up.
The ESC system is started automatically when the engine is started.
The ESC system is always active and cannot be switched off. The ESC switch
only switches the ASR off.
The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin is desirable.
For example:
● When driving with snow chains.
● When driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces.
● When the vehicle is stuck, to rock it backwards and forwards.
Press the button to switch the ASR back on when you no longer need wheel
spin.
Situations in which the warning lamp lights
● On switching the ignition on, it lights up for about two seconds to carry
out a function control.
● The warning lamp will start flashing when the vehicle is moving if the
ESC or the ASR is activated.
● It will light up continuously if there is a fault in the ESC.
WARNING
● Do not forget that the Electronic stability control ESC cannot defy the
laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and
wet roads and when towing a trailer.
● Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and
the traffic situation. The greater safety provided by the ESC should not
encourage you to run any risks.
● Please refer to the corresponding warning notes on ESC in
⇒ page 188, Intelligent technology.
Ignition lock
Ignition key positions
The ignition key is used to start and stop the engine.
Fig. 135 Ignition key po-
sitions
167Driving
Position
1
The ignition key is inserted in this position. To engage the steering wheel
lock, take out the key and turn the wheel until you hear the pin engage. You
should always engage the steering lock when you leave the vehicle. This
will help to deter thefts ⇒
.
Switching on the ignition/pre-heating glow plugs
2
If the key is difficult to turn in the lock, move the steering wheel (to take the
load off the steering lock mechanism) until the key turns freely. In the case
of vehicles with a diesel engine, the key is turned to this position to preheat
the glow plugs.
Starting the engine
3
The engine is started in this position. Electrical components with a high
power consumption are switched off temporarily.
After the engine has started, the ignition key returns to position
2
by itself.
The ignition key has to be turned back to position
1
before re-starting the
engine. The starter inhibitor in the ignition lock prevents the starter motor
from engaging when the engine is running, as this could cause damage.
Switching off the ignition
1
Turn the ignition key to this position.
WARNING
● Never remove the ignition key until the vehicle is stationary! Other-
wise the steering lock could engage suddenly, which could cause an acci-
dent.
● Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you
only intend to be gone for a short time. This is particularly important if
there are children in the vehicle, as they might otherwise be able to start
the engine or use power-operated equipment (e.g. the electric windows),
which could cause injuries.
Note
● If the battery has been disconnected and then reconnected, it will be
necessary to leave the key in position
2
for about 5 seconds before start-
ing the engine.
● Vehicles with automatic gearbox: After switching off the ignition, you
can only remove the ignition key if the selector lever is in position “P” (park-
ing lock). The selector lever is locked after the ignition key has been re-
moved.
Starting and stopping the engine
Starting the engine
The engine can only be started with an original SEAT key.
Fig. 136 Ignition key po-
sitions
Vehicles with a petrol engine:
– Apply the foot brake.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
168 Driving
– Manual gearbox: Push the clutch pedal all the way down.
– Move the gear lever into neutral (automatic gearbox: selector
lever to P or N) ⇒
.
– Turn the ignition key to position
3
without pressing the accel-
erator.
– Release the ignition key as soon as the engine starts (the start-
er motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine).
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
– Apply the foot brake.
– Manual gearbox: Push the clutch pedal all the way down. Other-
wise, the engine will not start.
– Move the gear lever into neutral (automatic gearbox: selector
lever to P or N) ⇒
.
– Turn the ignition key to position
2
. The pre-heating indicator
light comes on while the glow plugs are preheating.
– When the indicator light goes out, turn the ignition key to
position
3
. Do not press the accelerator.
– Having completed the previous action the key can be released
immediately, it will return to position
2
and the engine will
have started.
When starting a very cold engine, it may be a little noisy for the first few sec-
onds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.
If the engine fails to start straight away, stop after 10 seconds and try again
after about half a minute.
Glow plug system*
To assist starting at low temperatures, diesel engines are equipped with a
glow plug preheating system. The preheating time depends on the coolant
temperature and the outside temperature. Start the engine as soon as the
glow plug indicator light goes out.
When the engine is warm or at outside temperatures above +8 °C the glow
plug indicator lamp will only light up for about one second. This means that
the engine can be started immediately.
If the engine will not start...
● ⇒ page 286
● ⇒ page 290
● ⇒ page 224, Refuelling
WARNING
Never run the engine in confined spaces, as the exhaust gases are poi-
sonous.
CAUTION
Avoid high engine speeds, full throttle and extreme load conditions until
the engine has reached its normal operating temperature, otherwise this
can damage the engine.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle station-
ary. Start immediately. This will help avoid unnecessary exhaust emissions.
Stopping the engine
– Turn the ignition key to position
1
⇒ Fig. 136.
169Driving
WARNING
● Never switch the engine off until the vehicle is stationary.
● The brake servo and the power steering system work only when the
engine is running. You need more strength to steer and brake the vehicle
when the engine is switched off. Given that you will be unable to steer
and brake as usual, this could lead to a risk of accidents and injuries.
CAUTION
If the engine has been running under high load for a long time, there is a
risk of heat building up in the engine compartment after the engine has
been switched off; this could cause engine damage. Therefore, you should
let the engine idle for approximately 2 minutes before you switch it off.
Note
After the engine is switched off the radiator fan may run on for up to 10 mi-
nutes, even if the ignition is switched off. It may also start running again af-
ter some time if the coolant temperature rises due to a build-up of heat un-
der the bonnet, or if the engine is already warm and the engine compart-
ment is heated up further by direct sunlight.
Start-Stop function*
Description and operation
The Start-Stop function stops the engine when the vehicle is stop-
ped and starts it automatically when required.
– When the vehicle is stopped, put it in neutral and release the
clutch pedal. The engine will stop.
– When the clutch pedal is pressed, the engine starts again.
– The instrument panel display shows information about the sta-
tus of the Start-Stop function ⇒ Fig. 138.
Start-Stop function conditions
● The driver seat belt must be buckled.
● The bonnet must be closed.
● The engine must be at operating temperature.
● The steering wheel must not be turned more than 270°.
● The vehicle must not be on a steep gradient.
● The vehicle must not be in reverse.
● A trailer must not be connected.
● The temperature of the passenger compartment must be within the con-
venience limits (
ECON
button should not be selected).
● The windscreen de-mist function must be off.
● Otherwise it requires more than 50% of the airflow that the fan can sup-
ply.
● The temperature must not be set to HI or LO.
● The driver door must be closed.
● The diesel particulate filter must not be in regeneration mode, for diesel
engines.
● The battery charge must not be low for the next start.
● The battery temperature must be between -1 °C and 60 °C.
Start-Stop function interruption
In the following situations, the Start-Stop function will be interrupted and
the engine will automatically start:
● The vehicle starts moving.
● The brake pedal is pressed several times in a row.
● The battery has been discharged excessively.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
170 Driving
● The Start-Stop System is manually deactivated.
● The windscreen de-mist function is turned on.
● The temperature of the passenger compartment exceeds the comfort
limits (button
ECON
should not be selected).
● If more than 50% of the airflow that the fan can supply is ordered.
● Temperature setting HI or LO is selected.
● The engine coolant temperature is insufficient.
● The alternator is faulty, for example the V-belt has ruptured.
● If any of the conditions described in the previous section are not fulfil-
led.
WARNING
Never allow the vehicle to move with the engine off for any reason. You
could lose control of your vehicle. This could cause an accident and seri-
ous injury.
● Power steering does not work when the engine is not running. That is
why it is much more difficult to turn the steering wheel.
● Turn off the Start-Stop system when driving through water (fording
streams, etc.).
Note
● For vehicles with the Start-Stop function and a manual gearbox, when
the engine is started, the clutch must be pressed.
● When the conditions for the Start-Stop function are not fulfilled, the in-
strument panel displays the Start-Stop indicator dimmed.
● If the steering wheel is turned more than 270°, Stop will not function;
however, the angle of steering wheel turn does not affect starting the vehi-
cle.
Activating and deactivating the Start-Stop function
Fig. 137 The Start-Stop
function button.
Every time the ignition is switched on, the Start-Stop function is au-
tomatically switched on.
Manually deactivating the Start-Stop function
– Press the ⇒ Fig. 137 button located on the centre console.
When the Start-Stop function is deactivated, the pushbutton in-
dicator lights.
– If the Start-Stop function is operating then the engine starts im-
mediately.
Switching the Start-Stop function on manually
– Press the ⇒ Fig. 137 button located on the centre console.
The indicator on the button will go out.
171Driving
Driver messages
Fig. 138 Display on the
instrument panel during
Start-Stop function oper-
ation.
Fig. 139 Display on the
instrument panel during
Start-Stop function oper-
ation.
When the engine is turned off by the Start-Stop function, this is displayed
on the instrument panel.
At each stop, the central Start-Stop symbol lights up for about 5 seconds.
After this time, it turns off and the symbol on the upper right part of the dis-
play remains lit ⇒ Fig. 139.
Note
● There are different versions of the dash panel; the display of indications
on the screen may differ.
● Some indications/symbols of the Start_stop system that appear in the
upper part of the display may not be visible in the case of high priority indi-
cations (faults, fuel reserve indicator, windscreen washer liquid level, etc.).
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
172 Driving
Warnings
Fig. 140 Driver warnings
Fig. 141 Driver warnings
Start the engine manually. Start-Stop system activated
Start-Stop is not possible.
A
B
Fault or warning with priority over the Start-Stop warnings that appear
in the upper part of the display. Some Start-Stop warning in this zone
may not be displayed.
Press clutch pedal to start engine warning.
On-screen message and audible warning of the Start-Stop system in
the event that a door is opened and seat belt is unfastened in a stop
phase.
Handbrake
Handbrake
The handbrake should be applied firmly to prevent the vehi-
cle from accidentally rolling away.
Fig. 142 Detailed view of
the centre console: Hand-
brake on
Applying the handbrake
– Pull the handbrake lever up all the way.
C
D
E
173Driving
Releasing the handbrake
– Pull the lever up slightly and at the same time press in the re-
lease button ⇒ Fig. 142 (arrow).
– Keep the release button pressed and push the lever all the way
down ⇒
.
If you drive by mistake with the handbrake still applied, you will hear a
warning buzzer and the display will show the message:
Handbrake on
The handbrake warning switches on after driving for 3 seconds at speeds
above 5 km/h.
The handbrake warning lamp lights up when the handbrake is applied
with the ignition on.
WARNING
Please note that the handbrake should be released all the way. If the
handbrake is only partially released, this will cause the rear brakes to
overheat, which can impair the function of the brake system and could
lead to an accident.
CAUTION
Once the vehicle has come to a standstill, always apply the handbrake firm-
ly and then, on a manual gearbox, engage a gear, or select P on an auto-
matic.
Parking
The following points will ensure there is no risk of the vehi-
cle rolling away accidentally after it is parked:
– Use the foot brake to stop the vehicle.
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Switch the ignition off.
– On a manual gearbox engage 1st gear or on an automatic move
the selector lever to P ⇒
.
When parking on slopes:
Turn the steering wheel so that the, if the vehicle moves, it will do so to-
wards the curb.
WARNING
● Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the vehicle when it is
locked. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially
putting lives at risk.
● Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could release
e.g. the handbrake or gear lever, moving the vehicle and causing an acci-
dent.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
174 Driving
Parking aid acoustic system
General notes
Various parking aid systems are available to help you when parking or ma-
noeuvring in tight spaces, depending on the equipment fitted on your vehi-
cle.
The SEAT Parking System gives an acoustic warning if there are any obsta-
cles behind your vehicle ⇒ page 174.
When you are parking, SEAT Parking System Plus warns you acoustically
and optically about obstacles in front of and behind the vehicle
⇒ page 175.
Note
To ensure the acoustic parking aid works properly, the sensors must be kept
clean and free of snow and ice.
SEAT Parking System*
SEAT Parking System is an acoustic parking aid.
Sensors are located in the rear bumper. When the sensors detect an obsta-
cle, you are alerted by audible warnings. The measuring range of the sen-
sors starts at approximately:
Rear
Side 0.60 m
Centre 1.60 m
The audible warnings sound with increasing frequency as you approach the
obstacle. When the vehicle is less than 0.30 m away from the obstacle, the
warning tone will sound continuously. Do not drive on!
The volume of the warning beeps will be gradually reduced after about 4
seconds if the vehicle remains at a constant distance from a detected obsta-
cle (it does not affect the permanent acoustic signal).
The parking aid is switched on automatically when reverse gear is engaged.
You will hear a brief confirmation tone.
WARNING
● The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver
is personally responsible for safe parking and other manoeuvres.
● The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles are not registered.
Always look out for small children and animals because the system will
not always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid ac-
cidents.
● Always keep a close eye on the area around the vehicle and make full
use of the rear vision mirrors.
CAUTION
Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be
registered by the sensors as the vehicle moves closer, so the system will not
give any further warning. Certain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences,
chains, thin painted posts or trailer draw bars, etc) may not always be de-
tected by the system, so take care not to damage the vehicle in such cases.
Note
● Please refer to the notes on towing ⇒ page 176.
175Driving
SEAT Parking System Plus*
SEAT Parking System Plus is an acoustic parking aid.
Sensors are located in the front and rear bumpers. When the sensors detect
an obstacle, you are alerted by audible warnings. The measuring range of
the sensors starts at approximately:
Front
Side 0.90 m
Centre 1.20 m
Rear
Side 0.60 m
Centre 1.60 m
The audible warnings sound with increasing frequency as you approach the
obstacle. When the vehicle is less than 0.30 m from the obstacle the warn-
ing tone will sound continuously. Stop moving immediately!
The volume of the warning beeps will be gradually reduced after about 4
seconds if the vehicle remains at a constant distance from a detected obsta-
cle (it does not affect the permanent acoustic signal).
Activating/Deactivating
Fig. 143 Centre console:
switch for parking aid
Activate
– Engage reverse gear or
– Press the button on the centre console ⇒ Fig. 143 or on the
gear selector gate. You will hear a brief confirmation tone and
the LED on the switch will light up.
Deactivating
– Drive forward faster than 10 km/h (6 mph), or
– Press the button or
– Switch off the ignition or
– Disengage the reverse gear.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
176 Driving
WARNING
● The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver
is personally responsible for safe parking and other manoeuvres.
● The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles are not registered.
Always look out for small children and animals because the system will
not always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid ac-
cidents.
● Always keep a close eye on the area around the vehicle and make full
use of the rear vision mirrors.
CAUTION
Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be
registered by the sensors as the vehicle moves closer, so the system will not
give any further warning. Certain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences,
chains, thin painted posts or trailer draw bars, etc) may not always be de-
tected by the system, so take care not to damage the vehicle in such cases.
Note
● Please refer to the notes on towing ⇒ page 176.
● There is a slight delay in the picture display.
Towing bracket*
In towing mode, the rear parking aid sensors are not enabled when you se-
lect reverse gear or press the switch . This function may not be guaran-
teed on towing brackets that are not factory fitted. This results in the follow-
ing restrictions:
SEAT Parking System*
There is no distance warning.
SEAT Parking System Plus*
There is no rear distance warning. The system will still give a warning when
obstacles are detected while driving forward.
Fault messages*
If you hear a long beep for a few seconds and the LED on the button*
starts flashing when you switch on the parking aid, a system fault has oc-
curred. Please have the fault corrected by a Technical Service or specialised
workshop.
Note
If the fault is not corrected before you switch off the ignition, it will only be
indicated by the flashing LED on the switch * the next time you switch on
the parking aid.
Cruise speed* (Cruise control system)
Introduction
The cruise control system allows you to maintain a constant
speed.
Using this system, any speed over 30 km/h can be kept constant, as long as
the engine power allows it. This is subject to power output and braking abil-
ity of the engine. This helps to reduce fatigue, especially on long journeys.
The control lamp on the instrument panel lights up when the cruise con-
trol system is operating.
177Driving
WARNING
For safety reasons, the cruise control system should not be used in dense
traffic or poor road conditions (with ice, slippery surfaces, loose grit or
gravel), as this could cause an accident.
CAUTION
In vehicles with a manual gearbox: do not go into neutral if the device is en-
abled without previously releasing the clutch, as the engine will increase its
revs and, under certain conditions, could break down.
Note
The cruise control cannot maintain a constant speed when travelling down
steep hills. The vehicle tends to accelerate under its own weight. Change
down to a lower gear or use the foot brake to slow the vehicle.
Setting the speed
The desired cruising speed has to be stored in the memory.
Fig. 144 Controls for the
cruise control system
– Drive at the desired speed.
– Pull the lever
A
to position ⇒ Fig. 144
1
to activate the sys-
tem.
– Briefly press button
B
.
When button
B
is released, the current speed is stored in the memory and
the vehicle will then maintain this speed.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
178 Driving
Adjusting the stored speed
The desired cruising speed can be adjusted up or down as
required.
Acceleration
– Move the lever
A
up towards ⇒ Fig. 144
+
.
– Release the lever to store the current cruising speed.
Deceleration
– Move the lever
A
down towards ⇒ Fig. 144
-
.
– Release the lever to store the current cruising speed.
Pressing lever
A
briefly
– You can increase the set speed in steps of 2 km/h by briefly
pressing the lever
A
up towards ⇒ Fig. 144
+
.
– You can decrease the set speed in steps of 2 km/h by briefly
pressing the lever
A
down towards ⇒ Fig. 144
-
.
You can also use the accelerator pedal momentarily to increase speed. The
previously programmed speed will be automatically resumed when the ac-
celerator pedal is released.
However, if the vehicle exceeds the programmed speed by more than
10 km/h for more than 5 minutes, the programmed speed will be deleted.
You will then need to enter the speed again.
Deactivating the cruise control temporarily
Fig. 145 Controls for the
cruise control system
– Press the brake pedal or
– The clutch or
– Press the lever
A
⇒ Fig. 145 to position
a
(click stop not en-
gaged).
– Any intervention of the ASR or the ESC will switch off the cruise
control.
The speed stored at this point remains in the memory if the system is only
temporarily deactivated.
To resume the programmed cruising speed, release the clutch or brake ped-
al and pull the lever
A
to position
b
.
If no speed was stored when the system was temporarily disabled, a new
speed can be set as follows: drive at the desired cruising speed and briefly
press button
⇒
Fig. 144
B
(SET).
179Driving
WARNING
Retrieve the programmed speed only if this is not excessive for the cur-
rent traffic conditions. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Deactivating the cruise control
While driving
– Move lever
A
⇒ Fig. 144 to position
2
(click stop engaged).
While the vehicle is stationary
– Switch the ignition off.
Manual gearbox
Driving with a manual gearbox
Fig. 146 Detailed view of
the centre console: gear
shift pattern of a 6-speed
manual gearbox
Engaging the reverse gear
– The vehicle should be stationary with the engine idling. Press
the clutch down thoroughly.
– Place the gearbox lever into neutral and push the lever down-
wards.
– Slide the gearbox lever to the left, and then into the reverse po-
sition shown on the lever.
The reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary. When
the engine is running and before engaging this gear, wait about 6 seconds
with the clutch pressed down thoroughly in order to protect the gearbox.
The reverse lights switch on when the reverse gear is selected and the igni-
tion is on.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
180 Driving
WARNING
● When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as
a gear is engaged and the clutch released.
● Never select the reverse gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of
accident.
Note
● Do not rest your hand on the gear lever while driving. The pressure of
your hand could cause premature wear on the selector forks in the gearbox.
● When changing gear, you should always depress the clutch fully to
avoid unnecessary wear and damage.
● Do not hold the vehicle “on the clutch” on hills. This causes premature
wear and damage to the clutch.
● Do not leave your foot on the clutch pedal; although the pressure may
seem insignificant, it can cause the premature wear of the clutch plate. Use
the foot rest when you do not need to change gear.
Automatic gearbox*
Introduction
multitronic
®
, tiptronic (7-speed gearbox)
Vehicles with multitronic
®
gearbox
The vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled continuously varia-
ble transmission (multitronic
®
). Unlike conventional automatics, the gear
ratios are not shifted in fixed steps but continuously variable. This gives
smoother transmission and makes for better fuel economy.
The gearbox selects the gear ratio and shifts up or down automatically ac-
cording to the gear change programmes stored in the control unit
⇒ page 184.
If desired, you can also select the gears manually (tiptronic mode)
⇒ page 185.
Please note that in vehicles with a multitronic® gearbox, torque is transmit-
ted via a multi-plate clutch, and not via a torque converter as on convention-
al automatics. This means that the vehicle will not “creep” as much as con-
ventional automatics when the engine is idling if you stop temporarily with
the selector lever in position D, S or R.
Vehicles with tiptronic gearbox
The vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled 7-speed automatic
gearbox. The gearbox changes up and down automatically.
If desired, you can also select the gears manually (tiptronic mode)
⇒ page 185.
181Driving
Driving instructions
The gears are changed automatically.
Fig. 147 Detailed view of
the centre console: Se-
lector lever with lock but-
ton
Starting the vehicle
– Press and hold the brake pedal.
– Press and hold the interlock button (the button on the selector
lever handle), move the selector lever to the required position,
for instance D, and release the interlock button.
– Wait for the gearbox to engage the gear (a slight movement can
be felt).
– Release the brake and press the accelerator ⇒
.
Stopping briefly
– Apply the foot brake to hold the vehicle when stationary (for in-
stance at traffic lights).
– To prevent the vehicle from rolling away, apply the parking
brake before moving off on steep gradients ⇒
.
Parking
– Press and hold the brake pedal ⇒
.
– Apply the parking brake.
– Press and hold the interlock button, move the selector lever to P
and release the interlock button.
The engine can only be started when the selector lever is at P or N.
On level ground it is sufficient to move the selector lever to position P. On
slopes, first engage the parking brake and then put the selection lever into
the P position. This avoids overloading the locking mechanism and it will be
easier to move the selector lever from position P.
Vehicles with multitronic® gearbox: Your vehicle is equipped with the hill
hold assist function which makes it easier to start off on a slope. The sys-
tem is activated when you press and hold the brake pedal for a few sec-
onds. When you release the brake pedal the braking force will be main-
tained for a short moment in order to prevent the vehicle rolling back when
you drive away.
WARNING
● While you are selecting a gear and the vehicle is stopped with the en-
gine running, do not accelerate. Failure to do so could result in an acci-
dent.
● Please note that some power will still be transmitted when you stop
temporarily with the selector lever in position D, S or R. Therefore, when
stopping you will need to press the brake with the force required to hold
the vehicle still. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
● Never move the selector lever to R or P when driving, as this could
cause an accident.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
182 Driving
Selector lever positions
This section covers all the selector lever positions.
Fig. 148 Display: Selec-
tor lever positions
The current selector lever position is shown on the instrument panel dis-
play.
P - parking lock
This locks the driving wheels mechanically. The parking brake should only
be used when the vehicle is already stopped
⇒
.
The interlock button (the button on the selector lever handle) must be
pressed in and the brake pedal must be depressed before moving the selec-
tor lever either in or out of position P. This is only possible when the ignition
is on.
R - Reverse gear
When reverse gear is engaged the gearbox automatically selects the lowest
gear ratio.
The reverse gear may be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary and
the engine is idling
⇒
.
To move the selector lever to position R, press in the interlock button and at
the same time press the brake pedal. Depending on the model, one or two
reverse lights will come on in selector lever position R (when ignition is
switched on).
N - Neutral (idling)
In this position the gearbox is in neutral ⇒
.
D - Drive (forward)
In this position, the gearbox selects the optimal transmission ratio depend-
ing on the engine load, speed and the dynamic gear regulation programme
(DRP).
Press the brake pedal when moving the selector lever from N to D if the ve-
hicle is stationary or at speeds below 5 km/h ⇒
.
Under certain circumstances (e.g. when driving in mountains or towing a
trailer or caravan) it can be advantageous to switch temporarily to tiptronic
mode ⇒ page 185, so that the gear ratios can be selected manually to suit
the driving conditions.
S - Sport position
To drive in sports mode, select the position S. The engine power reserve is
used to its maximum. When accelerating the gear shifts will be noticeable.
Press the brake pedal when moving the selector lever from N to S if the vehi-
cle is stationary or at speeds below 5 km/h ⇒
.
WARNING
● Never move the selector lever to R or P when driving. Failure to do so
could result in an accident.
● In selector position D or S the vehicle must always be held with the
foot brake when the engine is running. This is because an automatic
gearbox still transmits power even at idling speed, and the vehicle tends
183Driving
WARNING (Continued)
to “creep”. The throttle must on no account be opened inadvertently (for
instance by hand from the engine compartment) when a gear is engaged
with the vehicle stationary. The vehicle could otherwise start moving im-
mediately (in some cases even if the parking brake is engaged) and pos-
sibly cause an accident.
● To avoid accidents, apply the parking brake and put the selector lever
in position P before opening the bonnet and working on the vehicle with
the engine running. Please always observe the important safety warn-
ings ⇒ page 227, Work in the engine compartment.
Note
● Applies to vehicles with tiptronic gearbox:
● If the lever is moved accidentally to N when driving, release the accelera-
tor and let the engine speed drop to idling before selecting D or S again.
● For the sake of fuel economy (and the environment), the gearbox ratios
on some models are designed so that maximum speed is only obtained
when the gear lever is in position S.
Selector lever lock
The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged
inadvertently, so that the vehicle is not set in motion unin-
tentionally.
Fig. 149 Selector lever
lock
The selector lever lock is released as follows:
– Switch the ignition on.
– Press the brake pedal and at the same time press in the inter-
lock button.
Automatic selector lever lock
With the ignition turned on, the selector lever is locked in the positions P
and N. To remove it from these positions, press on the brake. The following
message appears in the instrument panel as a reminder for the driver when
the selector lever is in position P or N:
WHEN STATIONARY APPLY FOOTBRAKE WHILE SELECTING GEAR
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
184 Driving
The selector lever lock only works if the vehicle is stationary or driving at
speeds up to 5 km/h (3 mph). At higher speeds the selector lever lock in
the N position is disengaged automatically.
The selector lever lock is not engaged if the selector lever is moved quickly
through position N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This makes it possible,
for instance, to “rock” the vehicle backwards and forwards if it is stuck in
snow or mud. The selector lever lock engages automatically if the brake
pedal is not depressed and the lever is in position N for more than about a
second.
Interlock button
The interlock button on the selector lever handle prevents the driver from
inadvertently engaging certain gears. Press the button in to disengage the
selector lever lock. The selector lever positions in which the interlock button
has to be pressed are shown in the illustration, highlighted in colour
⇒ Fig. 149.
Safety interlock for ignition key
Once the ignition has been turned off, the key may be removed only if the
gear selector is in position P. While the key is not in the ignition, the selec-
tor lever is locked in position P.
Kick-down feature
This feature allows maximum acceleration.
Vehicles with multitronic
®
gearbox
When the accelerator pedal is pressed right down past the point of resist-
ance at full throttle, the gearbox will select a lower gear ratio, depending on
road speed and engine speed. While you keep the accelerator depressed
the engine speed is automatically controlled to give your vehicle maximum
acceleration.
Vehicles with tiptronic gearbox
When the accelerator pedal is pressed right down past the point of resist-
ance at full throttle, the gearbox will shift down to a lower gear, depending
on road speed and engine speed. The upshift to the next higher gear is de-
layed until the engine reaches maximum rpm.
WARNING
Please note that if the road surface is slippery or wet, the kick-down fea-
ture could cause the driving wheels to spin, which could result in skid-
ding.
Dynamic gear control programme (DCP)
The automatic gearbox is controlled electronically.
The vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled gearbox. The gear
ratios are selected automatically according to preset gearshift programmes.
When you drive at moderate speeds the gearbox will select the most eco-
nomical shift programme. It will then change up early and delay the down-
shifts to give better fuel economy.
If you drive at higher speeds with heavy acceleration, if you open the throt-
tle quickly, or if you use the kick-down or the vehicle's maximum speed, the
gearbox will automatically select the sport programme.
The gearbox is self-adapting, and continuously selects the most suitable
shift programme. At the same time, the driver can also make the gearbox
switch to the sport programme by pressing the accelerator quickly. This
makes the gearbox shift down into a lower gear ratio, allowing a more rapid
acceleration (for instance to pass another vehicle), without having to press
the accelerator all the way down into the kick-down position. After the gear-
box has shifted back up it returns to the original programme, depending on
your style of driving.
185Driving
Vehicles with multitronic® gearbox: the gearbox continuously adapts the
gear ratios to gradients. If the brake pedal is pressed on a downhill gradient
the gearbox automatically shifts to a lower gear ratio. This increases the en-
gine braking effect.
Vehicles with tiptronic gearbox: in mountainous areas, the gearbox adapts
the gears for uphill and downhill gradients. This helps to avoid constant
gear changes on uphill gradients.
Manual gear selection (tiptronic mode)
With the manual shift programme (tiptronic) the driver can
manually select pre-programmed gears.
Fig. 150 Centre console:
Manual gear selection
(tiptronic mode)
Fig. 151 Display: Man-
ual gear selection (tip-
tronic mode)
Switching over to the manual programme
– Move the selector lever from the position D to the right-hand
side. As soon as the selector lever has entered the tiptronic rail,
the gear engaged is displayed on the screen.
Shifting up a gear
– Briefly push the selector lever forwards (in the tiptronic gate)
⇒ Fig. 150
+
.
Shifting down a gear
– Briefly pull the selector lever backwards (in the tiptronic gate)
-
.
With the tiptronic system, the driver can manually choose between eight (in
vehicles with multitronic) or seven (in vehicles with tiptronic) different gear
programmes. The manual programme can be selected either with the vehi-
cle stationary or on the move.
When accelerating, the gearbox automatically shifts up into the next gear
shortly before the maximum engine speed is reached.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
186 Driving
If you select a gear which is lower than the gear shown on the instrument
panel display ⇒ Fig. 151, the gearbox will only shift down when there is no
longer a risk of over-revving the engine.
When the vehicle slows down (for instance when braking), the gearbox au-
tomatically shifts down into the next gear when the minimum engine speed
is reached.
Changing down to a lower gear increases the engine braking effect on
downhill gradients.
When the accelerator pedal is pressed right down past the point of resist-
ance at full throttle, the gearbox will select a lower gear ratio, depending on
road speed and engine speed.
Back-up programme
A backup programme is in place if a fault should occur in the
control system.
The automatic gearbox switches to the back-up programme if a fault should
occur in the control system. This is indicated by a gear pinion symbol which
lights up on the instrument panel display.
It is still possible to move the selector lever to all positions. The manual
shift programme (tiptronic) is not available when the back-up programme is
active.
Vehicles with tiptronic gearbox: When the selector lever is in position D or S
or in the manual shift programme, the gearbox will remain in 3rd gear if 1st,
2nd or 3rd gears were engaged when the fault occurred. The gearbox will
remain in 5th gear if 4th, 5th or 6th gears were engaged. The gearbox will
then engage 3rd gear when you drive away from a standstill or after the en-
gine is restarted.
It will still be possible to use reverse gear in the normal way. However, the
electronic lock for reverse gear will be switched off.
CAUTION
Should the gearbox ever switch into the back-up programme, you should
take the vehicle to a technical service or specialised workshop as soon as
possible.
Steering wheel with paddle levers
The paddle levers on the steering wheel enable the driver to
manually select pre-programmed ratios or gears.
Fig. 152 Steering wheel:
tiptronic controls
– Briefly pull the left-hand paddle lever
–
to change down to a
lower gear.
– Briefly pull the right-hand paddle lever
+
to change up to a
higher gear.
187Driving
The paddle levers are activated when the selector lever is in position D or S,
or the position for the manual shift programme (tiptronic).
The manual shift programme can, of course, still be operated using the gear
lever in the centre console.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
188 Intelligent technology
Practical Tips
Intelligent technology
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
General Observations
The Electronic Stability Control increases the vehicle's stabil-
ity on the road.
Fig. 153 Centre console
with ESC switch
The ESC is designed to increase the degree of control in situations where
the vehicle approaches the limits of adhesion, especially when accelerating
and cornering. It reduces the risk of skidding and improves stability in all
road conditions. The system is active across the entire speed range.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS), the electronic differential lock (EDL) and
the traction control system (ASR) are all integrated into the Electronic Stabil-
ity Control.
How it works
The ESC control unit processes data from the three integrated systems. It al-
so processes additional inputs provided by other high-precision sensors.
These register the vehicle's rotation about the vertical axis (yaw rate), later-
al acceleration, brake pressure and steering wheel angle.
The system uses the steering wheel angle and road speed to calculate the
changes of direction desired by the driver, and constantly compares them
with the actual behaviour of the vehicle. If the desired course is not being
maintained (for instance, if the vehicle is starting to skid), then the ESC
compensates automatically by braking the appropriate wheel.
The forces acting on the braked wheel bring the vehicle back to a stable
condition. If the vehicle over swerves (tendency of the rear to leave the
road), the brakes will act on the front wheel facing the outside of the bend.
If the vehicle under swerves (tendency to leave the bend), the braking force
is applied to the rear wheel facing the inside of the bend.
The ESC works in conjunction with the ABS ⇒ page 189. If a malfunction
should occur in the ABS, the ESC will also stop working.
Deactivating
The ESC is activated automatically when the engine is started and performs
a self-test routine.
The ESC cannot be deactivated.
189Intelligent technology
WARNING
The ESC is not able to overcome the physical limits of adhesion. Even
with ESC, you should always adjust your speed to suit the road and traffic
conditions. Please bear this in mind, especially on wet or slippery road
surfaces. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any
risks when driving. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
ABS prevents the wheels from locking up under braking.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the vehicle's active
safety system. However, the ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter
stopping distances in all conditions. For instance, on loose gravel or fresh
snow on top of an icy surface (conditions which anyway require extreme
care and reduced speed), the stopping distance with ABS may even be
slightly longer.
How the ABS works
The system runs an automatic self-check when the vehicle reaches a road
speed of about 6 km/h. This may be accompanied by a noise from the ABS
pump.
When one of the wheels is turning very slowly in relation to the road speed
and is close to locking up, the system will reduce the brake pressure on that
wheel. The driver is made aware of this adjustment process by a vibration of
the brake pedal and an audible noise. This is a deliberate warning to the
driver that one or more of the wheels is tending to lock up and the ABS con-
trol function has intervened. In this situation it is important to keep the
brake pedal fully depressed so the ABS can regulate the brake application,
but do not “pump” the brake pedal.
WARNING
The grip provided by ABS is still subject to the physical limits of adhe-
sion. Always bear this in mind, especially on wet or slippery roads. If you
notice that the ABS is working (to counteract locked wheels under brak-
ing), you should reduce speed immediately to suit the road and traffic
conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any
risks when driving. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Note
If a malfunction should occur in the ABS, this is indicated by a warning lamp
⇒ page 68.
Brake assist system
The brake assist system helps the driver to achieve optimum
braking effect.
The brake assist system helps to increase braking power and thus to ach-
ieve a shorter stopping distance. If the driver presses the brake pedal very
quickly, the brake assist system automatically boosts the braking force to
the maximum level, up to the point where the anti-lock brake function (ABS)
intervenes to stop the wheels from locking. You should then keep the brake
pedal pressed until the vehicle has braked to the required speed. The brake
assist system switches itself off as soon as you release the brake pedal.
The brake assist system will not be operative if there is a malfunction in the
ABS or the ESC.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
190 Intelligent technology
WARNING
Please remember that the accident risk always increases if you drive too
fast, especially in corners or on a slippery road, or if you follow too close
behind the vehicle in front of you. An increased accident risk cannot be
compensated even by the brake assist system. Risk of accident.
Electronic differential lock (EDL)
The electronic differential lock prevents the loss of traction
caused if one wheel starts spinning.
General notes
The electronic differential lock (EDL) helps the vehicle to start moving, ac-
celerate and climb a gradient in slippery conditions where this may other-
wise be difficult or even impossible.
How it works
The EDL works automatically, without the driver's involvement. With the aid
of the ABS sensors, the system monitors the rotational speed of the drive
wheels ⇒ page 189. If a considerable difference in revs is detected (approx.
100 rpm) in the speed of the drive wheels, e.g. when only one part of the
surface supporting the wheels is slippery, the system applies the brake to
slow down the skidding wheel so that more of the power is directed to the
other wheels. The systems works up to a speed of approx. 80 km/h. The
system will make noise while it is working.
Starting the vehicle
If one wheel has less grip and starts spinning (for instance, if one of the
drive wheels is on ice), keep pressing the accelerator gradually until the ve-
hicle starts moving.
Overheating of the brakes
To prevent the brake disk of the braked wheel from overheating, the EDL
cuts out automatically if subjected to excessive loads. In this case, the vehi-
cle will continue to run and will have the same running properties as those
of another without EDL.
The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled
down.
WARNING
● When accelerating on a uniformly slippery surface (for instance all
four wheels on ice or snow), press the accelerator gradually and careful-
ly. Despite EDL, the drive wheels may otherwise start to spin. This could
impair the vehicle's stability. Risk of accident.
● Even with EDL, you should always adjust your speed to suit the road
and traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into
taking any risks when driving. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Note
If the ABS warning lamp lights up, this can also mean there is a fault in the
EDL. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible.
Traction control system (ASR)
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from
spinning when the vehicle is accelerating.
General notes
The traction control system (ASR) is one of the functions incorporated in the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
191Intelligent technology
The traction control system (ASR) helps the car to start moving, accelerate
and climb a gradient in slippery conditions where this may otherwise be dif-
ficult or even impossible.
How it works
The ASR works automatically, i.e. without the driver's involvement. With the
aid of the ABS sensors , the ASR monitors the speed of the driven wheels
⇒ page 189. If the wheels start to spin, the engine speed is reduced auto-
matically to match the amount of grip available. The system is active across
the entire speed range.
The ASR works in conjunction with the ABS. If a failure occurs in the ABS,
the ASR will also stop working.
In general, the ASR should be left switched on at all times. It should only be
switched off manually in particular circumstances where a certain amount of
wheel slip may be desirable. Examples:
● when driving with snow chains
● when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces
● when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it.
The ASR should be switched on again afterwards as soon as possible.
Note
To ensure that the ASR works properly, all four wheels must be fitted with
identical tyres. The difference in size of the wheels may lead to an unde-
sired reduction in engine power. Also see ⇒ page 248.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
192 Intelligent technology
Brakes
General notes
New brake pads
New brake pads do not provide optimal performance during the first 200 km
(250 miles); first they must be “run in”. However, the reduced braking ca-
pacity may be compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder.
Avoid overloading the brakes during run-in.
Wear
The rate of wear on the brake pads depends a great deal on how you drive
and the conditions in which the vehicle is operated. Negative factors are, for
instance, city traffic, frequent short trips or hard driving with abrupt starts
and stops.
Wet roads or road salt
In certain conditions, such as in heavy rain, or after washing the vehicle or
driving through water, the full braking effect can be delayed by moisture (or
in winter by ice) on the discs and brake pads. In this case the brakes should
be dried by pressing the brake pedal several times.
The effectiveness of the brakes can also be temporarily reduced if the vehi-
cle is driven for some distance without using the brakes when there is a lot
of salt on the road in winter. In this case, the layer of salt on the brake discs
and pads has to wear off before braking.
Corrosion
There may be a tendency for corrosion to form on the discs and dirt to build
up on the brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently or the brakes are
not used very often.
If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rust has formed on the disks, it is
advisable to clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly a few times at a
moderately high speed ⇒
.
Faults in the brake system
If the brake pedal travel should ever increase suddenly, this may mean that
one of the two brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to the nearest
specialised workshop and have the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re-
member that you will have to apply more pressure on the brake pedal and
allow for longer stopping distances.
Low brake fluid level
Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if the brake fluid level is too
low. The brake fluid level is monitored electronically.
WARNING
Apply the brakes heavily to clean the brake system only in a suitable traf-
fic situation. Be sure not to inconvenience or endanger other road users.
Risk of accident.
CAUTION
● Never let the brakes “drag” by leaving your foot on the pedal when it is
not necessary to brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in longer stop-
ping distances and greater wear.
● Before driving down a long, steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce
speed and change to a lower gear (or move the gear lever to a lower gear
position if your vehicle has an automatic gearbox). This makes use of en-
gine braking and prolongs the useful life of the brakes. If you still have to
use the brakes, it is better to brake firmly at intervals than to apply the
brakes continuously.
Note
If you wish to equip the vehicle with accessories such as a front spoiler or
wheel covers, it is important that the flow of air to the front wheels is not
obstructed, otherwise the brakes can overheat.
193Intelligent technology
Brake servo
The brake servo assists the driver when braking
The brake servo increases the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. The
brake servo works only when the engine is running.
WARNING
Ensure the vehicle does not move while in neutral, when the engine is
stopped. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Note
If the brake servo is not working, e.g. because the vehicle has to be towed
or because it is broken, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably
harder to make up for the lack of servo assistance.
Power steering
Power steering makes it easier to turn the steering wheel
when the engine is running.
Power steering assists the driver by reducing the force needed to turn the
steering wheel.
Power steering does not work if the engine is off. In this case the steering
wheel requires much more force to turn.
If the steering is held at its turning limit when the vehicle is stationary, this
will place an excessive load on the power steering system. Turning the
steering wheel to its limit places a load on the system, which causes noise.
It will also reduce the idling speed of the engine.
CAUTION
When the engine is running, do not turn the steering wheel to its limit for
more than 15 seconds. Otherwise, there is a risk of damaging the power
steering.
Note
● If the power steering should fail at any time or the engine is switched off
(for instance when being towed), the vehicle can still be steered. However,
more effort will be required to turn the steering wheel.
● If the system is leaking or malfunctioning, please take the vehicle to a
specialised workshop as soon as possible.
● The power steering system requires a special hydraulic fluid. The fluid
reservoir is located at the front of the engine compartment on the left
⇒ page 297. The correct fluid level in the reservoir is important for the pow-
er steering to function properly. The hydraulic fluid level is checked at the
Inspection Service.
Servotronic*
The servotronic system electronically adjusts the power as-
sisted steering.
In vehicles equipped with servotronic power steering the degree of power
assistance
⇒
page 193 is adjusted electronically according to road speed.
If a fault should occur in the servotronic system, the power steering will still
operate. The degree of power assistance will, however, no longer adapt to
different speeds. If the electronic regulating system is not working properly,
this is most noticeable when turning the steering wheel at low speeds (for
instance when parking), as more effort will be required than usual. The fault
should be corrected by a specialised workshop as soon as possible.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
194 Driving and the environment
Driving and the environment
Running-in
Running in a new engine
The engine needs to be run in over the first 1,500 km
(1000 miles).
Up to 1000 kilometres (600 miles)
– Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3 the maximum speed.
– Do not accelerate hard.
– Avoid high engine revolutions.
– Do not tow a trailer.
From 1000 to 1500 kilometres (600 to 900 miles)
– Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed
or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).
During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is
greater than later on, when all the moving parts have bedded in.
For the sake of the environment
If the engine is run in gently, its life will be increased and its oil consump-
tion reduced.
Braking capacity and braking distance
The braking capacity and braking distance are influenced by
driving situations and road conditions.
The efficiency of the brakes depends directly on the brake pad wear. The
rate of wear of the brake pads depends to a great extent on the conditions
under which the vehicle is operated and the way the vehicle is driven. If you
often drive in town traffic, drive short distances or have a sporty driving
style, we recommend that you have the thickness of your brake pads
checked by a Technical Service more frequently than recommended in the
Service Plan.
If you drive with wet brakes, for example, after crossing areas of water, in
heavy rainfall or even after washing the vehicle, the effect of the brakes is
lessened as the brake discs are wet or even frozen (in winter). In this case
the brakes should be dried by pressing the brake pedal several times.
WARNING
Longer braking distances and faults in the brake system increase the risk
of accidents.
● New brake pads must be run in and do not have the correct friction
during the first 200 km (120 miles). However, the reduced braking ca-
pacity may be compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little hard-
er. This also applies when the brake pads have to be changed further on.
● If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are driving on roads which have
been salted, braking power may be lower than normal.
195Driving and the environment
WARNING (Continued)
● On steep slopes, if brakes are excessively used, they will overheat.
Before driving down a long steep slope, it is advisable to reduce speed
and change down into a lower gear or range (depending on the type of
transmission). This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes.
● Never let the brakes “drag” by applying light pressure. Continuous
braking will cause the brakes to overheat and the braking distance will
increase. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.
● Never let the vehicle run with the engine switched off. The braking
distance is increased considerably when the brake servo is not active.
● If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is subjected to heavy use, va-
pour bubbles can form in the brake system. This reduces the efficiency of
the brakes.
● Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to
the brakes and cause them to overheat. Before purchasing accessories
please observe the relevant instructions ⇒ page 222, Technical modifi-
cations.
● If a brake system circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased
considerably. Contact a specialised workshop immediately and avoid un-
necessary journeys.
Exhaust gas purification system
Catalytic converter*
To maintain the useful life of the catalytic converter
– Use only unleaded petrol with petrol engines, as lead damages
the catalytic converter.
– Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.
– For engine oil changes, do not replenish with too much engine
oil ⇒ page 231.
– Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump leads if necessary
⇒ page 286.
If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of power when the vehicle is
moving, reduce speed immediately and have the vehicle inspected at the
nearest specialised workshop. In general, the exhaust gas warning lamp
will light up when any of the described symptoms occur ⇒ page 66. If this
happens, unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system and escape into the en-
vironment. The catalytic converter can also be damaged by overheating.
WARNING
The catalytic converter reaches very high temperatures! Risk of fire!
● Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with
dry grass or flammable materials under the vehicle.
● Do not apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the
exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust sys-
tem. These materials could catch fire when the vehicle is being driven.
CAUTION
Never run the fuel tank completely dry because the irregularity of the fuel
supply may cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the
exhaust system, which could cause overheating and damage the catalytic
converter.
For the sake of the environment
Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a
smell of sulphur from the exhaust gas under some conditions. This depends
on the sulphur content of the fuel used. Quite often the problem can be
solved by changing to another brand of fuel.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
196 Driving and the environment
Diesel engine particulate filter*
The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates soot produced
by burning diesel.
The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates most of the soot from the ex-
haust gas system. Under normal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself. If
the driving conditions do not allow the filter to clean itself (for example,
multiple short trips) the filter will be obstructed by dust and pollen and the
warning lamp for the diesel engine particulate filter will light up. This
does not represent a fault, it is a warning that indicates that the filter has
not been able to regenerate automatically and that you must carry out a
cleaning cycle, as indicated in ⇒ page 81.
WARNING
● The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high temper-
atures; the vehicle should be parked so that the exhaust pipe does not
come into contact with flammable materials underneath the vehicle. Oth-
erwise there is a risk of fire.
CAUTION
● Your vehicle is not designed to use biodiesel fuel. Never, under any cir-
cumstances refuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel fuel could damage
the engine and the fuel system. The addition of biodiesel to diesel by the
diesel producer in accordance with standard EN 590 is authorised and will
not cause damage to the engine or the fuel system.
● Using diesel fuel with a high sulphur content may significantly reduce
the useful life of the diesel particulate filter. Your Technical Service will be
able to tell you which countries have diesel with a high sulphur content.
Economical and environmentally friendly
driving
Economical and environmentally friendly driving
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes
and tyres depends in large part on your driving style. By adopting an eco-
nomical driving style and anticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can
easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%. Some tips on how to help you
reduce pollution while saving money are listed below.
Drive anticipating the traffic situation
A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. When you anticipate the situa-
tion, you have to brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If it is possible,
let the vehicle roll with a gear engaged, for example, if you see a red light
ahead. The braking effect achieved in this way helps to reduce the wear of
brakes and tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are reduced to zero (dis-
connection due to inertia).
Change gear early to save energy
An effective way of saving fuel is to change up quickly through the gears.
Running the engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses an unnecessary
amount of fuel.
Manual gearbox: Change from first to second gear as quickly as possible.
We recommend that, whenever possible, you change to a higher gear upon
reaching 2000 rpm. Follow the “recommended gear” indication that ap-
pears on the instrument panel ⇒ page 74.
Avoid driving at high speed
We advise you not to drive at the top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel
consumption, exhaust emissions and noise levels all increase very rapidly
at higher speeds. Driving at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
197Driving and the environment
Avoid idling
It is worthwhile switching off the engine when waiting in a traffic jam, at lev-
el crossings or at traffic lights with a long red phase. The fuel saved after
only 30 - 40 seconds is greater than the amount of fuel needed to restart
the engine.
The engine takes a long time to warm up when it is idling. Mechanical wear
and pollutant emissions are also especially high during this initial warm-up
phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately after starting the engine.
Avoid running the engine at high speed.
Periodic maintenance
Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, before beginning a journey,
you will not consume more than the required amount of fuel. A well-serviced
engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maxi-
mum reliability and an enhanced resale value.
A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.
Avoid short journeys
To reduce the consumption and emission of polluting exhaust gases, the
engine and the exhaust gas filtration systems should reach the optimum
operating temperature.
With the engine cold, fuel consumption is proportionally higher. The engine
does not warm up and fuel consumption does not normalise until having
driven approximately four kilometres (2.5 miles). This is why we recommend
avoiding short trips whenever possible.
Maintain the correct tyre pressures
Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an adequate pressure saves fuel. If
the tyre pressure is just one bar too low, fuel consumption can increase by
as much as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-inflation also
increases tyre wear and impairs handling.
The tyre pressures should always be checked when the tyres are cold.
Do not use winter tyres all year round as they increase fuel consumption by
up to 10%.
Avoid unnecessary weight
Given that every kilo of extra weight will increase the fuel consumption, it is
advisable to always check the luggage compartment to make sure that no
unnecessary loads are being transported.
A roof rack is often left in place for the sake of convenience, even when it is
no longer needed. At a speed of 100-120 km/h (60-75 mph) your vehicle
will use about 12% more fuel as a result of the extra wind resistance caused
by the roof rack even when it is not in use.
Save electricity
The engine activates the alternator, which produces electricity. With the
need for electricity, fuel consumption is also increased. Because of this, al-
ways turn off electrical components when you do not need them. Examples
of components that use a lot of electricity are: the fan at high speeds, the
rear window heating or the seat heaters*.
Note
● If you vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not recommended to switch this func-
tion off.
● It is recommended to close the windows when driving at more than
60 km/h (40 mph)
● Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, as the pressure
can make the plate spin, more fuel will be used and it can burn the clutch
plate lining, causing a serious fault.
● Do not hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch, use the foot brake or
hand brake, using the latter to start. The fuel consumption will be lower and
you will prevent the clutch plate from being damaged.
● On descents, use the engine brake, changing to the gear that is more
suitable for the slope. The fuel consumption will be lower and the brakes
will not suffer.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
198 Driving and the environment
Environmental friendliness
Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials
and manufacture of your new SEAT.
Constructive measures to encourage recycling
● Joints and connections designed for easy dismantling
● Modular construction to facilitate dismantling
● Increased use of single-grade materials
● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in accordance with ISO 1043,
ISO 11469 and ISO 1629
Choice of materials
● Use of recycled materials.
● Use of compatible plastics in the same part if its components are not
easily separated.
● Use of recycled materials and/or materials originating from renewable
sources.
● Reduction of volatile components, including odour, in plastic materials.
● Use of CFC-free coolants.
Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions dictated by law (Annex II of ELV
Directive 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium.
Manufacturing methods
● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the protective wax for cavities.
● Use of plastic film as protection during vehicle transport.
● Use of solvent-free adhesives.
● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling systems.
● Recycling and energy recovery of residues (RDF).
● Improvement in the quality of waste water.
● Use of systems for the recovery of residual heat (thermal recovery, en-
thalpy wheels, etc.).
● The use of water-soluble paints
Driving abroad
Observations
To drive abroad, the following must be taken into consideration:
● For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol
is available for the journey. See the chapter “Refuelling”. Automobile organ-
isations will have information about service station networks selling unlea-
ded fuel.
● In some countries, it is possible that your vehicle model is not sold, and
therefore spare parts are not available or the Technical Services can only
carry out limited repairs.
SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the
technical preparations that you vehicle requires and also about necessary
maintenance and repair possibilities.
Adhesive strips for headlights
If you have to drive a right-hand drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or
vice versa, the asymmetric dipped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming
traffic.
To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers to certain parts of the head-
light lenses. Further information is available at your Technical Service.
199Driving and the environment
In vehicles with adaptive headlights, the rotation system must previously be
disconnected. To do this, please go to a specialised workshop.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
200 Trailer towing
Trailer towing
Trailer towing
Technical requirements
The towing bracket must meet certain technical require-
ments.
Your vehicle is intended mainly for transporting passengers and luggage.
However, if suitably equipped, it can also be used to tow a trailer or cara-
van.
If your vehicle has been factory-supplied with a towing bracket, all of the
necessary technical and legal aspects for trailing towing have been taking
into account during manufacturing.
Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole socket for the electrical connection be-
tween the trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer has a 7-pole connector you
can use an adapter cable. This can be purchased at a Technical Service.
If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be
done according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer
⇒ page 208.
WARNING
If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the installation should be carried out by
a specialised workshop.
● Particularly in high outdoor temperatures, it is not possible to drive
up long steep gradients without a suitable cooling system. The engine
would heat up.
● Incorrect installation can result in a safety risk!
Notes on towing
There are a number of points which need to be checked be-
fore towing a trailer or caravan.
– Observe the maximum permitted trailer weights ⇒ page 297.
Trailer weight
Never exceed the maximum permitted trailer weight.
If you do not load the trailer up to the maximum permitted trailer weight,
you can then climb correspondingly steeper gradients.
The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to
1000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and
therefore the vehicle's climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced
air density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The
weight of the vehicle and trailer must be reduced by about 10% for every
subsequent 1000 m (or part thereof). This figure refers to the combined
weight of the (loaded) vehicle and (loaded) trailer.
The figures for the drawbar load that appear on the identification plate of
the towing bracket are for certification purposes only. The correct figures for
your specific model, which may be lower than these figures for the towing
bracket, are given in the registration documents and on ⇒ page 290. Also
refer to ⇒ page 297.
Distributing the load
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as
possible. Loads carried in the trailer must be secured to prevent them mov-
ing.
201Trailer towing
Where possible, operate the trailer with the maximum permitted drawbar
load on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified
limit.
Tyre pressure
Check the tyre pressures on your vehicle, and adjust for “full load” condi-
tions (refer to the sticker listing the tyre pressures on the door pillar). It may
also be necessary to adjust the tyre pressures on the trailer according to the
recommendations of the trailer manufacturer.
Exterior mirrors
Check whether you can see enough of the road behind the trailer with the
standard mirrors. If this is not the case you should have additional mirrors
fitted. The two exterior mirrors should be fitted on folding arms. Adjust the
mirrors to give sufficient rear vision.
Headlights
Before starting a journey, check the headlight beam settings with the trailer
hitched up. If necessary, alter the height of the headlight beams by means
of the headlight range control. See ⇒ page 119.
Power supply
When you remove the ignition key, the power supply to the trailer is inter-
rupted.
Removable ball joint coupling
Vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket are equipped with a removable
ball joint coupling. This is stored in the spare wheel well in the luggage
compartment together with the necessary fitting instructions.
Note
If you frequently tow, we recommend you also have the vehicle serviced be-
tween services.
Notes on towing
Towing a trailer involves additional attention by the driver.
Weight distribution
The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very
unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slow to allow
for the unbalanced weight distribution.
Speed
The stability of the vehicle and trailer is reduced with increasing speed.
Therefore, it is advisable not to drive at the maximum permissible speed in
unfavourable road, weather or wind conditions. This especially applies
when driving downhill.
You should always reduce speed immediately if the trailer shows the slight-
est sign of swaying. Never try to stabilise the trailer by accelerating.
Anticipate hazards and brake in good time. If towing a trailer with an inertia
brake, first brake gently and then harder. This will prevent brake tapping by
the trailer wheels when they lock. Select a low gear in due course before go-
ing down a steep downhill. This enables you to use the engine braking to
slow down the vehicle.
Swaying and pitching can be reduced by stabiliser aids. We recommend
having stabiliser aids installed when towing trailers with a high trailer
weight. They can be purchased and installed at a Technical Service.
Reheating
When climbing long hills in hot weather with the engine running fast in low
gear, you should keep an eye on the coolant temperature gauge ⇒ page 60.
Reduce speed immediately if the needle moves to the right end of the scale.
If the temperature warning lamp in the instrument panel should start
flashing, stop the vehicle and let the engine cool down by running it at
idling speed for a few minutes.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
202 Trailer towing
Equipment and accessories
Before mounting equipment and accessories (e.g. bicycle
rack) please observe the following notes.
Fig. 154 Load distribu-
tion of equipment and ac-
cessories
The equipment/accessories mounted must not protrude more than 700 mm
from the ball joint
1
.
The total weight (mounted equipment plus the load) must not exceed 75 kg.
The maximum load depends on where the centre of gravity lies.
The maximum weight decreases as the distance between the centre of grav-
ity and the ball joint
1
increases.
The following limits apply:
If the distance is 300 mm, the total weight (incl. the equipment mounted)
A
must not exceed 75 kg.
If the distance is 600 mm, the total weight (incl. the equipment mounted)
B
must not exceed 35 kg.
Only bicycle racks for a maximum of three bicycles may be used.
Equipment and accessories mounted on the towing bracket
SEAT recommends that you only mount equipment (e.g. bicycle rack) on the
towing bracket which has been officially approved.. If you wish to attach
other equipment please make sure that it has been approved by the manu-
facturer for use on the towing bracket. If you mount unsuitable equipment,
this can cause damage to the towing bracket. In an extreme case, damage
to the towing bracket could cause it to break ⇒
.
WARNING
● If you wish to mount equipment which has not been approved by
SEAT, please ensure that it is suitable for use on SEAT vehicles.
● Use of unsuitable equipment can result in severe damage to the tow-
ing bracket. The towing bracket could then break while pulling a trailer
and cause an accident.
● Never use tools of any kind when fitting and removing the ball joint.
This would damage the locking device, no longer guaranteeing the cor-
rect working order of the bracket. This could lead to an accident.
203Trailer towing
Removable towing bracket
Introduction
Special care is required when fitting and removing the tow-
ing bracket.
Fig. 155 Luggage com-
partment: Spare wheel
with towing bracket
The removable ball joint attachment for the towing bracket is stored under
the floor panel in the luggage compartment.
● Vehicles with a spare wheel
⇒
Fig. 155.
The ball joint can be fitted and removed by hand.
Accessories mounted on the towing bracket
Please note that the ball joint attachment can be damaged by using unsuit-
able equipment that is mounted onto the towing bracket (e.g. bicycle rack).
Due to the material construction, such damage to the towing bracket dra-
matically increases safety risks and in extreme cases could lead to breakage
of the towing bracket while towing
⇒
.
Therefore, before buying such equipment, ensure that it is suitable for
mounting onto the vehicle's towing bracket and that it is approved for this
purpose. To prevent damage to the ball joint from unsuitable equipment, we
recommend that equipment for the towing bracket be purchased through
your SEAT Dealership. Also see ⇒ page 222.
WARNING
● Only mount equipment on the towing bracket of your vehicle if you
are certain it will not damage the bracket. Use of unsuitable equipment
can result in severe damage to the towing bracket. The towing bracket
could then break while pulling a trailer and cause an accident.
● Never use tools of any kind when fitting and removing the ball joint.
This would damage the locking device, no longer guaranteeing the cor-
rect working order of the bracket. This could lead to an accident.
Note
● Do not attempt to modify or repair the ball joint or other towing bracket
components.
● Should you have any difficulties when using the towing bracket, or sus-
pect that it is not fitted properly, contact a specialised workshop.
● Before setting off, always check that the ball joint is secured properly
⇒ page 206.
● Never disengage the ball joint with the caravan / trailer still hitched or
with a bicycle rack or similar accessory still attached.
● It is advisable to remove the ball joint when you are not towing a trailer.
Make sure that the cover piece is properly fitted on the mounting fixture on
the vehicle.
● Remove the ball joint before washing the vehicle with pressurised steam
equipment. Make sure the cover piece is fitted correctly onto the mounting
fixture.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
204 Trailer towing
Fitting the ball joint (step 1)
Fig. 156 Rear bumper:
Open the cover piece
– Remove the cover piece
2
⇒ Fig. 156 on the mounting fixture
1
below the bumper as far as it will go. The cover piece is held
automatically in the open position.
– Make sure the mounting fixture is clean. If not, clean it ⇒
.
Cont
⇒
page 204, Fitting the ball joint (step 2).
WARNING
It is important to keep the mounting fixture clean. Otherwise the ball
joint may fail to engage safely and securely. This could lead to an acci-
dent.
Fitting the ball joint (step 2)
Fig. 157 Removable tow-
ing bracket: Ball joint
Fig. 158 Removable tow-
ing bracket: Ball joint
Make sure the ball joint is clean and undamaged
– Check the locking pin
A
, release pin
B
, shaft section
C
and
knob
D
⇒ Fig. 157 on the ball joint to make sure they are clean
and undamaged.
205Trailer towing
The spring mechanism inside the ball joint must be in the ready
position
– Check that the red marking
A
⇒ Fig. 158 on the knob is inside
the black zone marked on the ball joint.
– Check that the locking pin
B
is inside the holes in the shaft
section of the ball joint.
– Check that the knob protrudes visibly from the ball joint, so that
there is a clear gap
C
between the knob and the ball joint.
The ball joint can only be installed if the internal spring mechanism is in the
ready position.
Cont ⇒ page 205, Fitting the ball joint (step 3).
Fitting the ball joint (step 3)
Fig. 159 Removable tow-
ing bracket: Setting the
spring mechanism to the
"ready" position
Fig. 160 Removable tow-
ing bracket: Inserting the
ball joint
Setting the spring mechanism to the ready position (if required)
– Insert the key
1
⇒ Fig. 159 in the lock on the knob and turn it
towards the red marking.
– Pull out the knob in direction
A
, hold and turn in direction
B
until the locking pin
2
engages and the release pin
3
moves
out visibly ⇒
.
Inserting the ball joint
– With the spring mechanism in the ready position, insert the ball
joint into the mounting fixture and push it upwards ⇒ Fig. 160
in the direction indicated (arrow) ⇒
. It should lock into posi-
tion automatically. You should now clearly hear it click into
place.
– Lock the ball joint by turning the key to the green marking.
– Remove the key.
Cont
⇒
page 206, Fitting the ball joint (step 4).
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
206 Trailer towing
WARNING
● If it is not possible to set the spring mechanism to the ready position
as described above, do not use the ball joint. Please contact a special-
ised workshop.
● To avoid injury, keep your hands away from the knob or cover piece
when inserting the ball joint in the mounting fixture. Otherwise, you
could be injured.
Fitting the ball joint (step 4)
Fig. 161 Removable tow-
ing bracket: Safety check
Fig. 162 Rear bumper:
Pulling down the power
socket
Safety check
– Check that the green marking
A
⇒ Fig. 161 on the knob is in-
side the black zone marked on the ball joint.
– Check that the knob is directly against the ball joint, so that
there is no gap between the knob and the ball joint (arrow).
– Check that the ball joint is locked and the key is removed so
that the knob cannot be pulled out ⇒
.
– Check that the ball joint fits tightly in the mounting fixture (try
moving it about to check).
Towing socket
– To plug in the electrical connection for the trailer, pull down the
socket below the bumper ⇒ Fig. 162.
If the safety check is not satisfactory, the ball joint must be fitted again
properly.
207Trailer towing
WARNING
To avoid accidents, the ball joint must meet all the safety requirements
listed in the safety check. The towing bracket must not be used if any one
of these requirements is not met. If this is the case, you should contact a
specialised workshop.
Removing the ball joint
Fig. 163 Removable tow-
ing bracket: Removing
the ball joint
Fig. 164 Rear bumper:
fitting the cover piece
– Insert the key in the lock
1
⇒ Fig. 163 on the knob.
– Unlock the ball joint by turning the key to the red marking.
– Take hold of the ball joint and pull out the knob in direction
A
.
– Keep hold of the knob and turn it as far as it will go in direction
B
.
– Release the knob. The spring mechanism will remain in the
ready position ⇒
.
– Pull the ball joint down out of the mounting fixture
1
⇒ Fig. 164. The cover piece will cover the mounting fixture auto-
matically
2
.
– Put away the ball joint attachment under the floor panel in the
luggage compartment.
– Move the socket back up to its original position.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
208 Trailer towing
WARNING
● To avoid injury, keep your hands away from the locking pin and the
release pin when releasing the locking mechanism.
● Make sure that the cover piece is properly engaged on the mounting
fixture on the vehicle. Otherwise the ball joint may fail to engage secure-
ly if dirt accumulates in the mounting fixture.
Fitting a towing bracket*
It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle.
Fig. 165 Attachment
points for towing bracket
If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be
completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.
209Trailer towing
The attachment points for the towing bracket
A
are on the lower part of the
vehicle.
The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should
never be lower than the indicated value, even with a fully loaded vehicle
and including the maximum drawbar load.
Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:
65 mm (minimum)
403
629 mm
1112 mm (vehicle with max. load)
from 350 to 420 mm (vehicle with max. load)
1000 mm
Fitting a towing bracket
● Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort for the vehicle. Therefore,
before fitting a towing bracket, please contact a Technical Service to check
whether your cooling system needs modification.
● The legal requirements in your country must be observed (e.g. the fitting
of a separate control lamp).
● Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper, must be removed and
reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a
torque wrench, and a power socket must be connected to the vehicle electri-
cal system. This requires specialised knowledge and tools.
● Figures in the illustration show the elevation value and the attachment
points which must be considered if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.
B
C
D
E
F
G
WARNING
The towing brackets should be fitted at a specialised workshop.
● If the towing bracket is incorrectly installed, there is a serious danger
of accident.
● For your own safety, please observe the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the towing bracket.
CAUTION
● If the power socket is incorrectly installed, this could cause damage to
the vehicle electrical system.
Note
For the Sport finish, fitting a trailer bracket is not recommended due to the
design of the bumpers.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
210 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
General notes
Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your
vehicle.
Vehicle maintenance
Regular care and washing help to maintain the value of the vehicle. This
may also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in
the event of bodywork corrosion or paint defects.
The best way to protect your vehicle against the harmful effects of the envi-
ronment is through correct maintenance and frequent washing. The longer
substances such as insect remains, bird droppings, resinous tree sap, road
dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and other aggressive materi-
als remain on the vehicle, the more damage they do to the paintwork. High
temperatures (for instance in strong sunlight) further intensify the corrosive
effect.
After winter, a period when salt is put on the roads, it is important to have
the underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.
Products for vehicle maintenance
Car-care products are available in your Technical Services. Keep the product
instructions until you have used them up.
WARNING
● Car-care products can be toxic. Because of this, they must always be
kept closed in their original container. Keep them out of the reach of chil-
dren. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.
● Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the pack-
age before using car-care products. Improper use could cause health
problems or damage the vehicle. The use of certain products may pro-
duce noxious vapours; they should be used in well ventilated areas.
● Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other
volatile fluids. These are toxic and highly flammable. Risk of fire and ex-
plosion.
● Before washing your vehicle, or carrying out any maintenance, switch
the engine off, apply the handbrake firmly and remove the key from the
ignition.
CAUTION
Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry.
Never use a dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could damage
the paintwork or the windows of your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with
plenty of water.
For the sake of the environment
● When purchasing products for your vehicle maintenance, select the
ones which are not harmful to the environment.
● The waste from car-care products should not be disposed of with ordina-
ry household waste. Observe the disposal information on the package.
211Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
Care of the vehicle exterior
Automatic car wash tunnel
The vehicle can normally be washed without problem in an
automatic car wash.
The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the vehicle can normally be washed
without problems in an automatic car wash tunnel. However, the paintwork
wear depends to a large extent on the kind of the car wash tunnel, the
brushes used, its water filtering and the type of cleaning and preservative
products.
Before going through a vehicle wash, be sure to take the usual precautions
such as closing the windows and sunroof.
If the vehicle has special accessories such as spoilers or a roof rack or two-
way radio aerial, etc., it is advisable to consult the car wash tunnel operator.
After washing, the brakes could take some time to respond as the brake
discs and pads could be wet, or even frozen in winter. Dry the brakes by
braking several times.
WARNING
Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effectiveness.
Risk of accident.
Washing by hand
Vehicle washing
– First soften the dirt and rinse it off with water.
– Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a soft sponge, a
glove or a brush. Use very light pressure.
– Rinse the sponge or glove often with clean water.
– Special car shampoo should only be used for very stubborn dirt.
– Leave the wheels, sill panels etc. until last, using a different
sponge or glove.
– Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water.
– Dry the vehicle surface gently with a chamois leather.
– In cold temperature, dry the rubber seals and their surfaces to
prevent them from freezing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber
seals.
After washing the vehicle
– After washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes
by braking several times ⇒ page 194, Braking capacity and
braking distance.
WARNING
● Wash your vehicle with the ignition switched off.
● Protect your hands and arms from cuts on sharp metal edges when
cleaning the underbody, the inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of in-
jury.
● Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effective-
ness. Risk of accident.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
212 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
CAUTION
● Never remove dirt, mud or dust if the vehicle surface is dry. Never use a
dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch the paintwork
or glass on your vehicle.
● Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: when washing the vehicle
with a hose, do not direct water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around
the doors, rear lid, or sunroof. Risk of freezing.
For the sake of the environment
To protect environment, the vehicle should be washed only in specially pro-
vided wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water entering the
sewerage system. In some places, washing vehicles outside wash bays is
prohibited.
Note
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Washing the vehicle with a high pressure cleaner
Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!
– Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner,
particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying
distance.
– Increase the spraying distance for soft materials and painted
bumpers.
– Do not use a high pressure cleaner to remove ice or snow from
windows ⇒ page 213.
– Never use concentrated jet nozzles (“rotating jets”) ⇒
.
– After washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes
by braking several times ⇒ page 194, Braking capacity and
braking distance.
WARNING
● Never wash tyres with a concentrated jet (“rotating nozzle”). Even at
large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible and invisible
damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.
● Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effective-
ness. Risk of accident.
CAUTION
● Do not use water hotter than 60 °C. This could damage the car.
● To avoid damage to the vehicle, keep a sufficient distance from sensitive
materials such as flexible hoses, plastic, soundproofing material, etc. This
is also important for bumpers painted in the colour of the bodywork. The
closer the nozzle is to the surface, the greater the wear on the material.
Vehicle paint maintenance
Regular waxing protects the paintwork.
You need to apply wax to your vehicle if water does not form small drops
and run off the paintwork when it is clean.
Good quality hard wax products are available at your Technical Service.
Regular wax applications help to protect the paintwork from environmental
contaminants
⇒
page 210. It is also effective in protecting against minor
scratches.
213Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the vehicle washing tunnel, it is
advisable to protect the paint with a hard wax coating at least twice a year.
Polishing the paintwork
Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss can-
not be brought back by applying wax. Polishing products can be purchased
in your Technical Service.
The vehicle must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not con-
tain wax compounds to seal the paint ⇒ page 212, Vehicle paint mainte-
nance.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the paintwork:
● Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matt finish or
on plastic parts.
● Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.
Caring for plastic parts
Solvents damage plastic parts.
If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts, clean them with approved sol-
vent-free plastic cleaning and care products.
CAUTION
● The use of liquid air freshener directly over the air vents of the vehicle
may damage the plastic parts if the liquid is accidentally spilled.
● Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors
Cleaning windows
– Moisten the windows with commercially available, alcohol
based glass cleaner.
– Dry the windows with a clean chamois leather or a lint-free
cloth.
Removing snow
– Use a small brush to remove snow from the windows and mir-
rors.
Removing ice
– Use a de-icer spray.
Use a clean cloth or chamois leather to dry the windows. The chamois leath-
ers used on painted surfaces are not suitable to clean windows because
they are soiled with wax deposits which could smear the windows.
If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper,
push it in one direction only without swinging it.
Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean rubber, oil, grease and
silicone deposits off.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
214 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
Wax deposits can be removed with a special cleaner available in your Tech-
nical Services. Wax deposits on the windscreen could cause the wiper
blades to judder. Adding a window cleaner that dissolves wax to the wind-
screen washer fluid prevents wiper blades from juddering, but wax deposits
are not removed.
CAUTION
● Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and
mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!
● The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of
the window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers over the heating ele-
ments on the inside of the window.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
Clean wiper blades improve visibility.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen
wiper blades.
2. Use window cleaner to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use
a sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn dirt.
Rubber seals maintenance
If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not freeze so
quickly.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.
2. Apply a specialist care product to the rubber seals.
The rubber strips on the doors, windows, bonnet and rear lid will remain
pliable and last longer if they are treated with a suitable care product (for
example silicone spray).
Caring for rubber seals will also prevent premature ageing and leaks. The
doors will be easier to open. If rubber seals are well looked after, they will
not freeze so quickly in winter.
Door lock cylinders
The door lock cylinders can freeze up in winter.
To de-ice the lock cylinders you should only use spray with lubricating and
anti-corrosive properties.
Cleaning chrome parts
1. Clean chrome parts with a damp cloth.
2. Polish chrome parts with a soft, dry cloth.
If this does not provide satisfying results, use a specialist chrome cleaning
product. Chrome cleaning products will remove stains from the surface.
CAUTION
To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:
● Never use an abrasive cleaning product on chrome.
● Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a sandy or dusty environment.
215Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
Steel wheel rims
– Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a separate sponge.
Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake dust. Any damage to the paint on
steel wheel rims should be repaired before starting to rust.
WARNING
● Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distan-
ces and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to
the tyres. This may cause an accident.
● Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effective-
ness. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp
braking. Dry the brakes by braking several times ⇒ page 194, Braking ca-
pacity and braking distance.
Alloy wheel rims
Every two weeks
– Wash salt and brake dust from alloy wheels.
– Use an acid free detergent to clean the wheel rims.
Every three months
– Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels.
Alloy wheels require regular attention to preserve their appearance. If road
salt and brake dust are not often removed, the aluminium finish will be im-
paired.
Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy wheel rims.
Car polish or other abrasive agents should not be used for maintaining the
rims. If the protective coating is damaged, e.g. by flying stones, the dam-
aged area should be repaired immediately.
WARNING
● Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distan-
ces and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to
the tyres. This may cause an accident.
● Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effective-
ness. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp
braking. Dry the brakes by braking several times ⇒ page 194, Braking ca-
pacity and braking distance.
Underbody protection
The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it from chemical
and mechanical damage.
The protective coating can be damaged when driving. We recommend you
to check the protective coating under the body and on the running gear, and
reinstated if necessary, before and after the winter season.
We recommend you to go to your Technical Service to carry out repair work
and additional anti-corrosion work.
WARNING
Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes,
catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. The heat of
the exhaust system or the engine could cause them to ignite. Risk of fire.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
216 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
Cleaning the engine compartment
Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.
Anti-corrosion treatment
The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti-
corrosion treatment at the factory.
Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the vehi-
cle is frequently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the ve-
hicle, the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before
and after winter.
Your Technical Services have got the necessary workshop equipment to pro-
vide the correct cleaning and preserving products. For this reason, we rec-
ommend having this work performed by them.
The anti-corrosion protection is usually removed if the engine compartment
is cleaned with grease removing solutions, or if you have the engine
cleaned. On commissioning this work, ensure that all surfaces, seams,
joints and components in the engine compartment are given anti-corrosion
treatment.
WARNING
● When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety
warnings ⇒ page 227.
● Before opening the bonnet, switch the engine off, apply the hand-
brake firmly and always remove the key from the ignition.
● Allow the engine to cool before you clean the engine compartment.
● Do not clean the vehicle underbody, wheel arches or wheel trims
without protecting your hands and arms. You may cut yourself on sharp-
edged metal parts. Failure to comply could result in injury.
WARNING (Continued)
● Moisture, ice and salt on the brake system may affect braking effec-
tiveness. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and
sharp braking.
● Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature-controlled and could
start automatically, even when the key is removed from the ignition!
For the sake of the environment
Fuel, grease and oil deposits could be removed when the engine is washed.
The polluted water must be cleaned in an oil separator. For this reason, en-
gine washing should be carried out only by a specialised workshop or a pet-
rol station.
Vehicle interior maintenance
Introduction
The dye used in many modern garments, for example dark jeans, is not al-
ways sufficiently colour-fast. Seat upholstery (material and leather), espe-
cially when light-coloured, may visibly discolour if the dye comes out of
clothing (even when used correctly). This is not an upholstery defect but in-
dicates that the dye in the item of clothing is not sufficiently colour-fast.
The longer stains or dirt remain on the vehicle surfaces, especially the fab-
rics covering the padded upholstery, the more difficult it becomes to clean
and maintain them. If stains and dirt are left for a long time, it may be that
they are impossible to remove.
217Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
WARNING
Car-care products may be toxic and hazardous. Using unsuitable car-care
products or, using them in the wrong way, may cause accidents, serious
injury, burns or intoxication.
● Keep your car-care products in their original containers.
● Read the instructions.
● Never keep car-care products in empty food containers, bottles or
other similar containers. Other people may confuse them.
● Keep all car-care products out of the reach of children.
● Some products may give off harmful vapours during use. Therefore,
they should be used outdoors in well-ventilated places.
● Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail-varnish remover or any
other volatile product for washing, maintenance or cleaning. These are
toxic and highly flammable.
WARNING
Unsuitable maintenance and cleaning of vehicle components may impair
proper operation of safety equipment and cause serious injury.
● Maintain and clean vehicle components according to the manufactur-
er's instructions.
● Only use approved or recommended cleaning products.
CAUTION
● Cleaning products which contain solvents have a corrosive effect and
may damage the material irreparably.
● Stains and dirt containing aggressive substances or solvents attack the
material and may damage it irreparably, even when they are cleaned quick-
ly.
● Dirt and stains should not be allowed to dry and should be cleaned as
quickly as possible.
● In the case of stubborn stains, take the vehicle to a specialised work-
shop to avoid damage.
Treating your upholstery
Checklist
To treat and maintain your seat upholstery, keep the following in mind ⇒
:
Before entering the vehicle, close any Velcro fasteners that might
snag on the upholstery or trim fabric. Any open Velcro fasteners may
damage the trim or upholstery fabrics.
To prevent damage, avoid direct contact between sharp decorative
objects and the upholstery and trim fabrics. Decorative objects in-
clude zips, rivets and rhinestones on clothing and belts.
From time to time, clean the dust that gathers in the perforations,
folds and seams so that the surfaces of the seats are not damaged
by its abrasive effect.
Make sure clothes are colour-fast to avoid them running and staining
the upholstery. This is especially important if the upholstery is light
in colour.
CAUTION
If you ignore this checklist, which is important for maintaining your seat up-
holstery, the fabric may be damaged or stained.
● Consult the checklist and carry out the operations it describes.
Note
SEAT recommends you take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to treat
any stains on the upholstery caused by the discolouration of clothing.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
218 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
How to clean the upholstery, trim fabrics and Alcantara
®
Cleaning the fabric on heated seats and electrically adjustable seats or
seats with airbag components
It is possible that there are important airbag components and electrical con-
nections inside the driver seat, passenger seat and possibly the outer rear
seats. If these seats and seat backrests are damaged, or are cleaned and
are treated incorrectly, or if they get wet, the vehicle electric system may be
destroyed and the airbag system damaged ⇒
.
Electric and heated seats contain components and electrical connections
that may be damaged if the seats are cleaned or incorrectly treated ⇒
.
Similarly, damage might be caused at other points in the vehicle's electric
system.
For this reason, bear the following indications in mind for cleaning:
● Do not use high-pressure or steam cleaning equipment or cold aerosols.
● Do not use cream detergents or detergent-based solutions for delicate
garments.
● Prevent the fabric from getting wet at all times.
● Only use cleaning products approved by SEAT.
● If in doubt, take the vehicle to a professional cleaning company.
Cleaning the fabric on unheated seats, non-electrically adjustable seats
and seats without airbag components
● Before using any cleaning products, consult and keep in mind the in-
structions of use, indications and warnings on the container.
● Use a vacuum cleaner (with the brush attachment) on the trim and seat
fabrics, the Alcantara
®
upholstery of the seats and the carpet.
● Do not use high-pressure or steam cleaning equipment or cold aerosols.
● For general cleaning, use a soft sponge or an ordinary lint-free microfi-
bre cloth ⇒
.
● Clean Alcantara
®
surfaces with a slightly damp cotton or woollen cloth,
or a standard lint-free microfibre cloth ⇒
.
If the dirt on the trim and upholstery fabrics is only superficial, you can use
a standard foam cleaner.
If the upholstery and trim are very dirty, before cleaning them we recom-
mend you find out about the most suitable cleaning options from a profes-
sional cleaning company. If necessary, the cleaning should be carried out
by a specialised company.
Stain removal
When removing stains, it may be necessary to clean the whole surface and
not just the stain itself. Especially if the surface has been dirtied through
normal use. If you only clean the stained area, that part may then look light-
er than the rest. If in doubt, take the vehicle to a professional cleaning com-
pany.
WARNING
If there is a fault in the airbag system, it is likely that the airbag will not
deploy correctly, not deploy at all, or do so unexpectedly, which could
cause serious or fatal injuries.
● Have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop.
CAUTION
If the upholstery on electrically operated seats or seats with airbag compo-
nents gets soaked, the vehicle's electric system and certain other compo-
nents may be damaged.
● If the seat gets soaked, take the vehicle immediately to a specialised
workshop to be dried and for the system components to be inspected.
● Do not use steam cleaning equipment as the dirt becomes more encrus-
ted and fixed in the material.
● High-pressure cleaning equipment and cold aerosols may damage the
upholstery.
219Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
CAUTION
● Brushes should only be used to clean the carpet and floor mats! Other
fabrics may be damaged if cleaned with a brush.
● If cream detergents or detergents for delicate garments are applied with
a damp cloth or sponge, they may, for example, leave rings when dry be-
cause of the surfactant components they contain. Generally, such rings are
very difficult or almost impossible to remove.
CAUTION
● Do not let water soak into Alcantara
®
under any circumstances.
● Do not use leather cleaning products, solvents, wax polish, shoe cream,
stain removers or similar products on Alcantara
®
.
● Never use brushes for cleaning damp material as they could damage the
surface.
Cleaning and maintenance of natural leather upholstery
Consult a professional cleaning workshop if you have any doubts on clean-
ing and maintaining the leather equipment in your vehicle.
Maintenance and treatment
Nappa natural leather is delicate because it has no additional protective
layer.
● After cleaning, regularly apply a conditioner with sun-screen and im-
pregnating action. These products nourish the leather, soften it and make it
more breathable, as well as re-hydrating it. They also provide it with a pro-
tective film.
● Clean the leather every two or three months and remove stains as they
appear.
● Treat the leather regularly (about twice a year) with a suitable mainte-
nance product.
● Apply as few cleaning and maintenance products as possible, always
using a dry, lint-free cotton or woollen cloth. Do not apply cleaning and
maintenance products directly to the leather.
● Remove recent ball-point pen and ink stains, lipstick, shoe cream and
similar stains as soon as possible.
● Maintain the colour of the leather. To do this, use a special cream espe-
cially coloured for leather to achieve the same overall colour, if necessary.
● Afterwards, go over it with a soft cloth.
Cleaning the vehicle
SEAT recommends using a slightly damp cotton or woollen cloth for general
cleaning purposes.
Generally, the leather should never be soaked at any point, nor should wa-
ter penetrate the seams.
Before cleaning the leather upholstery, bear in mind the following recom-
mendations ⇒ page 218, Cleaning the fabric on heated seats and electrical-
ly adjustable seats or seats with airbag components.
CAUTION
● On no account use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers or
similar materials on leather.
● If the stain remains on the leather for long, it will soak in and be impos-
sible to remove.
● In the event of spilt liquids, dry immediately with an absorbent cloth to
prevent the liquid penetrating through the leather or seams.
● If the vehicle is left standing in the sun for long periods, the leather
should be protected against direct sunlight to prevent it from fading.
Note
The leather will usually change colour slightly with use.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
220 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
Cleaning synthetic leather upholstery
Before cleaning the synthetic leather upholstery, bear in mind the following
recommendations ⇒ page 218, Cleaning the fabric on heated seats and
electrically adjustable seats or seats with airbag components
Only use water and neutral cleaning products to clean synthetic leather up-
holstery.
CAUTION
Do not use solvents, floor wax, shoe cream, stain removers or similar prod-
ucts on synthetic leather. These will stiffen the material, causing it to crack
prematurely.
Plastic parts and dash panel cleaning
– Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic parts and the dash
panel.
– If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a special sol-
vent-free plastic cleaning product.
WARNING
Never clean the dash panel and the airbag module surface with cleaners
containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. If the
airbag triggered, plastic parts could become detached and cause inju-
ries.
CAUTION
Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Wooden trim cleaning*
– Clean the wooden trim with a water-moistened clean cloth.
– If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap
solution.
CAUTION
Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning the radio and climate controls
To clean the radio and/or climate controls, use a soft damp cloth. For more
resistant dirt, a neutral soap solution may be used.
Seat belt cleaning
A dirty belt may not work properly.
Check all seat belts regularly and keep them clean.
Seat belt cleaning
– Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll it.
– Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.
– Allow it to dry.
– Do not roll the seat belt up until it is dry.
221Vehicle maintenance and cleaning
If large stains form on the belts, it will not retract correctly into the automat-
ic belt retractor.
WARNING
● Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the seat belts, as this can im-
pair the strength of the webbing. Ensure that seat belts do not come into
contact with corrosive fluids.
● Check the condition of the seat belts at regular intervals. If you notice
that the belt webbing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle of any of
the belts is damaged, the belt must be replaced by a specialised work-
shop.
● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts
must not be removed or modified in any way.
CAUTION
After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry completely before rolling them up.
Otherwise, the belt retractors could become damaged.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
222 Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications
Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications
Accessories and spare parts
Always consult a SEAT dealership before purchasing acces-
sories and parts.
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safe-
ty.
Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical
changes to your vehicle, we recommend that you consult your Technical
Service.
SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information
about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac-
turer regarding accessories and spare parts.
We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories
®
and SEAT Ap-
proved Spare Parts
®
. This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in
question is suitable, reliable and safe. SEAT Technical Services have the
necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are correctly and
professionally installed.
Despite a continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess
the reliability, safety and suitability of parts that SEAT has not approved. For
this reason, SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts
used, even if these parts have been approved by an official testing agency
or are covered by an official approval certificate.
Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the driv-
er's control of the vehicle (e.g. cruise control system or electronically-con-
trolled suspension) must be approved by SEAT and bear the e mark (the Eu-
ropean Union's authorisation symbol).
If any additional electrical components are fitted which do not serve to con-
trol the vehicle itself (e.g. refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator fan), these
must bear the CE mark (European Union manufacturer conformity declara-
tion).
WARNING
Accessories, for example telephone holders or cup holders, should never
be fitted on the covers, or within the working range, of the airbags. Oth-
erwise, there is a danger of injury if the airbag is triggered in an accident.
Technical modifications
Modifications must always be carried out according to our
specifications.
Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components or software in the
vehicle may cause malfunctions. Due to the way the electronic components
are linked together in networks, other indirect systems may be affected by
the faults. This can seriously impair safety, lead to excessive wear of compo-
nents, and also invalidate your vehicle registration documents.
SEAT Technical Services cannot be held liable for any damage caused by
modifications and/or work incorrectly performed.
For this reason, we recommend having all work performed by a SEAT Techni-
cal Service using SEAT Original Spare Parts
®
.
223Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications
WARNING
Any type of work or modification performed incorrectly on your vehicle
can lead to malfunctions and can cause accidents.
Mobile phones and two-way radios
First consult your Technical Service if you wish to use a mobile telephone or
a two-way radio with a transmitting power output in excess of 10 watts.
Here you will receive information concerning the technical possibilities for
retrofitting this equipment.
Mobile telephones and two-way radios should be only fitted by a special-
ised workshop, for example a SEAT dealership.
WARNING
● Always concentrate primarily on driving. If you are distracted while
driving you could have an accident.
● Never attach the telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the
airbag units or within the range of the airbags. There is a high danger of
injury if the airbag is triggered.
Note
Please observe the operating instructions of your mobile telephone/two-
way radio.
Athermic windscreen*
Fig. 166 Location of the
electronic toll collection
system
Vehicles with an athermic windscreen have an area without athermic treat-
ment above the rear view mirror
⇒
Fig. 166. This area has been designed for
the operating of electronic components of fitted devices (e.g. electronic toll
collection system).
Note
The customer should ensure that the electronic toll collection system is fit-
ted in the correct area to make sure it works correctly.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
224 Checking and refilling levels
Checking and refilling levels
Refuelling
The tank flap is released manually. The tank holds approxi-
mately 70 litres.
Fig. 167 Fuel tank flap
with tank cap attached
The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked and locked automati-
cally by the central locking.
Opening the fuel tank cap
– Press the right side of the flap to open it.
– Unscrew the fuel tank cap anticlockwise.
– Hook the cap onto the support fitted to the open tank flap
⇒ Fig. 167.
Closing the fuel tank cap
– Screw the tank cap clockwise into the filler opening until it you
hear it click into position.
– Close the fuel tank flap.
The tank flap is at the rear of the vehicle on the right.
If the automatic filler nozzle is operated correctly, it will switch itself off as
soon as the fuel tank is “full”. Never attempt to fill beyond this point, as this
will fill the expansion chamber. Fuel may leak out if ambient conditions are
warm.
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of
the fuel tank flap. Here you will find further information on fuel.
225Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
● Fuel is highly flammable and can cause serious burns and other inju-
ries.
– Never smoke or use an open flame when filling the fuel tank of the
vehicle, or a spare fuel canister, with fuel. This is an explosion haz-
ard.
– Follow legal requirements for the use of spare fuel canisters.
– For safety reasons we do not recommend carrying a spare fuel can-
ister in the vehicle. The canister could be damaged in an accident and
leak.
● If, in exceptional circumstances, you have to carry a spare fuel canis-
ter, please observe the following points:
– Never fill the spare fuel canister inside the vehicle or on it. An elec-
trostatic charge could build up during filling, causing the fuel fumes
to ignite. This could cause an explosion. Always place the canister on
the ground to fill it.
– Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as possi-
ble.
– If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must
be in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an
electrostatic charge building up.
– Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel
vapours are explosive. Danger of death.
CAUTION
● Fuel spills should be removed from the paintwork immediately.
● Never run the tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply could cause
misfiring. As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
cause damage.
● When filling the fuel tank after having run it completely dry on a vehicle
with a diesel engine the ignition must be switched on for at least 30 sec-
onds without starting the engine. When you then start the engine it may
take longer than normal (up to one minute) for the engine to start firing.
This is due to the fact that the fuel system has to purge itself of air before
starting.
For the sake of the environment
Do not try to put in more fuel after the automatic filler nozzle has switched
off; this may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.
Petrol
Petrol types
The recommended fuel types are listed on a sticker inside
the fuel tank flap.
Only unleaded petrol conforming to standard DIN EN 228 may be used for
vehicles with catalytic converters (EN = “European Standard”).
Fuel types are differentiated by the octane rating, e.g: 91, 95, 98 RON (RON
= “Research Octane Number”, unit for determining the knock resistance of
petrol). You may use petrol with a higher octane number than the one rec-
ommended for your engine. However, this has no advantage in terms of fuel
consumption and engine power.
The correct fuel type for your vehicle is given in the technical table for the
engine, in the Technical Data section.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
226 Checking and refilling levels
CAUTION
● Petrol with standard EN 228 may be mixed with small quantities of etha-
nol. However, bioethanol fuels available at commercial establishments with
reference E50 or E85, which contain a high percentage of ethanol, may not
be used, as they will damage the fuel system.
● Even one tankful of leaded fuel would permanently impair the efficiency
of the catalytic converter.
● High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using
petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.
For the sake of the environment
Just one full tank of leaded fuel would seriously impair the efficiency of the
catalytic converter.
Petrol additives
Petrol additives improve the quality of the petrol.
The quality of the petrol influences the performance, power and life of the
engine. For this reason, you should use good quality petrol containing addi-
tives. These additives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the fuel system
clean and prevent deposits from building up in the engine.
If good quality petrol with additives is not available or engine problems oc-
cur, the required additives must be added during refuelling.
Diesel
Diesel*
Diesel fuel must conform to DIN EN 590 (EN = “European Standard”). It
must have a cetane number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane number indi-
cates the ignition quality of the diesel fuel.
Notes on refuelling ⇒ page 224.
Biodiesel*
CAUTION
● Your vehicle is not designed to use biodiesel fuel. Never, under any cir-
cumstances refuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel fuel could damage
the engine and the fuel system. The addition of biodiesel to diesel fuel by
the diesel manufacturer in accordance with standard EN 590 or DIN 51628
is authorised and will not cause damage to the engine or the fuel system.
● The diesel engine has been designed to be used exclusively with diesel
fuel conforming to standard EN 590. Never refuel or use petrol, kerosene,
fuel oil or any other type of fuel. If you accidentally fill up the vehicle with
the wrong type of fuel, do not start the engine. Seek assistance from speci-
alised personnel. The composition of these fuels may severely damage the
fuel system and the engine.
227Checking and refilling levels
Winter driving
Diesel can thicken in winter.
Winter-grade diesel
When using summer-grade diesel fuel, difficulties may be experienced at
sub-zero temperatures because the fuel thickens due to wax separation. For
this reason, winter-grade diesel fuel is available in some countries during
the cold months. It can be used at temperatures as low as -22 °C.
In countries with different climatic conditions the diesel fuel generally sold
has different temperature characteristics. Check with the Technical Services
or filling stations in the country concerned regarding the type of diesel fuels
available.
Filter pre-heater
Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter glow plug system, making it well
equipped for operation in winter. This ensures that the fuel system remains
operational to approx. -24 °C, provided you use winter-grade diesel that is
safe to -15 °C.
However, if the fuel has waxed to such an extent that the engine will not
start at temperatures of under -24 °C, simply place the vehicle in a warm
place for a while.
CAUTION
Do not mix fuel additives (thinners or similar products) with diesel fuel.
Bonnet
Work in the engine compartment
Extra caution is necessary when working on components in
the engine compartment.
Always be aware of the danger of injury and scalding as well as the risk of
accident or even fire when working in the engine compartment (e.g. when
checking and refilling fluids). Always observe the warnings listed below
and follow all general safety precautions. The engine compartment of the
vehicle is a potentially hazardous area ⇒
WARNING
● Switch the ignition off.
● Remove the ignition key.
● Apply the handbrake firmly.
● If your vehicle is equipped with a manual gearbox, place the gear lev-
er in neutral. If you are driving an automatic vehicle, place the selector
lever in position P.
● Wait for the engine to cool down.
● Children should not be allowed to approach the engine compartment.
● Never spill liquids used for vehicle operation on the engine compart-
ment, as these may catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in coolant).
● Take care not to cause short circuits in the electrical system, especial-
ly when working on the battery.
● Never touch the radiator fan while the engine is hot, as the fan could
start up suddenly.
● Never open the expansion tank when the engine is hot. The cooling
system is under pressure.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
228 Checking and refilling levels
WARNING (Continued)
● Protect face, hands and arms from any hot steam or hot coolant fluid
released by covering the cap with a large, thick rag when opening the ex-
pansion tank.
● If any tests have to be performed with the engine running, there is an
added safety risk from the rotating parts (e.g. drive belts, alternator, ra-
diator fan, etc.) and from the high-voltage ignition system.
● Observe the following additional warnings if work on the fuel system
or the electrical system is necessary:
– Always disconnect the battery from the on-board network.
– Do not smoke.
– Never work near open flames.
– Always keep an approved fire extinguisher immediately available.
CAUTION
When topping up fluids, make sure the correct fluid is put into the correct
filler opening. This can otherwise cause serious malfunctions or engine
damage.
For the sake of the environment
Inspect the ground underneath your vehicle regularly so that any leaks are
detected at an early stage. If you find spots of oil or other fluids, have your
vehicle inspected at the workshop.
● When the external temperature and level of humidity are high or when
the engine stops, it is possible for water to drop from the air conditioning
system evaporator potentially forming a small puddle on the ground. This is
normal and does not indicate a leak.
Note
On right-hand drive vehicles some of the reservoirs mentioned below are lo-
cated on the other side of the engine compartment.
Releasing the bonnet
The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle.
Fig. 168 Detail of foot-
well area on driver side:
lever for unlocking the
bonnet
– To release the bonnet, pull the lever under the dash panel
⇒ Fig. 168 in the direction indicated (arrow).
The bonnet springs out of its lock.
229Checking and refilling levels
Opening the bonnet
Fig. 169 Release catch
under the bonnet
Before opening the bonnet make sure that the windscreen wiper
arms are not lifted away from the glass. Otherwise the paint may
be damaged.
– Lift the bonnet slightly ⇒
.
– Press the release catch under the bonnet upwards ⇒ Fig. 169.
This will release the arrester hook under the bonnet.
– Open the bonnet.
The bonnet is held in position by a gas-filled strut.
WARNING
Never open the bonnet if you see steam or drips of coolant being re-
leased from the engine compartment. Failure to comply could result in
burns. Wait until no steam or coolant can be seen before opening the
bonnet.
Closing the bonnet
– To close the bonnet, push it down until it overcomes the spring
pressure.
– Let the bonnet engage in the locking part. Do not force it ⇒
.
WARNING
● For safety reasons the bonnet must always be completely closed
when the vehicle is moving. Therefore, after closing the bonnet, always
check that the locking element is properly engaged. This is the case if
the bonnet is flush with the adjacent body panels.
● Should you notice that the bonnet is not safely secured when the ve-
hicle is moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet. Fail-
ure to do so could result in an accident.
Engine oil
General notes
The engine comes with a special, multi-grade oil that can be used all year
round.
Because the use of high-quality oil is essential for the correct operation of
the engine and its long useful life, when topping up or changing oil, use on-
ly those oils that comply with VW standards.
The specifications (VW standards) set out in the following page should ap-
pear on the container of the service oil; when the container displays the
specific standards for petrol and diesel engines together, it means that the
oil can be used for both types of engines.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
230 Checking and refilling levels
We recommend that the oil change, indicated in the Maintenance Pro-
gramme, be performed by a Technical Service or a specialised workshop.
The correct oil specifications for your engine are listed in the ⇒ page 230,
Oil properties.
Service intervals
Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife service) or fixed (dependent on
time/distance travelled).
If the PR code that appears on the back of the “Maintenance Programme”
booklet is PR QI6, this means that your vehicle has the LongLife service pro-
grammed. If it lists the codes QI1, QI2, QI3, QI4 or QI7, the interval service
is dependent on time/distance travelled.
Flexible service intervals (LongLife service intervals*)
Special oils and processes have been developed which, depending on the
characteristics and individual driving profiles, enable the extension of the
oil change service (LongLife service intervals).
Because this oil is essential for extending the service intervals, it must only
be used observing the following indications:
● Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service intervals.
● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low
⇒ page 231 and LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to top up
(once) with oil for fixed service intervals (up to a maximum of 0.5 litres).
Fixed service intervals*
If your vehicle does not have the “LongLife service interval” or it has been
disabled (by request), you may use oils for fixed service intervals, which al-
so appear in ⇒ page 230, Oil properties. In this case, your vehicle must be
serviced after a fixed interval of 1 year/15 000 km (10 000 miles)(whatever
comes first) ⇒ Booklet Maintenance Programme.
● In exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low
⇒ page 231 and you cannot obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, you
can put in a small quantity of oil conforming to the specification ACEA A2 or
ACEA A3 (petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (diesel engines) (up to 0.5
l).
Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*
All Exeo vehicles with a diesel engine have a diesel particulate filter and
must only be filled with VW 507 00 engine oil, which has a low level of soot
formation. Using other types of oil will cause a higher soot concentration
and reduce the life of the DPF. Therefore:
● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.
● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low
⇒ page 231 and you cannot obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, you
can use a small quantity of oil (once) conforming to the VW 506 00,
VW 506 01, VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or ACEA B3/ACEA B4 specification. (up
to 0.5 l).
Oil properties
Engine type Specification
Petrol VW 502 00/VW 504 00
Diesel. Engines with particu-
late filter (DPF)
a)
VW 507 00
a)
Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.
Oils for LongLife service intervals*
Engine type Specification
Petrol VW 504 00
Diesel VW 507 00
231Checking and refilling levels
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration
caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty.
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the
corresponding VW specifications and recommend keeping it in the vehicle.
This way, the correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if nee-
ded.
Checking the oil level
Fig. 170 Markings on oil
dipstick
Checking oil level
– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
– Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the operating tempera-
ture is reached and then stop.
– Wait two minutes.
– Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and
insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go.
– Then pull it out once more and check the oil level ⇒ Fig. 170. If
the oil level is too low, add more engine oil ⇒ page 232.
Oil level in area
a
– Do not add oil ⇒ in Topping up the engine oil on
page 232.
Oil level in area
b
– You can add oil, but keep the level in this zone.
Oil level in area
c
– Oil must be added. Afterwards, the oil level should be in the
lined area
B
.
Depending on how you drive and the conditions in which the vehicle is
used, oil consumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil consumption is likely
to be higher for the first 5000 km. Therefore, the engine oil level must be
checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a
journey.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
232 Checking and refilling levels
Topping up the engine oil
Fig. 171 In the engine
compartment: Engine oil
filler cap
– Unscrew cap from oil filler opening ⇒ Fig. 234.
– Carefully put in the specified grade of oil ⇒ page 230, adding
0.5 litres at a time.
– After two minutes, check the oil level once again ⇒ page 231.
– Where necessary, add more engine oil.
– Replace the oil filler cap carefully and push the dipstick all the
way in.
WARNING
● When refilling with oil, make sure no oil falls onto hot engine parts.
Failure to comply could result in fire.
● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil.
CAUTION
● The oil level must never be above area
a
. This could damage the cata-
lytic converter or the engine. Contact a specialised workshop to drain the
engine oil if necessary.
● No additives should be used with engine oil. Any damage caused by the
use of such additives would not be covered by the factory warranty.
For the sake of the environment
● Oil must not be disposed of in the drain or on the ground.
● Always observe legal requirements when disposing of empty oil canis-
ters.
Cooling system
Engine coolant specifications
The engine cooling system is supplied from the factory with a specially trea-
ted mixture of water and, at least, 40 % of the additive G 13 (TLVW 774 J).
The engine coolant additive is recognisable by its purple colour. This mix-
ture of water and additive gives the necessary frost protection down to
-25 °C (-13 °F) and protects the light alloy parts of the cooling system
against corrosion. It also prevents scaling and considerably raises the boil-
ing point of the coolant.
To protect the engine cooling system, the percentage of additive must al-
ways be at least 40 %, even in warm climates where anti-freeze protection is
not required.
If greater frost protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of
additive can be increased. However, the percentage of additive should not
exceed 60 %, as this would reduce the frost protection and, in turn, de-
crease the cooling capacity.
233Checking and refilling levels
When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture of distilled water and, at
least, 40 % of the G 13 or G 12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive (both are
purple) to obtain an optimum anticorrosion protection ⇒
. The mixture of
G 13 with G 12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G 12 (red) or G 11 (green-blue) engine
coolants will significantly reduce the anticorrosion protection and should,
therefore be avoided ⇒
.
WARNING
If there is not enough anti-freeze in the coolant system, the engine may
fail leading to serious damage. ● Please make sure that the percentage
of additive is correct with respect to the lowest expected ambient tem-
perature in the zone in which the vehicle is to be used. ● When the out-
side temperature is very low, the coolant could freeze and the vehicle
would be immobilised. In this case, the heating would not work either
and inadequately dressed passengers could die of cold.
CAUTION
The original additives should never be mixed with coolants which are not
approved by SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causing severe damage to
the engine and the engine cooling system.
● If the fluid in the expansion tank is not purple but is, for example,
brown, this indicates that the G 13 additive has been mixed with an inade-
quate coolant. The coolant must be changed as soon as possible if this is
the case! This could result in serious faults and engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Coolants and additives can contaminate the environment. If any fluids are
spilled, they should be collected and correctly disposed of, with respect to
the environment.
Checking the coolant level
The coolant level can be checked visually.
Fig. 172 Engine com-
partment: Coolant fluid
deposit
– Switch the ignition off.
– Check the coolant level on coolant fluid expansion tank
⇒ Fig. 172. When the engine is cold, it should be between the
“min” and “max” marks. When the engine is hot, it may be
slightly above the “max” mark.
Its location is shown in the corresponding general overview of the engine
compartment.
The coolant level should be checked with the engine switched off.
The coolant level is monitored by a warning lamp on the instrument panel
display
⇒
page 79. However, we recommend that it should be checked oc-
casionally.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
234 Checking and refilling levels
Coolant fluid loss
Any loss of coolant fluid normally indicates a leak in the cooling system. In
this case the cooling system should be inspected by a specialised work-
shop without delay. It is not sufficient merely to top up the coolant fluid.
If there are no leaks in the system, a loss of coolant fluid can only occur if
the coolant boils and is forced out of the system as a result of overheating.
CAUTION
Radiator sealants must not be added to the coolant fluid. Such additives
could seriously impair the function of the cooling system.
Topping up the coolant fluid
Be careful when topping up with coolant fluid.
– Switch the ignition off.
– Wait for the engine to cool down.
– Cover the cap on the expansion tank ⇒ Fig. 172 with a cloth,
and carefully unscrew the cap anticlockwise ⇒
.
– Add coolant fluid.
– Screw on the cap tightly.
Make sure that the coolant fluid meets the required specifications
⇒
page 232. Do not use a different type of antifreeze if G12++ antifreeze is
not available. In this case, use only water and bring the antifreeze concen-
tration back up to the correct level as soon as possible.
Always top up with new coolant fluid.
Do not fill above the “max” mark. Excess coolant fluid is forced out of the
system through the valve in the filler cap when the engine gets hot.
If a lot of coolant fluid has been lost, wait for the engine to cool down before
putting in cold coolant. Failure to do so could result in serious engine dam-
age.
WARNING
● The cooling system is under pressure. Do not unscrew the cap on the
expansion tank when the engine is hot. Failure to comply could result in
burns.
● The antifreeze and coolant fluid can be a health hazard. Therefore,
the antifreeze should be stored in the original container in a safe place
out of reach of children. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.
For the sake of the environment
Drained off coolant should not be used again. Drain off the used coolant in-
to a suitable container and dispose of it in the proper manner (observe envi-
ronmental regulations).
Radiator fan
The radiator fan can start running spontaneously.
The auxiliary fan can continue to run for as long as 10 minutes after stop-
ping the engine, even after the ignition is switched off. It may also start run-
ning suddenly
⇒
after some while if
● Stored heat raises the coolant temperature, or
● The hot engine compartment is additionally heated up by the sun.
235Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment be aware that the radiator fan
may start running suddenly, leading to the risk of injury.
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades
Windscreen washer system
Plain water is not sufficient for the windscreen washer sys-
tem.
Fig. 173 In the engine
compartment: Cap of
windscreen washer fluid
reservoir
The container for the windscreen washer contains the cleaning fluid for the
windscreen and the headlight washer system*. The container is located in
the engine compartment (front left). The filler cap is marked with the symbol
⇒ Fig. 173.
The capacity of the container is listed in ⇒ page 297.
Plain water on its own is not enough to clean the glass properly. It is there-
fore advisable to add a suitable washer fluid additive (with wax solvent) to
the water. A washer fluid with freeze-resistant additive should be used in
winter.
CAUTION
● Never put radiator antifreeze or other additives into the windscreen
washer fluid.
● Never use washer fluid which contains paint thinners or solvents as it
can damage the paintwork.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
236 Checking and refilling levels
Changing windscreen wiper blades
If the windscreen wiper blades are in perfect condition, you
will benefit from an improved visibility. Damaged wiper
blades should be replaced immediately.
Fig. 174 Removing the
wiper blade
Fig. 175 Fitting the wip-
er blade
Removing the wiper blade
– Lift the wiper arm away from the windscreen.
– Slide the retainer catch on the wiper blade in the direction indi-
cated ⇒ Fig. 174
A
. Hold onto the wiper blade at the same
time.
– Pull the wiper blade
B
out of its mounting on the wiper arm.
Fitting the wiper blade
– Slide back the retainer catch on the new wiper blade. The
mounting on the wiper blade should now be visible.
– Fit the new wiper blade into the mounting on the wiper arm
⇒ Fig. 175
C
.
– Slide the retainer catch on the wiper blade in direction
D
so
that it clicks into place on the wiper arm.
– Fold the wiper arm back down onto the glass.
If the windscreen wipers smear, they should be replaced if they are dam-
aged, or cleaned if they are soiled.
If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the wind-
screen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a special-
ised workshop and corrected if necessary.
237Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!
● The ignition must not be switched on while the front wiper arms are
in a raised position. The wipers would return to their park position and
damage the paintwork on the bonnet.
● To prevent smearing on the windscreen, the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly using a window cleaner solution. If the wiper blades
are very dirty (e.g. insects etc.), they should be cleaned using a sponge
or cloth. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
● For safety reasons, the wiper blades should be changed once or twice
a year.
CAUTION
● Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the windscreen.
● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to
clean the windows. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades.
● Never move the windscreen wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually.
This could cause damage.
● Do not pull the windscreen wipers forward unless they are in the service
position. Otherwise the bonnet could be damaged.
Brake fluid
Checking the brake fluid level
The brake fluid level can be checked visually.
Fig. 176 Engine com-
partment: markings on
brake fluid reservoir
The brake fluid level must be between the “Min” and “Max”
⇒
Fig. 176
markings.
The fluid level may drop slightly after a period of time due to the automatic
compensation for brake pad wear. This is quite normal.
However, if the level goes down noticeably in a short time, or drops below
the “Min” mark, there may be a leak in the brake system. If the fluid level in
the reservoir is too low, this will be indicated by the brake warning lamp
⇒
page 71 and
⇒
page 78. If this should happen, take the vehicle to a spe-
cialised workshop immediately and have the brake system inspected.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
238 Checking and refilling levels
Topping up and changing the brake fluid
It is best to have the brake fluid changed by a professional.
Brake fluid absorbs moisture. Therefore, in the course of time it will absorb
water from the air. If the water content in the brake fluid is too high, the
brake system could corrode. In addition, the boiling point of the brake fluid
will be considerably reduced. This could adversely affect the braking ability
in certain circumstances.
For this reason the brake fluid must be changed periodically.
Your vehicle's Service Plan will tell you when the brake fluid has to be re-
newed.
We recommend you have the brake fluid changed as part of a regular In-
spection Service at a Technical Service. They are familiar with the procedure
and have the necessary special tools and spare parts as well as the proper
facilities for disposing of the old fluid.
Be sure to always use the correct brake fluid. Only use brake fluid that ex-
pressly meets VW 501 14 standards.
You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake fluid in a SEAT dealership or SEAT
Official Service. If none is available, use only high quality brake fluid that
meets DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USA Standards FMVSS 116 DOT
4.
Using any other kind of brake fluid or one that is not of a high quality may
affect operation of the brake system and reduce its effectiveness. Never use
a brake fluid if the container does not state that it complies with VW 501 14,
DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USA standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4.
WARNING
● Brake fluid must always be kept closed in its original container. Keep
out of the reach of children. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.
● If the brake fluid is left in the system for too long and the brakes are
subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles may form in the brake system.
This would seriously affect the efficiency of the brakes and the safety of
the vehicle, leading to the risk of accident.
CAUTION
Please note that brake fluid will attack the paintwork on contact.
For the sake of the environment
The brake pads and brake fluid must be collected and disposed of accord-
ing the applicable regulations. The SEAT Technical Service network has the
necessary equipment and qualified personnel for collecting and disposing
of this waste material.
Vehicle battery
General notes
All work on batteries requires specialist knowledge.
The battery is virtually maintenance-free and is checked in the Inspection
Services.
We recommend replacing the battery after 5 years.
239Checking and refilling levels
Disconnecting the battery
If the battery is disconnected, some of the vehicle's functions will become
inoperative (e.g. electric windows). These functions will require resetting af-
ter the battery is reconnected. For this reason, the battery should only be
disconnected from the vehicle's electrical system when absolutely necessa-
ry.
Long periods of non-use
The battery will gradually lose its charge because certain electrical equip-
ment continues to draw current even when the ignition is off. If you park the
vehicle for long periods of time in winter you should take the battery out of
the vehicle and store it in a place protected from frost. This way it will not
freeze and become damaged. At warm outside temperatures it is sufficient
to disconnect the negative terminal of the battery. Even when the battery is
not connected you should charge it from time to time.
Winter operation
The battery is drained more in cold weather, which means that the starting
power is reduced. For this reason, have the battery checked and charged if
necessary before the start of winter.
Replacing the battery
A replacement battery must have the same capacity, voltage and current rat-
ing. It must also have the same dimensions as the original, factory-fitted
battery and have sealed caps. The SEAT batteries which have been specially
developed fulfil the maintenance, performance and safety specifications for
your vehicle.
We recommend you use maintenance-free batteries.
WARNING
● All work on batteries requires specialist knowledge. If work is re-
quired on the battery, this should be performed by a Technical Service or
specialised workshop. Danger of caustic burns and explosion!
● The battery must not be opened. Never try to change the battery's liq-
uid level. Explosive gas is released from the battery that could cause an
explosion.
CAUTION
● The battery holder and clamps must always be correctly secured.
● Before starting any work on the battery, always observe the warnings
listed under ⇒
.
For the sake of the environment
Batteries contain toxic substances including sulphuric acid and lead.
Therefore, they must be disposed of in line with environmental regulations
and must not be disposed of with ordinary household waste. Make sure dis-
connected batteries cannot tip over. Sulphuric acid could be spilt!
Important safety warnings for handling a vehicle battery
The battery is located at the back of the engine compartment ⇒ page 297.
Wear eye protection
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear protective gloves
and eye protection!
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited!
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
240 Checking and refilling levels
A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the bat-
tery is under charge.
Keep children away from acid and batteries!
WARNING
Always be aware of the danger of injury and chemical burns as well as
the risk of accident or fire when working on the battery and the electrical
system:
● Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid
and particles containing lead.
● Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear protective gloves and eye
protection. Do not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through the
vents. Rinse battery acid from eyes immediately for several minutes with
clear water. Then seek medical care immediately. Neutralise any acid
splashes on the skin or clothing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with
plenty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi-
ately.
● Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited. When han-
dling cables and electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks and electro-
static charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can
cause injury.
● A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is
under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room
only.
● Keep children away from acid and batteries.
● Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the en-
gine, the ignition and all consumers. The negative cable on the battery
must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need only
switch off the light.
WARNING (Continued)
● Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you
disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.
● When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle on-board network,
disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.
● Switch off all electrical consumers before reconnecting the battery.
Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never re-
verse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.
● Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could
result in explosions and chemical burns. Always replace a battery which
has frozen. A flat battery can freeze at temperatures around 0 °C.
● Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery.
● Never use a defective battery. This could cause an explosion. Replace
a damaged battery immediately.
CAUTION
● Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the en-
gine is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic com-
ponents.
● Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time,
as the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.
● If the vehicle is left standing in cold conditions for a long period, protect
the battery from freezing. If it freezes it will be damaged.
Charging the battery
A fully-charged battery is important for reliable starting.
– Note the warnings ⇒
in Important safety warnings for han-
dling a vehicle battery on page 240 and ⇒
.
241Checking and refilling levels
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– Only if fast-charging: both battery cables must be disconnected
(first the negative cable, then the positive cable).
– Connect the charger cables to the battery terminals, noting the
colour code (red = positive; black or brown = negative).
– Now connect the battery charger to the power socket and switch
on.
– After charging the battery: switch off the battery charger and
disconnect the power socket cable.
– Finally disconnect the charger cables from the battery.
– If necessary, reconnect both battery cables to the battery (first
the positive cable, then the negative cable).
When charging with a low current (for instance with a small battery charger)
the battery does not normally have to be disconnected. However, both bat-
tery cables must be disconnected before fast-charging the battery with a
high current. However, always follow the instructions given by the manufac-
turer of the battery charger.
The fast-charging procedure for a battery is dangerous ⇒
in Important
safety warnings for handling a vehicle battery on page 240, as it requires a
special charger and the corresponding level of knowledge. We therefore rec-
ommend that this work should only be performed by a specialised work-
shop.
A flat battery can freeze at temperatures of around 0 °C. The battery must be
defrosted before charging ⇒
. It is advisable to replace the battery if it has
frozen, because the ice can crack the battery casing and allow the battery
acid to escape.
The battery caps should not be opened while the battery is being charged.
WARNING
Never charge a frozen battery. Failure to comply could result in an explo-
sion.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
242 Wheels and tyres
Wheels and tyres
Wheels
General notes
Avoiding damage
– If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very
slowly and at a right angle.
– Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
– Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters,
etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.
Storing tyres
– When you remove the tyres, mark them in order to maintain the
same direction of rotation when they are installed again.
– When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a
cool, dry and preferably dark location.
– Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel
rims.
New tyres
New tyres have to be run in.
The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of
tyre and the tread pattern.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily visible. If you notice unusual
vibrations or the vehicle pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of
the tyres is damaged. The tyres should be checked immediately by a Techni-
cal Service.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with
directional tread. Always observe the direction of rotation indicated when
fitting the wheel. This guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-
planing, excessive noise and wear.
WARNING
● New tyres do not have maximum grip during the first 500 km
(300 miles). Drive particularly carefully to avoid possible accidents.
● Never drive with damaged tyres. This may cause an accident.
● If you notice unusual vibrations or if the vehicle pulls to one side
when driving, stop the vehicle immediately and check the tyres for dam-
age.
Checking tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the
inside of the fuel tank flap.
1. Read the required tyre inflation pressure from the sticker. The
values refer to Summer tyres. For Winter tyres, you must add
0.2 bar to the values given on the sticker.
243Wheels and tyres
2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are
cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be re-
duced.
3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.
Tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pres-
sure should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting
a journey.
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the
fuel tank flap. The tyre pressure values given are for cold tyres. Do not re-
duce the slightly raised pressures of warm tyres ⇒
.
WARNING
● Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking the tyre
pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low,
there is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds.
● A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!
● At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes
more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation
and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.
● If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prema-
turely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
Tyre pressure monitoring*
The tyre pressure monitoring system constantly checks the
pressure of the tyres.
The system warns the driver in the event of a loss of pressure by means of
symbols and messages in the instrument panel display.
Note that tyre pressure also depends on tyre temperature. Tyre pressure in-
creases about 0.1 bar for each 10 °C in tyre temperature increase. The tyre
heats up while the vehicle is being driven and the tyre pressure will rise ac-
cordingly. For this reason, you should only adjust the tyre pressures when
they are cold (i.e. approximately at ambient temperature).
To ensure that the tyre pressure monitoring system works reliably, you
should check and, if necessary, adjust the tyre pressures at regular intervals
and store the correct pressures (reference values) in the system.
A tyre pressure information label is attached to the inside of the fuel tank
flap.
WARNING
● Never adjust tyre pressure when the tyres are hot. This may damage
or even burst the tyres. Risk of accident!
● An insufficiently inflated tyre flexes a lot more at high speeds and
causes significant heating of the tyre. Under these conditions, the tyre
bead may be released or the tyre may burst. Risk of accident!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel consumption and tyre wear.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
244 Wheels and tyres
Significant tyre pressure loss
The tyre symbol is displayed and indicates that the tyre pressure
of at least one tyre is insufficient.
– Stop the vehicle.
– Switch the ignition off.
– Check the tyre(s).
– Change the wheel if necessary.
Tyre pressure monitoring (RKA+)*
The tyre pressure monitor display on the instrument panel
indicates if the pressure is too low.
Fig. 177 Detailed view of
the centre console: But-
ton for the tyre pressure
monitoring system
The tyre pressure monitoring system makes use of the ABS sensors to com-
pare the rolling circumference and the frequency characteristics of the
wheels. If the rolling circumference or frequency characteristic changes on
one or more wheels, the tyre pressure warning lamp will light up. The
fault will also be indicated by a warning buzzer. The position of the affected
tyre will also be shown (if only one tyre is affected) on the centre display of
the instrument panel.
The rolling circumference and frequency characteristics can change if:
● the tyre pressure is too low.
● the tyre has suffered structural damage.
● the wheels or the inflation pressures have been changed without initial-
ising the system (see Adjusting the tyre pressure settings).
● there is a greater load on the wheels of one axle (e.g. if you are carrying
more passengers or luggage).
● the road surface under the left wheels is different to the road surface un-
der the right wheels for a long period.
● when driving with snow chains.
Adjusting the tyre pressure settings (initialising the tyre pressure
monitoring system)
After any incident regarding the wheels of your vehicle, e.g. after modifying
the tyre pressure ⇒ page 246 or after changing or swapping wheels
⇒ page 246 you should - with the vehicle at a standstill and the engine run-
ning - press ⇒ Fig. 177. The yellow warning lamp will light up. Hold the
button down for 2 seconds until the warning lamp goes out and an acoustic
warning is given. You can now release the button.
If the wheels are subjected to extreme stress (e.g. heavy load), the tyre
pressure must be increased to the recommended value for the maximum
load (see the adhesive label on the inside of the fuel tank flap) and then
initialise the system.
245Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure warning lamp on
When you switch on the ignition, the tyre pressure warning lamp will
light up for about 2 seconds. There is a fault in the system if the indicator
stays on permanently after switching on the ignition. The instrument panel
also display TMPS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System). Please contact the
nearest specialised workshop as soon as possible.
The tyre pressure warning lamp lights up if the tyre pressure on one or
more wheels is significantly lower than the tyre pressure setting which was
confirmed by the driver ⇒
.
WARNING
● If the tyre pressure warning lamp lights up you must slow down
immediately and avoid any severe braking or steering manoeuvres. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible and check the tyres and their pressure.
● The driver is responsible for maintaining correct tyre pressures.
Therefore, the tyre pressure must be regularly checked.
● Under certain conditions (e.g. driving at high speeds, on ice and snow
or on poor road surfaces) the tyre pressure warning lamp may not light
up immediately or not at all.
● Please ask your Technical Service or specialised workshop whether
run-flat tyres can be used on your vehicle. Fitting this type of tyre in an
undue manner could lead to your driving licence being taken away from
you. Furthermore, it may led to damage to the vehicle or, under certain
circumstances, may cause accidents.
● If you change normal tyres for run-flat tyres or vice versa, the control
unit must be reprogrammed by the Technical Service or a specialised
workshop.
Note
If you did not press the button for the tyre pressure monitoring system to
confirm a new tyre pressure setting after making changes to the tyre pres-
sures or changing one or more wheels, the warning lamp may light up
although the tyre pressures are correct. In this case, stop the vehicle as
soon as possible and, after examining the tyres, press the button for the
tyre pressure monitoring system.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
246 Wheels and tyres
Tyre useful life
The useful life of tyres is dependent on tyre pressure, driving
style and fitting.
Fig. 178 Tyre tread wear
indicators
Fig. 179 Diagram for
changing wheels
Wear indicators
The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators”
⇒ Fig. 178, running across the tread. Depending on the make, there will be
6 to 8 of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Markings on the tyre sidewall
(for instance the letters “TWI” or other symbols) indicate the positions of
the tread wear indicators. The minimum tread depth required by law is
1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indicators).
Worn tyres must be replaced. Different figures may apply in export countries
⇒
.
Tyre pressure
Under-inflation or over-inflation will reduce the life of the tyres considerably
and also impair the vehicle's handling. The inflation pressures are listed on
a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap.
Correct inflation pressures are very important, especially at high speeds.
The pressure should therefore be checked at least once a month and before
starting any long journey.
Tyre pressure monitoring (RKA+)*
Monitoring of the tyre pressures is based on the tyre pressures you have
stored. The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot function as intended if
you store tyre pressure settings for a normal load, but then drive with the
vehicle fully laden. The tyre pressure must be adapted to the actual load
and stored accordingly in the tyre pressure monitoring system ⇒ page 244.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.
Changing wheels around
If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisa-
ble to change them around as shown ⇒ Fig. 179. The useful life of all the
tyres will then be about the same time.
247Wheels and tyres
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, various factors encoun-
tered in normal driving can cause them to become unbalanced, which re-
sults in steering vibration.
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause exces-
sive wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be reba-
lanced when a new tyre is fitted.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety
of the vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel
alignment checked by a Technical Service.
WARNING
There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyre bursts during driving!
● The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread wear indica-
tors are worn ⇒ page 246. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Worn tyres do not grip well at high speeds on wet roads. There is also a
greater risk of aquaplaning.
● At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes
more. This causes it to overheat. This can cause tread separation and tyre
blow-out. Risk of accident. Always observe the recommended tyre pres-
sures.
● If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the running gear
checked by a Technical Service.
● Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.
● Damaged wheels and tyres must be replaced immediately!
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
Run-flat tyres*
Run-flat tyres allow you to continue driving even with a
punctured tyre, in the majority of cases.
In vehicles that are factory-fitted with run-flat tyres
1)
the loss of tyre
pressure is indicated on the instrument panel.
Driving with run-flat tyres (emergency running)
– Leave the ESC/ASR on (Electronic Stability Control), or switch it
on ⇒ page 69.
– Continue driving carefully and slowly (80 km/h (50 mph) maxi-
mum).
– Avoid sudden manoeuvres and sharp turns.
– Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.
– Pay attention if the ESC/ASR activates often, if smoke comes
from the tyres or there is a smell of rubber, the vehicle vibrates
or there are clattering noises. If any of these occur, stop the ve-
hicle.
The run-flat tyres have a tag on the side of the tyre, with the description:
“DSST”, “Eufonia”, “RFT”, “ROF”, “RSC”, “SSR” or “ZP”.
The sides of this type of tyre are reinforced. When the tyres lose air they are
supported on the sides (emergency driving).
The loss of pressure in the tyre is shown on the instrument panel. You can
then drive a maximum of 80 km (50 miles) and if the circumstances are fa-
vourable (for example, low load), even more.
1)
Depending upon version and country.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
248 Wheels and tyres
The damaged tyre should be changed as soon as possible. The rim should
be checked in a specialised workshop to detect possible damage and re-
place it if necessary. We recommend you contact Technical Service. If more
than one tyre is being used under emergency conditions, this reduces the
distance which can be travelled.
Starting driving in emergency conditions
When loss in tyre pressure is displayed on the instrument panel, this means
that at least one tyre is being driven in emergency conditions ⇒
.
End of emergency operation
Do not drive on if:
● smoke is coming from one of the tyres,
● there is a smell of rubber,
● the vehicle vibrates,
● there is a rattling noise.
When is it no longer possible to continue driving even using run-flat tyres?
● If the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) does not function.
● If the tyre pressure monitoring system* does not work.
● If one of the tyres has been severely damaged in an accident, etc. If a
tyre has been badly damaged there is a risk that parts of the tread can be
thrown off and cause damage to the fuel lines, brake pipes or fuel filler.
● It is also advisable to stop driving if severe vibrations occur, or if the
wheel starts overheating and gives off smoke.
WARNING
When driving in emergency conditions, the driving quality of the vehicle
is considerably impaired.
● The maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) is subject to
road and weather conditions. Please observe legal requirements when
doing so.
● Avoid sharp turns and rapid manoeuvres, and brake earlier than usu-
al.
● Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.
● If one or more tyres are being driven in emergency conditions, the
driving quality of the vehicle is impaired and there is a risk of accident.
Note
● The run-flat tyres do not “deflate” on losing pressure because they are
supported on the reinforced sides. Therefore defects in the tyre cannot be
detected with a visual inspection.
● Snow chains must not be used on front tyres used in emergency condi-
tions.
New tyres and wheels
New tyres and wheels have to be run in.
The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design. The
tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteris-
tics of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and
safe handling
⇒
.
Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front
tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it
easier to choose the correct tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designations
marked on the sidewall, for example:
249Wheels and tyres
195/65 R15 91T
This contains the following information:
Tyre width in mm
Height/width ratio in %
Tyre construction: Radial
Rim diameter in inches
Load rating code
Speed rating
The tyres could also have the following information:
● A direction of rotation symbol
● “Reinforced” denotes heavy-duty tyres.
The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only
on the inner side of the wheel).
“DOT... 1103...” means, for example, that the tyre was produced in the 11th
week of 2003.
We recommend that work on tyres and wheels be carried out by a Technical
Service. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary spe-
cial tools and spare parts as well as the proper facilities for disposing of the
old tyres.
Any Technical Service has full information on the technical requirements
when installing or changing tyres, wheels or wheel trims.
195
65
R
15
91
T
WARNING
● We recommend that you use only wheels and tyres which have been
approved by SEAT for your model. Failure to do so could impair vehicle
handling. Risk of accident.
● Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are more than 6 years old. If
you have no alternative, you should drive slowly and with extra care at all
times.
● Never use old tyres or those with an unknown history of use.
● If wheel trims are retrofitted, you must ensure that the flow of air to
the brakes is not restricted. This could cause the brake system to over-
heat.
● All four wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size
(rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern.
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country con-
cerned.
Note
● For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from
other vehicles. This can also apply to wheels of the same model. The use of
wheels or tyres which have not been approved by SEAT for use with your
model may invalidate the vehicle's type approval for use on public roads.
● If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the
vehicle (e.g. winter tyres) you should only use the spare tyre for a short peri-
od of time and drive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel as soon as
possible.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
250 Wheels and tyres
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque.
The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are
fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped
bolt heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and
that the brake system functions correctly.
In certain circumstances, you should not use wheel bolts from a different
vehicle, even if it is the same model ⇒ page 222.
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel
bolts should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench. ⇒
The tightening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly, the wheel could become
loose while driving. Risk of accident.
● The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or
oil to them.
● Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel.
● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loos-
en whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening tor-
que is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.
CAUTION
The prescribed tightening torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels
is 120 Nm.
Winter tyres
Winter tyres will improve the vehicles handling on snow and
ice.
In winter conditions winter tyres will considerably improve the vehicle's han-
dling. The design of summer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread pattern)
gives less grip on ice and snow.
Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure 0.2 bar higher than the pres-
sures specified for summer tyres (see sticker on fuel tank flap).
Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.
Information on permitted winter tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's reg-
istration documentation. Use only radial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in
the vehicle documentation also apply to winter tyres.
Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the tread is worn down to a depth
of 4 mm.
The speed rating code ⇒ page 248, New tyres and wheels determines the
following speed limits for winter tyres: ⇒
max. 160 km/h (100 mph)
max. 180 km/h (110 mph)
max. 190 km/h (118 mph)
max. 210 km/h (130 mph)
In some countries, vehicles which can exceed the speed rating of the fitted
tyre must have an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of view. These
stickers are available from your Technical Service. The legal requirements of
each country must be followed.
Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with
summer tyres handle better when the roads are free of snow and ice.
Q
S
T
H
251Wheels and tyres
If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the notes on the spare wheel
⇒ page 248, New tyres and wheels.
WARNING
The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Other-
wise, this could lead to tyre damage and risk of accident.
For the sake of the environment
Fit your summer tyres again as soon as possible. They are quieter, do not
wear so quickly and reduce fuel consumption.
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels, and only to certain tyre
sizes
⇒
page 296.
205/55 R16 15 mm chains
225/45 R17 9 mm chains
225/40 R18 7 mm chains
Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains. For
safety reasons cover caps, available in any Technical Service, must then be
fitted over the wheel bolts.
WARNING
Observe the fitting instructions provided by the snow chain manufactur-
er.
CAUTION
Remove the snow chains to drive on roads without snow. Otherwise they
will impair handling, damage the tyres and wear out very quickly.
Note
● In some countries, the speed limit for using snow chains is 50 km/h
(30 mph). The legal requirements of the country should be followed.
● We recommend that you ask your Technical Service for information
about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
252 If and when
If and when
Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel
Tools
The tools and jack are stored under the floor panel in the
luggage compartment.
Fig. 180 Toolbox and
jack
The tools
A
and jack
B
⇒ Fig. 180 are stored under the floor pan-
el in the luggage compartment.
– Lift the floor panel using the plastic handle.
– Hook the handle
C
onto the luggage compartment weather
strip.
– Release the toolbox by pulling up the handle on the box.
– Take out the tools or jack.
– Replace the floor panel before closing the rear lid.
The tool kit includes:
● A hook for removing wheel covers* or hub caps
● Box spanner for wheel bolts
● Towline anchorage
● An adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
Before replacing the jack in the storage bin, wind down the arm of the jack
as far as it will go.
Some of the tools listed are only provided in certain models or are optional
extras.
WARNING
● The factory-supplied jack is only designed for changing wheels on
this model. On no account attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles or
other loads. Risk of injury.
● Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Failure to do so
could result in an accident.
● If work is to be carried out underneath the vehicle, this must be se-
cured by suitable stands. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury.
253If and when
Tyre mobility system
The tyre mobility system is stored under the floor panel in
the luggage compartment.
Fig. 181 Tyre Mobility
System under floor panel
in luggage compartment
– Take hold of the handle and fold back the floor panel in the lug-
gage compartment.
– Take out the tyre mobility system.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tyre Mobility System in case of a puncture.
The tyre mobility system consists of a container with sealing compound and
a compressor to generate the required tyre pressure.
Instructions for using the sealant compound and the compressor are inclu-
ded with the sealant can.
Spare steel rim wheel
The spare steel rim wheel is carried in the wheel well under
the floor panel in the luggage compartment. It is only inten-
ded for temporary use over short distances.
Fig. 182 Spare steel rim
wheel
Taking out the spare wheel
– Turn the plastic knob ⇒ Fig. 182 anticlockwise.
– Take out the spare wheel.
Securing the defective wheel in the spare wheel well
– Place wheel in spare wheel well in the luggage compartment.
– Secure the wheel by turning plastic knob clockwise.
– Replace the floor panel before closing the rear lid.
Your vehicle can be factory-equipped with a spare steel wheel. The spare
wheel does not usually meet the same performance standards as the
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
254 If and when
wheels fitted on the vehicle because of the wheel/tyre dimensions, rubber
composition, tread pattern, etc. Therefore, note the following restrictions:
● The spare steel wheel is designed only for your vehicle model. Do not
attempt to mount the wheel on any vehicle but your own.
● Your vehicle will have different driving characteristics when the spare
steel rim wheel is mounted ⇒
.
● The spare wheel is only intended for temporary use after having a flat
tyre. Replace the spare wheel with a normal wheel that has the proper tyre
dimensions as soon as possible.
● If the size of the spare steel rim wheel is different to that of the other
wheels, it is unlikely that snow chains suitable for the other wheels will fit it.
WARNING
● After mounting the spare steel rim wheel, the tyre pressure must be
checked and corrected as soon as possible. The tyre pressure must corre-
spond to the vehicle load (consult the table containing the inflation pres-
sures). Otherwise there is danger of causing an accident. Use the highest
tyre pressure as indicated in the table.
● Do not drive faster than 80 km/h, as higher speeds can cause an acci-
dent.
● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering, as this
could cause an accident.
Changing a wheel
Preparation work
What you must do before changing a wheel.
– If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away
from the flow of traffic as possible. Choose a location that is as
level as possible.
– All occupants should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a
safe place (e.g. behind the roadside crash barrier).
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Engage first gear.
– When towing a trailer: Unhitch the trailer from your vehicle.
– Take the tools and the spare wheel ⇒ page 252 out of the lug-
gage compartment.
WARNING
If you have a puncture in heavy traffic, switch on the hazard warning
lights and place the warning triangle in a visible location. This is for your
own safety and also warns other road users.
CAUTION
If you have to change the tyre on a gradient, block the wheel opposite the
wheel being changed by placing a stone or similar object under it to prevent
the vehicle from rolling away.
255If and when
Note
Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
Changing a wheel
Change the wheel as described below.
– Remove the wheel cover.
– Loosen the wheel bolts ⇒ page 256.
– Raise the vehicle with the jack ⇒ page 257.
– Take off the wheel with the flat tyre and then put on the spare
wheel ⇒ page 258.
– Lower the vehicle.
– Tighten the wheel bolts firmly in diagonal sequence with the
box spanner ⇒ page 256.
– Replace the cover.
After changing a wheel
After changing the wheel, there are still tasks to complete.
– Place the wheel with the defective tyre in the spare wheel well
and secure it.
– Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment.
– The inflation pressure of the newly fitted spare tyre must be
checked as soon as possible.
– Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon
as possible with a torque wrench. It must be 120 Nm (always
when cold)
– Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as possible.
Note
● If you notice that the wheel bolts are rusty and difficult to turn when
changing a wheel, they must be replaced before having the tightening tor-
que checked.
● For safety reasons, drive at moderate speeds until the wheel bolt tight-
ening torque has been checked.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
256 If and when
Loosening and tightening the wheel bolts
The wheel bolts must be loosened before raising the vehicle.
Fig. 183 Changing a
wheel: Loosen the wheel
bolts
Loosening
– Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt
1)
.
– Grip the box spanner as close to the end as possible and turn
the wheel bolts about one turn anticlockwise ⇒ Fig. 183 (ar-
row).
Tightening
– Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt
1)
.
– Grip the box spanner as close to the end as possible and tight-
en the bolt firmly by turning clockwise.
WARNING
Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle
with the jack. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Note
● If the wheel bolt does not come loose, it may be possible to release it by
pushing down the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the
vehicle for support and take care not to slip.
1)
An adapter is required to unscrew or tighten the anti-theft wheel bolts* ⇒ page 258.
257If and when
Raising the vehicle
In order to remove the wheel, the vehicle must be raised
with a jack.
Fig. 184 Changing a
wheel: Jack position
points
Fig. 185 Changing a
wheel: Jack
– Position the vehicle jack under the door sill at the jacking point
closest to the wheel being changed ⇒ Fig. 184 -arrows-.
– Wind up the jack under the jacking point until the claw of the
jack is directly below the vertical rib under the door sill.
– Align the jack so that the arm of the jack fits on the rib under
the door sill ⇒ Fig. 185
A
and the movable base plate of the
jack
B
is flat on the ground.
– Raise the vehicle until the defective wheel is just clear of the
ground.
Recesses at the front and rear of the door sills mark the jacking points
⇒ Fig. 184 -arrows-. There is only one jacking point for each wheel. Do not
fit the jack anywhere else.
The distance from the jacking points to the wheel arches is approximately
15 cm at the front and 25 cm at the rear.
An unstable surface under the jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the
jack. Therefore, the jack must be fitted on solid ground offering good sup-
port. Use a large, stable base if necessary. On a hard, slippery surface (such
as tiles) use a rubber mat or similar to prevent the jack from slipping.
WARNING
● Take all precautions so that the base of the jack does not slip. Failure
to do so could result in an accident.
● The vehicle can be damaged if the jack is not applied at the correct
jacking points. There is also a risk of injury since the jack can slip off
suddenly if it is not properly engaged.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
258 If and when
Removing and fitting the wheel
For removal and fitting the wheel, the following tasks must
be completed.
After loosening the wheel bolts and raising the vehicle with the
jack, change the wheel as described below:
Removing a wheel
– Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box spanner and place them
on a clean surface.
Fitting a wheel
– Screw on the wheel bolts in position and tighten them loosely
with a box spanner.
The wheel bolts should be clean and easily screwed. Before fitting the spare
wheel, inspect the wheel condition and hub mounting surfaces. These sur-
faces must be clean before fitting the wheel.
If tyres with a specific direction of rotation are fitted, note the direction of
rotation.
Anti-theft wheel bolts*
A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel
bolts.
Fig. 186 Anti-theft
wheel bolt
– Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it
will go ⇒ Fig. 186.
– Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the adapter.
– Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt as appropriate.
Code
The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is stamped onto the front part
of the adaptor.
The code number should be noted and kept in a safe place, as it is only by
using the code number that a duplicate adaptor can be obtained from the
SEAT Official Services.
259If and when
Tyres with directional tread pattern
Tyres with directional tread pattern must be fitted so that
they rotate in the correct direction.
A directional tread pattern can be identified by arrows on the sidewall that
point in the direction of rotation. Always note the direction of rotation indi-
cated when fitting the wheel. This is important so that these tyres can give
maximum grip and avoid excessive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.
If, in an emergency, you have to fit the spare wheel so it rotates in the wrong
direction, you must drive extremely carefully. The tyre will not give optimum
performance. This is particularly important when driving on wet roads.
To benefit from the advantages of tyres with this type of tread pattern, the
defective tyre should be replaced as soon as possible so that all tyres again
rotate in the correct direction.
Tyre repair* (Tyre-Mobility-System)
General information and safety notes
Repaired tyres are only suitable for temporary use over a
short period.
Fig. 187 The Tyre Mobi-
lity System is not suita-
ble for repairing this type
of damage to tyres.
Your vehicle is equipped with a tyre repair kit: the Tyre Mobility System.
In the event of a puncture you will find the TMS, which consists of a sealing
compound and a compressor, located under the floor panel in the luggage
compartment.
The Tyre Mobility System will reliably seal tyres damaged by foreign bodies,
provided that the cuts or punctures are no larger than approx. 4 mm.
It is not necessary to remove the foreign body from the tyre.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
260 If and when
The sealing compound must not be used in the following cases:
● If the cuts and punctures on the tyre are longer than 4 mm ⇒ Fig. 187
1
● If the wheel rim has been damaged
2
● If you have been driving with very low pressure or a completely flat tyre
3
How to use the TMS (tyre mobility system) is described in the section Re-
pairing a tyre ⇒ page 261 and in the instructions supplied with the tyre
sealant can.
The TMS (tire mobility system) can be used at outside temperatures down
to -20 °C.
WARNING
After repairing a tyre please note the following points:
● Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).
● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering.
● Vehicle handling could be impaired.
● Tyres which have been sealed using the Tyre Mobility System are only
suitable for temporary use over a short period.
● After using the tyre sealant the tyre pressure monitoring system* may
malfunction. Therefore, please drive carefully to the next available speci-
alised workshop.
● The Tyre Mobility System must NOT be used:
– If the cuts and punctures on the tyre are longer or wider than
4 mm.
– if the wheel rim has been damaged.
– If you have been driving with very low pressure or a completely flat
tyre.
● Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not
possible with the sealing product.
WARNING (Continued)
● Do not allow the sealing product to come into contact with your eyes,
skin or clothing.
● If you do come into contact with the sealing product immediately
rinse the eyes or skin affected with clean water.
● Change clothing immediately if it becomes soiled with the sealing
product.
● Make sure you do not breathe in the fumes!
● If any of the sealing product is accidentally ingested, immediately
rinse the mouth thoroughly and drink lots of water.
– Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical assistance if needed.
● If any allergic reactions should occur get medical help immediately.
● Keep the sealing product away from children.
For the sake of the environment
If you have to dispose of a sealant can, go to a specialised waste service or
to a SEAT Technical Service, where the product can be recycled in an appro-
priate waste container.
Note
● If sealing product should leak out, leave it to dry. This way you can pull it
off like a piece of foil.
● Observe the expiry date stated on the sealing compound can. Have the
sealing compound exchanged by a specialised workshop.
261If and when
Repairing a tyre
Fig. 188 Repairing a tyre
Preparations
– If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away
from the flow of traffic as possible.
– Apply the handbrake firmly to prevent the vehicle from moving
accidentally on slopes.
– Engage first gear.
– Check whether a repair is possible using the Tyre Mobility Sys-
tem ⇒ page 259.
– Ensure that all passengers leave the vehicle and move away
from the danger area ⇒
.
– Take the tyre sealant can and the compressor out of the lug-
gage compartment.
– Stick the “max. 80 km/h” adhesive, which is included with the
tyre sealant can, onto the instrument panel where the driver will
see it.
Filling the tyre
– Shake the tyre sealant can well.
– Screw the enclosed filling hose onto the sealant can as far as it
will go. This will automatically pierce the foil sealing the can.
– Take the valve cap off the tyre valve and use the enclosed valve
insert tool to unscrew the valve insert ⇒ Fig. 188.
– Place the valve insert onto a clean surface.
– Remove the sealing plug from the filling hose and insert the
hose into the tyre valve.
– Hold the tyre sealant can upside down and fill the complete
contents of the can into the tyre.
– Then disconnect the hose and screw the valve insert firmly back
into the tyre valve.
Inflating the tyre
– Screw the compressor filling hose onto the tyre valve and plug
the connector into the cigarette lighter.
– Pump the tyre up to 2.0 to 2.5 bar and monitor the pressure
shown on the pressure gauge.
– If the tyre pressure remains lower than the value specified
above drive the vehicle approx. 10 metres forwards or back-
wards, so that the sealant can spread evenly in the tyre. If the
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
262 If and when
pressure is still lower than the specification the tyre is too badly
damaged and cannot be repaired using the tyre sealant.
Final check
– After about 10 minutes, stop to check the tyre pressure.
– If tyre pressure is less than 1.3 bar, the tyre is too badly dam-
aged. Do not drive on! You should obtain professional assis-
tance.
WARNING
● If you have a puncture in heavy traffic, switch on the hazard warning
lights and place the warning triangle in a visible location. This is for your
own safety and also warns other road users.
● Make sure your passengers wait in a safe place (for instance behind
the roadside crash barrier).
● Please observe the manufacturer's safety notes on the compressor
and the instructions supplied with the tyre sealant can.
● If it is not possible to build up a tyre pressure of 2.0 bar within 6 mi-
nutes this means that the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive on!
● Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not
possible with the sealing product.
● If tyre pressure is less than 1.3 bar after driving about 10 minutes,
the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive on! Obtain technical assis-
tance.
CAUTION
Take special care if you have to repair a tyre on a slope.
Note
● Do not use the compressor for longer than 6 minutes. Otherwise, it
might overheat. When the compressor has cooled down, you can use it
again.
● If tyre sealant should leak out, leave it to dry and then pull it off like foil.
● After carrying out a tyre repair remember to buy a new tyre sealant can at
a specialised workshop. This will ensure that the Tyre Mobility System is op-
erative again.
● Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
263If and when
Fuses
Introduction
Due to the constant update of vehicles, fuse assignments depending on
equipment and the use of the same fuse for various electrical components,
at the time of printing this manual it is not possible to provide an up-to-date
summary of the electrical components fuse positions. For detailed informa-
tion about the fuse positions, please consult a Technical Service.
In general, a fuse can be assigned to various electrical components. Like-
wise, an electrical component can be protected by several fuses.
Only replace fuses when the cause of the problem has been solved. If a
newly inserted fuse blows after a short time, you must have the electrical
system checked by a specialised workshop as soon as possible.
Additional information and warnings:
● Working in the engine compartment ⇒ page 227
WARNING
The high voltages in the electrical system can give serious electrical
shocks, causing burns and even death!
● Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system.
● Take care not to cause short circuits in the electrical system.
WARNING
Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or bridging a current circuit with-
out fuses can cause a fire and serious injury.
● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only replace fuses with a fuse of
the same amperage (same colour and markings) and size.
● Never repair a fuse.
● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, staple or similar.
CAUTION
● To avoid damage to the vehicles electric system, before replacing a fuse
turn off the ignition, the lights and all electrical elements and remove the
keys from the ignition.
● If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to
another part of the electrical system.
● Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid the entry of dust or humidity.
Dirt and humidity inside fuse boxes can cause damage to the electrical sys-
tem.
Note
● One single consumer could have more than one fuse.
● Several consumers could run over one single fuse.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
264 If and when
Vehicle fuses
Fig. 189 Fuse box cover
on the left side of the
dash panel.
Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same amperage (same colour and
markings) and size.
Identifying fuses situated below the driver-side dash panel by colours
Colour Amp rating
purple 3
Light brown 5
Brown 7,5
Red 10
Blue 15
Yellow 20
White or transparent 25
Green 30
Orange 40
Opening and closing the fuse box located on the left side of the dash panel
● Opening: Remove the fuse box cover using a screwdriver ⇒ Fig. 189.
● Closing: fit the fuse cover back on.
CAUTION
● Always carefully remove the fuse box covers and refit them correctly to
avoid problems with your vehicle.
● Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid the entry of dust or humidity.
Dirt and humidity inside fuse boxes can cause damage to the electrical sys-
tem.
Note
In the vehicle, there are more fuses than those indicated in this chapter.
These should only be changed by a specialised workshop.
Replacing a blown fuse
Fig. 190 Image of a
blown fuse
265If and when
Preparation
● Switch off the ignition, lights and all electrical equipment.
● Open the corresponding fuse box ⇒ page 264.
Identifying a blown fuse
A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured ⇒ Fig. 190.
Point a lamp at the fuse. This will make it easier to see if the fuse is blown.
To replace a fuse
● Remove the fuse.
● Replace the blown fuse by one with an identical amperage rating (same
colour and markings) and identical size ⇒
.
● Replace the cover again or close the fuse box lid.
CAUTION
If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to an-
other part of the electrical system.
Bulbs
General information
You can change the following bulbs for exterior lights yourself:
● Main headlights: all bulbs (except xenon headlights)
● Tail lights: all bulbs
● Side turn signal bulb
The following bulbs can only be changed by a specialised workshop:
● Main headlights: Xenon* bulb ⇒ page 272
● Front fog lights: Bulb
As a rule, you require a certain degree of practical skill to change defective
bulbs. This applies in particular to those bulbs which are only accessible
from the engine compartment.
If in doubt, we recommend that you have defective bulbs changed by a spe-
cialised workshop or qualified mechanic.
If you do decide to change bulbs in the engine compartment yourself, be
aware of the safety risks involved ⇒ page 227 ⇒
in Types of bulbs on
page 266.
The name of many of the lamps fitted by SEAT ends in "LL". This means Long
Life. These lamps are used for functions with a long service time (dipped
beam, side lights, daylight driving, etc.). This does not apply to lamps with
a shorter service time (turn signals, etc.). A lamp with the same name ex-
cept for the last two letters, "LL“ or “SLL”, is compatible, but will have a
service life of approximately half of the LongLife lamps.
When replacing lamp bulbs, the same type of bulb as originally fitted
should always be used where possible.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
266 If and when
Changing bulbs. Halogen headlights
Types of bulbs
You must only replace a bulb with a bulb of the same type. The name can be
found on the base of the bulb holder.
Bulb Type
Dipped beam headlights (halogen) 12 V/55 W (H7 LL)
Main beam headlights 12 V/55 W (H1)
Turn signal 12 V/21 W (PY21W)
Side lights 12 V/5 W (W5W LL)
WARNING
● Take particular care when working on components in the engine com-
partment if the engine is warm. Risk of burns.
● Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The glass can break when you
touch the bulb, causing injury.
● The high voltage element of gas discharge bulbs* (xenon light) must
be handled correctly. Otherwise, there is a risk of death.
● When changing bulbs, please take care not to injure yourself on sharp
parts in the headlight housing.
CAUTION
● Remove the ignition key before working on the electric system. Other-
wise, a short circuit could occur.
● Switch off the lights or parking lights before you change a bulb.
For the sake of the environment
Please ask your specialist retailer how to dispose of used bulbs in the prop-
er manner.
Note
● Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog
lights, the tail lights and the turn signals may be temporarily misted. This
has no influence on the useful life of the lighting system. By switching on
the lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly
be demisted. However, the edges may continue to be misted.
● Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior
lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the inter-
est of your own safety, but also in that of all other road users.
● Before changing a bulb, make sure you have the correct new bulb.
● Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with your bare hands, use a cloth
or paper towel instead. Otherwise, the fingerprints left on the glass will va-
porise as a result of the heat generated by the bulb, they will be deposited
on the reflector and will impair its surface.
267If and when
Removing the air duct
The air duct has to be removed to gain access to the bulbs
for the right-side headlight.
Fig. 191 Air duct on
right side of vehicle
– Unscrew bolts
A
⇒ Fig. 191.
– Detach air duct from guide
B
and take it out.
Fitting the air duct
Once the bulb(s) for the right-side headlight have been
changed, the air duct must be re-installed.
Fig. 192 Air duct on
right side of vehicle
– Place the air duct in the correct position.
– First turn the two screws
A
in lightly, then tighten both screws.
– Push the air duct into guide
B
.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
268 If and when
Halogen headlight bulbs
Fig. 193 Halogen bulbs
Main beam headlights
Side lights
Dipped beam headlights
Side lights
Turn signal
A
B
C
D
E
Changing the turn signal bulb
The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both
sides of the vehicle.
Fig. 194 Turn signal
bulb
– Switch off the ignition and the lights.
– Raise the bonnet.
– Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise, pulling it by the grip
⇒ Fig. 194 and removing the bulb holder and the bulb.
– Replace the blown bulb in the bulb holder (press and turn anti-
clockwise to remove) with a new bulb (press and turn clockwise
to insert).
– Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.
– Check whether the new bulb is working.
269If and when
Note
Although it is not necessary, previously remove the rigid cover ⇒ Fig. 197
for easier turn signal bulb changes.
Changing the main headlight bulb
The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both
sides of the vehicle.
Fig. 195 Main beam
headlights
Fig. 196 Main beam
headlights
– Switch off the ignition and the lights.
– Raise the bonnet.
– Pull up on the rubber cover
A
⇒ Fig. 195 to remove it.
– Remove connector ⇒ Fig. 196
1
from the bulb.
– Press the spring ⇒ Fig. 196
2
inwards and to the right.
– Remove the bulb. pulling it from the connection terminal and
fitting fit the replacement so that it sits correctly in the cut-out
on the reflector. To ensure correct lighting, the filament must be
vertical. When changing the bulb, you can check the position of
the bulb through the headlight glass.
– Installation is in reverse order, ensuring that the rubber cover is
well fitted to the housing.
– Check whether the new bulb is working.
– Have the headlight settings checked as soon as possible.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
270 If and when
Changing the dipped beam headlight bulb
The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both
sides of the vehicle.
Fig. 197 Dipped beam
headlights
Fig. 198 Dipped beam
headlights
– Switch off the ignition and the lights.
– Raise the bonnet.
– Move the brace ⇒ Fig. 197
1
in the direction of the arrow and
remove the rigid cover, separating the brace side and then re-
moving the two tabs from the other end of the cover.
– Pull the connector ⇒ Fig. 198
2
from the bulb.
– Unclip the retainer spring ⇒ Fig. 198
3
pressing inwards to the
right.
– Remove the bulb and fit the new one in the headlight casing
with the tab upwards, starting to position it from below.
– Clip on the spring, raising it and pressing it slightly while turn-
ing it anticlockwise. To ensure correct lighting, the filament
must be vertical. When changing the bulb, you can check the
position of the bulb through the headlight glass.
– Connect the connector to the bulb.
– Fit the cover, first inserting the side tabs and then closing the
cover and the brace. Make sure that the gasket sits well on the
casing cover during the operation.
– Check whether the new bulb is working.
– Have the headlight settings checked as soon as possible.
271If and when
Changing the side light bulb (outside of vehicle)
The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both
sides of the vehicle.
Fig. 199 Side light bulb
(outside of vehicle)
Fig. 200 Side light bulb
(outside of vehicle)
– Switch off the ignition and the lights.
– Raise the bonnet.
– Move the brace ⇒ Fig. 199
1
in the direction of the arrow and
remove the rigid cover, separating the brace side and then re-
moving the two tabs from the other end of the cover.
– Gently press on the bulb holder tabs ⇒ Fig. 200 and pull the
cover upwards (it can also be removed by pulling on the bulb
holder wires).
– Separate the bulb from the bulb holder by pulling both pieces
anticlockwise.
– Fit the new bulb by pressing on the bulb holder.
– Insert the bulb into the socket and press on the bulb holder. Fit
the cover, first inserting the side tabs and then closing the cov-
er and the brace. Make sure that the gasket sits well on the cas-
ing cover during the operation.
– Check whether the new bulb is working.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
272 If and when
Changing the side light bulb (inside of vehicle)
The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both
sides of the vehicle.
Fig. 201 Side light bulb
(inside of vehicle)
Fig. 202 Side lights.
Bulb holder grip in verti-
cal position
– Switch off the ignition and the lights.
– Raise the bonnet.
– Move the brace ⇒ Fig. 201
1
in the direction of the arrow and
remove the rigid cover, separating the brace side and then re-
moving the two tabs from the other end of the cover.
– Remove the bulb and the bulb holder by pulling on the bulb
holder wiring.
– Separate the bulb from the bulb holder by pulling both pieces
anticlockwise.
– Fit the new bulb by pressing on the bulb holder.
– Insert the bulb into the socket so that the side of the bulb hold-
er grip is vertical ⇒ Fig. 202 and press on it.
– Fit the cover, first inserting the side tabs and then closing the
cover and the brace. Make sure that the gasket sits well on the
casing cover during the operation.
– Check whether the new bulb is working.
Changing bulbs. Bi-Xenon AFS headlights
Types of bulbs
Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of practical skill
You can change the following bulb for the exterior lights yourself:
● Bulb for headlights: Indicator light 12V/21W (PY21W)
The following bulbs should only be changed by a specialised workshop:
273If and when
● Main headlight lamps: Xenon ⇒
lights.
● Sources of the DRL (daylight) light unit and position.
WARNING
● Take particular care when working on components in the engine com-
partment if the engine is warm. Risk of burns.
● Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The glass can break when you
touch the bulb, causing injury.
● The high voltage element of gas discharge bulbs* (xenon light) must
be handled correctly. Otherwise, there is a risk of death.
● When changing bulbs, please take care not to injure yourself on sharp
parts in the headlight housing.
CAUTION
● Remove the ignition key before working on the electric system. Other-
wise, a short circuit could occur.
● Switch off the lights or parking lights before you change a bulb.
For the sake of the environment
Please ask your specialist retailer how to dispose of used bulbs in the prop-
er manner.
Note
● Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog
lights, the tail lights and the turn signals may be temporarily misted. This
has no influence on the useful life of the lighting system. By switching on
the lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly
be demisted. However, the edges may continue to be misted.
● Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior
lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the inter-
est of your own safety, but also in that of all other road users.
● Before changing a bulb, make sure you have the correct new bulb.
● Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with your bare hands, use a cloth
or paper towel instead. Otherwise, the fingerprints left on the glass will va-
porise as a result of the heat generated by the bulb, they will be deposited
on the reflector and will impair its surface.
Removing the air duct
The air duct has to be removed to gain access to the bulbs
for the right-side headlight.
Fig. 203 Air duct on
right side of vehicle
– Unscrew bolts
A
⇒ Fig. 203.
– Detach air duct from guide
B
and take it out.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
274 If and when
Fitting the air duct
Once the bulb(s) for the right-side headlight have been
changed, the air duct must be re-installed.
Fig. 204 Air duct on
right side of vehicle
– Place the air duct in the correct position.
– First turn the two screws
A
in lightly, then tighten both screws.
– Push the air duct into guide
B
.
Bi-Xenon AFS headlight bulbs
Fig. 205 Bi-Xenon AFS
headlight bulbs
Turn signal
Xenon headlight (dipped beam/main beam)
A
B
275If and when
Changing the turn signal bulb
The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both
sides of the vehicle.
Fig. 206 Turn signal
bulb
Fig. 207 Turn signal
bulb
– Switch off the ignition and the lights.
– Raise the bonnet.
– Pull the rubber cap ⇒ Fig. 206 to remove it.
– Remove the bulb holder by pulling on the grip and turning it an-
ticlockwise ⇒ Fig. 207.
– Replace the blown bulb in the bulb holder (press and turn anti-
clockwise to remove) with a new bulb (press and turn clockwise
to insert).
– Insert the bulb holder into the socket with the tab facing up-
wards and the grip horizontal. Press it against the socket and
turn clockwise. When changing the bulb, you can check the po-
sition of the bulb through the headlight glass.
– Fit the rubber cap and tighten, making sure it fit properly into
the headlight casing.
– Check whether the new bulb is working.
Changing the xenon bulb
The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both sides of the vehi-
cle.
WARNING
This type of bulb should be changed at a specialised workshop.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
276 If and when
Changing tail light bulbs (on side panel)
Overview of tail lights
Fig. 208 Overview of tail
lights
Tail lights on side panel
● Brake light and side light
● Side lights
● Turn signal
Overview of tail lights. LED lamps
Fig. 209 Overview of tail
lights
Tail lights on side panel
● Brake light and side light
● Side lights
● Turn signal
Note
● It is only possible to change the turn signal light.
● If the warning lamp for the side light and/or rear fog light (LED lights)
lights up, the tail light assembly should be replaced.
● The failure of the lamp is only shown when the LED function goes out
completely. Sometimes, a LED will stop working, without displaying the
warning as the function continues to operate.
277If and when
Removing tail light
To change the bulbs you must remove the tail light assem-
bly. Removing the light requires a certain degree of practical
skill.
Fig. 210 Luggage com-
partment: Location of the
bolt securing the tail
light unit
Fig. 211 Remove rear
light unit from side panel
A special retaining screw is used to secure and guide the tail light.
– Check which of the bulbs is defective.
– Open the rear lid.
– Prise open the cover at the slot with the flat blade of a screw-
driver ⇒ Fig. 210
1
.
– Use a screwdriver to loosen the screw
2
(arrow) located be-
hind the cover.
– Gradually ease the tail light out of the housing (⇒ Fig. 211 posi-
tions
3
and
4
) by pulling alternately in positions
1
and
2
.
– Remove the bulb holder ⇒ page 278.
CAUTION
Take care when removing the rear light unit to make sure there is no dam-
age to the paintwork or any of its components.
Note
Make sure you have a soft cloth ready to place under the glass on the rear
light unit, to avoid any scratches.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
278 If and when
Remove the bulb holder
When changing a bulb, you must first remove the bulb hold-
er.
Fig. 212 Retaining tabs
on reverse side of tail
light
There are three securing tabs on the inside of the tail light.
– Release the retaining tabs ⇒ Fig. 212
A
.
– Take out the bulb holder.
– Change the defective bulb ⇒ page 278 ⇒ page 279.
WARNING
If a bulb is replaced in a tail light assembly with LED, do not pull too hard
on the bulb holder. This may damage the wiring of the LED module.
Changing bulbs
All bulbs can be changed easily in the bulb holder.
Fig. 213 Position of the
bulbs in the bulb holder
Example: Left tail light in
side panel.
The bulbs are secured with a bayonet fastener. The table below
gives an overview of the bulb positions.
– Lightly press the defective bulb into the bulb holder, then turn it
to the left and remove it.
– Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb holder and turn it to
the right as far as it will go.
– Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the
bulb.
– Check that the new bulb works properly.
– Re-install the bulb holder ⇒ page 279.
279If and when
Position of the bulbs
Pos.
⇒ Fig. 213
Bulb function
A Brake light and side light P21W LL
B Side lights P21W LL
C Turn signal PY21W
Changing bulbs. LED lamps
All bulbs can be changed easily in the bulb holder.
Fig. 214 Position of the
bulb on the bulb holder.
Example: Left tail light in
side panel.
The bulb is secured with a bayonet fastener. The table below gives
an overview of the bulb positions.
– Lightly press the defective bulb into the bulb holder, then turn it
to the left and remove it.
– Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb holder and turn it to
the right as far as it will go.
– Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the
bulb.
– Check that the new bulb works properly.
– Re-install the bulb holder ⇒ page 279.
Position of the bulbs
Pos.
⇒ Fig. 214
Bulb function
A Turn signal PY21W
Note
● It is only possible to change the turn signal light.
● If the brake light and/or side lights with LEDs have to be replaced, the
tail light must be replaced.
Fitting the bulb holder
The bulb holder is easy to fit.
– Position the bulb holder on the tail light and align it so that it is
securely seated.
– Press the bulb holder into the tail light until it engages.
– Re-install the tail light unit ⇒ page 280.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
280 If and when
Fitting the tail light unit
The tail light unit is easy to fit.
Fig. 215 Fitting the tail
light unit
Fig. 216 Luggage com-
partment: Location of the
bolt securing the tail
light unit
– First place the tail light unit in ⇒ Fig. 215 arrow
1
in the hous-
ing.
– Gently press the tail light unit against the housing, first in posi-
tion
2
and then in position
3
, until that the clips engage firm-
ly in the rubber mountings.
– Apply gentle pressure to the upper part of the tail light unit and
secure using the screwdriver, from the luggage compartment
⇒ Fig. 216
1
.
– Try to move the tail light sideways to ensure it is correctly fitted.
– Replace the cover
2
in the interior trim.
– Make sure that all bulbs for the tail lights are working.
CAUTION
Take care when fitting the tail light unit to make sure there is no damage to
the paintwork or any of its components.
281If and when
Changing tail light bulbs (on rear lid)
Overview of tail lights
Fig. 217 Overview of tail
lights
Tail lights on the rear lid
● Side lights
● Rear fog light
● Reverse light
Overview of tail lights. LED lamps
Fig. 218 Overview of tail
lights
Tail lights on the rear lid
● Side lights
● Rear fog light
● Reverse light
Note
● It is only possible to change the reverse light.
● If the warning lamp for the side light and/or rear fog light (LED lights)
lights up, the tail light assembly should be replaced.
● The failure of the lamp is only shown when the LED function goes out
completely. Sometimes, a LED will stop working, without displaying the
warning as the function continues to operate.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
282 If and when
Remove the bulb holder
The rear lid must be open to change the bulbs.
Fig. 219 Remove the
cover from the rear lid
Fig. 220 Remove the
bulb holder
You can access the bulb holder for the inner tail lights via the in-
side of the rear lid.
– Check which of the bulbs is defective.
– Insert a screwdriver into the opening in the cover from the top
⇒ Fig. 219 and use it as a lever to detach the cover.
– Press on the tabs
A
⇒ Fig. 220 in the direction of the arrows
and remove the bulb holder by pulling in the direction of the ar-
row
B
.
– Change the bulbs ⇒ page 282 ⇒ page 283.
WARNING
If a bulb is replaced in a tail light assembly with LED, do not pull too hard
on the bulb holder. This may damage the wiring of the LED module.
Changing bulbs
All bulbs can be changed easily in the bulb holder.
Fig. 221 Position of the
bulbs in the bulb holder
Example: Tail lights on
the rear lid
283If and when
The bulbs are secured with a bayonet fastener. The table below
gives an overview of the bulb positions.
– Lightly press the defective bulb into the bulb holder, then turn it
to the left and remove it.
– Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb holder and turn it to
the right as far as it will go.
– Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the
bulb.
– Check that the new bulb works properly.
– Re-install the bulb holder ⇒ page 284.
Position of the bulbs
Pos.
⇒ Fig. 221
Bulb function
A Reverse light P21W LL
B
Side light and
rear fog light
P21W LL
Changing bulbs. LED lamps
All bulbs can be changed easily in the bulb holder.
Fig. 222 Position of the
bulb on the bulb holder.
Example: Tail lights on
the rear lid
The bulb is secured with a bayonet fastening. The table below
gives an overview of the bulb positions.
– Lightly press the defective bulb into the bulb holder, then turn it
to the left and remove it.
– Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb holder and turn it to
the right as far as it will go.
– Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the
bulb.
– Check that the new bulb works properly.
– Re-install the bulb holder ⇒ page 284.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
284 If and when
Position of the bulbs
Pos.
⇒ Fig. 222
Bulb function
A Reverse light P21W LL
Fitting the bulb holder
The bulb holder is easy to fit.
– Check that the seal is seated correctly on the bulb holder.
– Position the bulb holder on the tail light and align it so that it is
securely seated.
– Press the bulb holder into the tail light until it engages.
– Fit the cover back in the interior trim so that it engages.
– Make sure that all bulbs for the tail lights are working.
Side turn signals
Fig. 223 Side turn signal
– Press the turn signal to the left or to the right to remove the
bulb.
– Remove the bulb holder from the turn signal.
– Remove the failed glass bulb and replace with a new bulb.
– Insert the bulb holder in the turn signal guide until it clicks into
place.
– First place the turn signal in the opening in the bodywork, fixing
the tabs ⇒ Fig. 223, arrow
1
.
– Insert the bulb as shown by the arrow
2
⇒ Fig. 223.
285If and when
Luggage compartment lights
Fig. 224 Luggage com-
partment light
Fig. 225 Luggage com-
partment light
– Remove the tulip-shaped fitting by pressing on its inside edge
using the flat side of a screwdriver.
– Remove the protective cover and remove the bulb from the
housing ⇒ Fig. 225.
Registration light
Fig. 226 Number plate
light
Fig. 227 Number plate
light
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
286 If and when
– Unscrew the screws to remove the bulb ⇒ Fig. 226.
– Remove the bulb, moving it in the direction of the arrow and
outwards ⇒ Fig. 227.
– Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.
Sun visor light
Fig. 228 Removing sun
visor light
Fig. 229 Removing sun
visor light
– Remove the bulb carefully, using the flat part of a screwdriver
⇒ Fig. 228.
– Use a screwdriver to remove the protective cover.
– Remove the bulb, moving it in the direction of the arrow and
outwards ⇒ Fig. 229.
Jump-starting
Jump leads
The jump lead must have a sufficient wire cross section.
If the engine fails to start because of a discharged battery, the battery can
be connected to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine.
287If and when
Jump leads
Jump leads must comply with standard DIN 72553 (see cable manufactur-
er's instructions). The wire cross section must be at least 25 mm
2
for petrol
engines and at least 35 mm
2
for diesel engines.
Note
● The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow
as soon as the positive terminals are connected.
● The discharged battery must be properly connected to the on-board net-
work.
How to jump start: description
Fig. 230 Diagram of con-
nections for vehicles
without Start Stop sys-
tem
Fig. 231 Diagram of con-
nections for vehicles
with Start Stop system
Jump lead terminal connections
1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles ⇒
.
2. For vehicles without Start-Stop system:
– Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive
+
termi-
nal of the vehicle with the flat battery
A
⇒ Fig. 230.
– Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive ter-
minal
+
in the vehicle providing assistance
B
.
– Connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal
–
of the vehicle providing assistance
B
⇒ Fig. 230.
– Connect the other end of the black jump lead
X
to a solid met-
al component bolted to the engine block or to the engine block
itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. However, connect it to
a point as far as possible from the battery
A
.
3. For vehicles with Start-Stop system:
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
288 If and when
– Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive
+
termi-
nal of the vehicle with the flat battery
A
⇒ Fig. 231.
– Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive ter-
minal
+
in the vehicle providing assistance
B
.
– Connect one end of the black jump lead
X
to a suitable ground
terminal, a solid piece of metal in the engine block, or to the en-
gine block ⇒ Fig. 231.
– Connect the other end of the black jump lead
X
to a solid met-
al component bolted to the engine block or to the engine block
itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. However, connect it to
a point as far as possible from the battery
A
.
4. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into
contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
Starting
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the boosting battery and let
it run at idling speed.
6. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat battery and wait two
or three minutes until the engine is “running”.
Removing the jump leads
7. Before you remove the jump leads, switch off the dipped beam
headlights (if they are switched on).
8. Turn on the heater blower and heated rear window in the vehi-
cle with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks
which are generated when the leads are disconnected.
9. When the engine is running, disconnect the leads in reverse or-
der to the details given above.
Connect the battery clamps so they have good metal-to-metal contact with
the battery terminals.
If the engine fails to start, switch off the starter after about 10 seconds and
try again after about half a minute.
WARNING
● Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine
compartment ⇒ page 227.
● The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the
flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on
battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
● Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of
explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and
cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.
● Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, dan-
ger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
● Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump
leads.
● Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to
the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery
could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.
● Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the
fuel system or to the brake line.
● The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to
touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not
touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.
● Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact
with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
● Do not lean on the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.
289If and when
Note
The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
soon as the positive terminals are connected.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
290 If and when
Towing and tow-starting
Tow-starting
The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.
We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-start-
ing is preferable ⇒ page 286.
However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:
– Engage the 2nd or the 3rd gear.
– Keep the clutch pressed down.
– Switch the ignition on.
– Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.
– As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the
gear lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the
towing vehicle.
WARNING
The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed
can easily collide with the towing vehicle.
CAUTION
When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
General notes
Please observe the following points if you use a tow rope:
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
– Drive slowly at first until the tow rope is taut. Then accelerate
gradually.
– Begin and change gears cautiously. If you are driving an auto-
matic vehicle, accelerate gently.
– Remember that the brake servo and power steering are not
working in the vehicle you are towing. Brake sooner than nor-
mal and pressing the pedal gently.
Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle
– Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at all times when towing.
Tow rope or tow bar
It is easier and safer to tow a vehicle with a tow bar. You should only use a
tow rope if you do not have a tow bar.
A tow rope should be slightly elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles.
It is advisable to use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic
material.
Attach the tow rope or the tow bar only to the towline anchorages provided
or a towing bracket.
Driving style
Towing requires some experience, especially when using a tow rope. Both
drivers should be familiar with the technique required for towing. Inexper-
ienced drivers should not attempt to tow.
291If and when
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking
the tow rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of
overloading and damaging the anchorage points.
The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the
steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals,
horn, windscreen wipers and washers.
As the brake servo does not work if the engine is not running, you must ap-
ply considerably more pressure to the brake pedal than you normally would.
As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running,
you will need more strength to steer than you normally would.
Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox
● Put the selector lever into position “N”.
● Do not drive faster than 50 km/h (30 mph).
● Do not tow further than 50 km.
● If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front
wheels raised.
Note
● Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting.
● Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe
any regulations to the contrary.
● For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be
tow-started.
● If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gear-
box, you must raise the driven wheels while the vehicle is being towed.
● If the vehicle has to be towed more than 50 km (30 miles), the front
wheels should be raised during towing, and towing should be carried out by
a qualified person.
● The steering wheel is locked when the vehicle has no electrical power.
The vehicle must then be towed with the front wheels raised. Towing should
be carried out by a qualified person.
● The towline anchorage should always be kept in the vehicle. Please refer
to the notes ⇒ page 290, Tow-starting.
Front towing eye
Fig. 232 Fitting the tow-
line anchorage to front of
the vehicle
Fitting the towline anchorage
– Take the towline anchorage from the on-board tool set.
– Remove the front cover by pressing down on the right hand
side.
– Bolt the anchorage to its limit to the left, in the direction of the
arrow ⇒ Fig. 232.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
292 If and when
Rear towline anchorage
There is a towline anchorage at the rear on the right below the rear bumper.
293Description of specifications
Technical Specifications
Description of specifications
Important information
Important
The information in the vehicle documentation always takes
precedence over the information in this Instruction Manual.
All technical specifications provided in this documentation are valid for the
standard model in Spain. The vehicle data card included in the Mainte-
nance Programme or the vehicle registration documentation shows which
engine is installed in the vehicle.
The figures may be different depending whether additional equipment is fit-
ted, for different models, for special vehicles and for other countries.
Abbreviations used in the Technical Specifications section
Abbrevia-
tion
Meaning
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
PS
Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly used to denote engine
power.
rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
litres per
100 km
Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km (70 miles).
g/km Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per km (mile) travelled.
CO
2
Carbon dioxide
CN Cetane number, indication of the diesel combustion power.
RON
Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance
of petrol.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
294 Description of specifications
Vehicle identification data
The most important information is given on the identifica-
tion plate and the vehicle data sticker.
Fig. 233 Vehicle data
sticker (luggage compart-
ment)
Vehicles for certain export countries do not have an identification plate.
Identification plate
The identification plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compart-
ment.
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from out-
side the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the
left-hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also
located on the right hand side of the engine compartment.
Vehicle data
The data sticker is placed on the inside of the spare wheel well, in the lug-
gage compartment and on the rear cover of the Maintenance Programme.
The following information is provided on the vehicle data sticker: ⇒ Fig. 233
Vehicle identification number (chassis number)
Vehicle type, model, displacement, engine type, finish, engine power
and gearbox type
Engine code, gearbox code, external paint code and internal equipment
code
Optional extras and PR numbers
Consumption values (l/100 km) and CO
2
emissions (g/km)
A
Urban consumption and CO
2
emissions
B
Extra-urban consumption and CO
2
emissions
C
Combined consumption and CO
2
emissions
Information on fuel consumption
Fuel consumption
The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle
data sticker differ from one vehicle to another.
The vehicle fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions can be consulted on the
vehicle data sticker in the spare wheel well, inside the luggage compart-
ment and on the rear cover of the Maintenance Programme.
The fuel consumption and CO
2
emission values refer to the weight category
assigned to your vehicle according to the engine and gearbox combination,
as well as the specific equipment fitted, and is only used to compare be-
tween the different models.
1
2
3
4
5
295Description of specifications
The fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions do not depend only on the per-
formance of the vehicle, they can also differ from the established values de-
pending on other factors such as driving style, road conditions, traffic con-
ditions, environmental conditions, load and number of passengers.
Calculation of fuel consumption
The consumption values have been calculated based on measurements per-
formed or supervised by certified CE laboratories according to the latest ver-
sion of directives 715/2007/EC and 80/1268/CEE (for more information
consult the European Union Publications Office at EUR-Lex: © European Un-
ion, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/en/index.htm) and are valid for the kerb
weight indicated for the vehicle.
Note
In practice, and considering all the factors mentioned here, consumption
values can differ from those calculated in the current European regulations.
Weights
Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity
and without optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for
the weight of the driver.
For special versions and optional equipment fittings or for the addition of
accessories, the weight of the vehicle will increase ⇒
.
WARNING
● Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting
heavy objects; this may affect vehicle handling and lead to an accident.
Always adjust your speed and driving style to suit road conditions and re-
quirements.
● Never exceed the gross axle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight
rating. If the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded,
the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to acci-
dents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
296 Description of specifications
Towing a trailer
Trailer weights
Trailer weight
The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive tri-
als according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are
valid for vehicles in the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50 mph) (in
certain circumstances up to 100 km/h (60 mph). The figures may be differ-
ent in other countries. All data in the official vehicle documentation takes
precedence over these data at all times ⇒
.
Drawbar loads
The maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing bracket
must not exceed 75 kg.
In the interest of road safety, we recommend that you always tow approach-
ing the maximum drawbar load. The response of the trailer on the road will
be poor if the drawbar load is too small.
If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small,
empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with a
wheelbase of less than 1 metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer
weight is legally required for the drawbar load.
WARNING
● For safety reasons, do not exceed the 80 km/h (50 mph) limit. This is
also valid in countries where higher speeds are permitted.
● Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the drawbar load. If the
permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the
driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents,
injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Wheels
Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheel bolts
Tyre pressures
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the
fuel tank flap. The tyre pressure values given there are for cold tyres. The
slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be reduced. ⇒
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels.
Consult the section “wheels” of this manual.
Wheel bolts
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel
bolts should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench ⇒
.
The tightening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
● Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking the tyre
pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low,
there is an increased danger of accidents, particularly at high speeds.
● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loos-
en while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening tor-
que is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.
Note
We recommend that you ask your Technical Service for information about
appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
297Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Engine specifications
Checking fluid levels
From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the ve-
hicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids, other-
wise serious damage to the engine may be caused.
Fig. 234 Diagram for the location of the various elements
Vehicle battery
Engine oil filler cap
Brake fluid reservoir
Engine oil level dipstick
1
2
3
4
Coolant expansion tank
Windscreen washer fluid container
Hydraulic fluid reservoir for power steering
The checking and refilling of service fluids are carried out on the compo-
nents mentioned above. These operations are described in the ⇒ page 227.
Overview
You will find further explanations, instructions and restrictions on the tech-
nical specifications as of ⇒ page 293.
Note
The layout of parts may vary depending on the engine.
5
6
7
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
298 Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.8 88 kW (120 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 88 (120) / 3650-6200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 230 / 1500-3650
No. of cylinders/capacity in cm
3
4 / 1798
Fuel Super 95 RON
a)
/Super 91 RON
b)
a)
Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b)
Slight power loss.
Performance
Maximum speed in km/h 202
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10,6
Weights
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1980
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1495
Gross front axle weight in kg 1075
Gross rear axle weight in kg 1030
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer weight
Trailer without brakes in kg 740
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% in kg 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% in kg 1300
299Technical specifications
Petrol engine 1.8 118 kW (160 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 118 (160) / 4500-6200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250 / 1500-4500
No. of cylinders/capacity in cm
3
4 / 1798
Fuel Super 95 RON
a)
/Super 91 RON
b)
a)
Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b)
Slight power loss.
Performance
Maximum speed in km/h 225
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8,6
Weights
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1980
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1495
Gross front axle weight in kg 1075
Gross rear axle weight in kg 1030
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer weight
Trailer without brakes in kg 740
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% in kg 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% in kg 1300
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
300 Technical specifications
Petrol engine 2.0 147 kW (200 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 147 (200) / 5100
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 280 / 1800
No. of cylinders/capacity in cm
3
4 / 1984
Fuel Super 98 RON
a)
/Super 95 RON
b)
a)
Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b)
Slight power loss.
Performance
Maximum speed in km/h 235
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 7,3
Weights
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2015
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1530
Gross front axle weight in kg 1120
Gross rear axle weight in kg 1030
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer weight
Trailer without brakes in kg 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% in kg 1700
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% in kg 1500
301Technical specifications
Petrol engine 2.0 155 kW (211 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 155 (211) / 4600-6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320 / 1500-4600
No. of cylinders/capacity in cm
3
4 / 1984
Fuel Super 95 RON
a)
/Super 91 RON
b)
a)
Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.
b)
Slight power loss.
Performance
Maximum speed in km/h 244
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 7,1
Weights
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1990
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1505
Gross front axle weight in kg 1090
Gross rear axle weight in kg 1030
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer weight
Trailer without brakes in kg 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% in kg 1700
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% in kg 1500
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
302 Technical specifications
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 88 kW (120 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 88 (120) / 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 290 / 1750-2500
No. of cylinders/capacity in cm
3
4 / 1968
Fuel Min, diesel acc. to DIN EN 590 51 CN
a)
a)
Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel
Performance
Maximum speed in km/h 204
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7,2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10,5
Weights
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1990
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1505
Gross front axle weight in kg 1100
Gross rear axle weight in kg 1015
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer weight
Trailer without brakes in kg 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% in kg 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% in kg 1300
303Technical specifications
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 105 kW (143 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 105 (143) / 4200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320 / 1750-2500
No. of cylinders/capacity in cm
3
4 / 1968
Fuel Min, diesel acc. to DIN EN 590 51 CN
a)
a)
Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel
Performance
Manual Automatic
Maximum speed in km/h 215 208
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,3 6,3
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9,2 9,3
Weights
Manual Automatic
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1990 2030
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1505 1545
Gross front axle weight in kg 1100 1135
Gross rear axle weight in kg 1015 1030
Permitted roof load in kg 75 75
Trailer weight
Manual Automatic
Trailer without brakes in kg 750 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% in kg 1800 1900
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% in kg 1400 1700
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
304 Technical specifications
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 125 kW (170 PS)
Engine specifications
Power output in kW (PS) rpm 125 (170) / 4200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 350 / 1750-2500
No. of cylinders/capacity in cm
3
4 / 1968
Fuel Min, diesel acc. to DIN EN 590 51 CN
a)
a)
Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel
Performance
Maximum speed in km/h 229
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8,4
Weights
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2015
Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1530
Gross front axle weight in kg 1115
Gross rear axle weight in kg 1030
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer weight
Trailer without brakes in kg 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% in kg 1800
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% in kg 1600
305Technical specifications
Dimensions and capacities
Dimensions
Length, width 4661-4741
a)
mm/ 1772 mm
Height at kerb weight 1430 mm
Front and rear projection 976 mm/ 1043-1123
a)
mm
Wheelbase 2642 mm
Turning circle 11.2 m
Track width
b)
Front Rear
1522 mm 1523 mm
Capacities
Fuel tank 70 litres. Reserve 10 litres.
Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer 4.8 l.
Tyre pressure
Summer-grade tyres:
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.
Winter tyres:
The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0.2 bar.
a)
With towing eye.
b)
This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications
Index
Numbers and Symbols
230 V socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
A
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Airbag
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Air conditioner
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Air purity sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Air recirculation (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
ECON Mode (economy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Economical use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Key settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Solar-powered blower/sunroof . . . . . . . . . 163
Temperature selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Air duct
Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 274
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 273
Air purity sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Alternator
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Anti-lock brake system
How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Interior monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Armrest
Storage compartment in front armrest . . . 141
Armrests
Adjusting the front armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Ashtray
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
ASR
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
How the system works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Athermic windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Auto-check system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Automatic gearbox
Dynamic gear control programme . . . . . . . 184
Kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
multitronic® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Paddle levers (tiptronic mode) . . . . . . . . . 186
Safety interlock for ignition key . . . . . . . . . 166
Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Steering wheel with paddle levers . . . . . . 186
tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
tiptronic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Automatic headlight control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Auxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Battery voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Long periods of non-use . . . . . . . . . . 238, 239
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238, 239
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238, 239
Bicycle rack
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Biodiesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
307Index
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Brake light
Failure control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Worn brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Brake system
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Bulb change
general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
C
Car care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Central locking
Manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Sunroof: opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . 113
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Locking and unlocking the vehicle from in-
side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Opening and closing the windows . . . . . . 111
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Security central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Switch on the driver door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Changing tail light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Changing the main headlight bulb
Main headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Changing the main headlight bulbs
Dipped beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Changing the tail lights
Luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . 285
Changing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . 236
Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Checklist
Seat upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Childproof lock
Rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Child safety seat
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Child seat
Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Groups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Cleaning alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Cleaning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Cleaning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Cleaning steel wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Cleaning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Clock, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
In the door trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
In the front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Coolant
Checking the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Coolant fluid
Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Cooling system
Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Correct adjustment of front seat head re-
straints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Correct adjustment of rear seat head restraints
In-use and non-use positions . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Correct sitting position
front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
308 Index
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Adjust the stored speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Deactivating temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Setting the speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Cruise speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
D
Danger of fitting a child seat on the front pas-
senger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Dash panel cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Data entry control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Date display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Daytime driving lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Deactivating front passenger airbag
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Deactivating the airbag
Front passenger front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Diesel engine
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Diesel engine particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
DIS
Average fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Average speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Driving time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Instantaneous fuel consumption . . . . . . . . 86
Disposal
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Distance covered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Distance to empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 86
Door and rear lid warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Doors
Childproof lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Locking the doors manually if the central
locking fails to work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Driver
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . 10, 11, 12
Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Auto-check system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
CD, radio and telephone display . . . . . . . . . 73
Door and rear lid warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Driver messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Handbrake warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Menu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Onboard computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Red symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Yellow symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Driver messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
driver seat
Assigning the key to the seat . . . . . . . . . . 139
Driver seat
Activating stored settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
With memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Driving
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Economically / Environmentally friendly . 196
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
DRP
see Dynamic gear control programme . . . 184
Dynamic gear control programme . . . . . . . . . . 184
E
Economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Possible malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Switches on the driver door . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Switch on front passenger's door . . . . . . . 110
Electronic differential lock
How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
309Index
Emergencies
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Disconnecting the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 257
Sunroof emergency activation . . . . . . . . . . 114
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Tyre mobility system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Engine
Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Engine compartment
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Engine coolant
G 12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
G 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Checking the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Engine oil pressure too low . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Oil sensor defective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Engine speed governing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Roof racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Environmentally friendly driving . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Environmental tip
Avoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
see also Electronic Stability Control . . . . . 165
Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
F
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Front drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . 44
Fuel
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Fuel level low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Instantaneous fuel consumption . . . . . . . . 86
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196, 294
Fuel tank
opening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Fuel: save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
G
Gear display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Gear shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
General overview of the engine compartment 297
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
H
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Headlights
Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Automatic headlight control . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Automatic headlight control photosensors . .116
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Front fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Head restraint
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Head restraints
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Removing and fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Heated
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
310 Index
Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
How to jump start description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
I
Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Ignition key
Safety interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Indicator lamps
Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Indicator lamps - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Instruments
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 119
Interior lights
Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Interior mirror
With manual anti-dazzle setting . . . . . . . . 130
Interior monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Intermittent wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
J
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 257
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
K
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Air conditioner settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Settings for the driver seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
L
Lamps
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Cruise speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 119
Lights
Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Automatic headlight control . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Coming home function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Dipped beam headlights faulty . . . . . . . . . . 83
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . 120
Headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Leaving home function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Parking light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Reverse lights faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Xenon lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Load compartment in the luggage compart-
ment
see Loading the luggage compartment . . . 16
Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 16
Locking the doors manually if the central lock-
ing fails to work
Locking the doors manually if the central
locking fails to work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Long periods of non-use
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Ski bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
see also Loading the luggage compartment . .16
Luggage rack
see Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
M
Main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 122
Maintenance
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Mirrors
Activating stored settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Automatic exterior mirror adjustment . . . . 137
Heated exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
311Index
Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Mobile phones and two-way radios . . . . . . . . 223
multitronic® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
N
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
O
Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Octane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Onboard computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Overview
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
P
Paddle levers
tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Paintwork
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
multitronic® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Parking aid
SEAT Parking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
SEAT Parking System plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Parking aid acoustic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Passenger
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . 10, 11, 12
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Photosensor faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 19
Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Plastic parts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 149
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 210
Q
Quartz clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
R
Radiator fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Radio display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Rain sensor faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Reading lights
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Rear drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Rear lid
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Rear side window sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Rear view mirrors
Anti-dazzle interior mirror with automatic
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Anti-dazzle setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Rear window sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Registration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Remote control key
Indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Locking and unlocking the vehicle . . . . . . 106
Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Remote control keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Re-synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Removing and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Repairs
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Replacement of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Reverse gear
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Attachment points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
312 Index
Run-flat tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Running in
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
S
SAFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Aspects to take into account . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Safety instructions
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Safety notes
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Deactivating front passenger airbag . . . . . . 45
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Seat adjustment
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Seat belt cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Seat belt control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Seat belt position
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Seat belt protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Seat belt tensioner
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Seats
Electric adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Electric backrest adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Manual adjustment of lumbar support . . . 134
Manual backrest angle adjustment . . . . . 134
Moving the seat forwards and backwards 133
Seat height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Seat upholstery
Alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
cleaning Alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Cleaning and maintenance of natural leath-
er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
cleaning the trim fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
synthetic leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Service indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Servotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Sitting position
driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Sitting position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Ski bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Automatic close function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Emergency activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 296
Solar-powered blower/sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Solar sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Spare keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Spare wheel
Steel rim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 83
Speed warning function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Start-Stop
Activating and deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Steam jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Steering
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Manual steering wheel adjustment . . . . . 165
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
313Index
Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Switches on the driver door
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Symbols
Red symbols in central display . . . . . . . . . . 78
Yellow symbols on central display . . . . . . . 80
T
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 20
The environment
Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Warming up the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . 296
tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
tiptronic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200, 290
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Notes on towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200, 201
Removable towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Towing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Tow starting
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Traction control system
How the system works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Traction control system (ASR)
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Turn signal lamps
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Trailer turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Tyre mobility system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Tyre Mobility System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 91, 242
Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Tyre repair kit
Tyre Mobility System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Tyres and wheels
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Tyres tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Tyres useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . 242
U
Underbody protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Upholstery
Treating your upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
V
Vehicle care
Treating your upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Vehicle maintenance
electrically adjustable seats . . . . . . . . . . . 218
heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
natural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
non-electrically adjustable seats . . . . . . . 218
seats with airbag components . . . . . . . . . 218
seats without airbag components . . . . . . 218
synthetic leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
trim fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
unheated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Vehicle modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Vehicle paintwork
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . 210
Vehicle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
W
Warning lamp
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Warning lamps
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
314 Index
Engine management (EPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . 66
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Red symbols in central display . . . . . . . . . . 78
Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Yellow symbols on central display . . . . . . . 80
Warning lamps - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Washing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Washing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 212
Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Wearing suitable shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242, 296
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Why assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 28
Why should head restraints be correctly adjus-
ted? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 19, 28
Windows
Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Windscreen washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Windscreen wiper blades
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Changing blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Winter
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Winter conditions
Defrost function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Winter driving
Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Winter operation
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Wiper and washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Wooden trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
315Index
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-
stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason
no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.04.13
SEAT recommends Castrol
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3R5012003CT
Inglés 3R5012003CT (05.13) (GT9)
EXEO
Owner’s manual
EXEO Inglés (05.13)
